software
user manual
24-10832-194 Revision E
December 2017
Copyright 2017
Johnson Controls
All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced without the prior permission of Johnson Controls.
If this document is translated from the original English version by Johnson Controls, all reasonable endeavors will be
used to ensure the accuracy of translation. Johnson Controls shall not be liable for any translation errors contained
herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing or use of this translated material.
Due to continuous development of our products, the information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Johnson Controls shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with furnishing or use of this material. Contents of this publication may be preliminary and/or may be
changed at any time without any obligation to notify anyone of such revision or change, and shall not be regarded as
a warranty.
Technical Support
For factory technical support, Johnson Controls authorized field technicians or authorized dealer representatives can
contact Global Security Solutions Technical Support by phone at (866) 893-0423 or (414) 524-1214, or by email at
support.globalsecuritysolutions@jci.com. They can also call the Field Support Center at (800) 524-1330 or (414)
524-5000 and use options 6, 1, 7.
End users and customers should contact their local Johnson Controls branch or authorized dealer for any of their
support needs (technical support, maintenance contracts, on-site field support, P2000 Software Service Agreements,
Service Partnerships, and so on). Visit http://www.johnsoncontrols.com/location-finder to find your local
Johnson Controls office.
For material returns contact the branch if the material was purchased through a Johnson Controls branch or through
the Product Sales Operations Team, if ordered through the Advanced Order Management System (AOMS) and
follow the RMA process; or contact the authorized dealer representative where the material was purchased directly.
Acknowledgment
Metasys® and Johnson Controls® are trademarks of Johnson Controls. All other company and product names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
i
Table of Contents
24-10832-194 Rev. E
ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
Instruction Conventions.........................................................................................................13
Menu Shortcuts...............................................................................................................13
Verification Passwords....................................................................................................14
Context Sensitive Help....................................................................................................14
Online Help .....................................................................................................................14
P2000 Tutorial.................................................................................................................14
Viewing the Toolbar ........................................................................................................15
24-10832-194 Rev. E
iii
24-10832-194 Rev. E
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-10832-194 Rev. E
v
24-10832-194 Rev. E
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-10832-194 Rev. E
vii
24-10832-194 Rev. E
viii TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-10832-194 Rev. E
ix
24-10832-194 Rev. E
x TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-10832-194 Rev. E
xi
24-10832-194 Rev. E
xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
24-10832-194 Rev. E
xiii
24-10832-194 Rev. E
xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index.........................................................................................................................................537
24-10832-194 Rev. E
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
T Chapter Summaries
he Johnson Controls® P2000 security
management system represents the
latest technology in integrated security
solutions. Using Microsoft® Chapter 1: Introduction. Presents the con-
Windows® operating systems, operators can ventions used throughout this manual, an
easily configure and use the P2000 software. overview of basic system components, and
menu options available in the system. The
Through its intuitively laid-out menus, users system overview familiarizes you with
can create cardholder records, define hardware P2000 system capabilities and how to log
components, and control access using badging, on, log off, and navigate through the system.
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV), Digital
Chapter 2: Configuring the System.
Video Recorder (DVR) or Video Management
Directs you through tasks to properly con-
System (VMS), area control, mustering, and
figure your system for operation. Elements
elevator control to name a few, as well as mon-
featured in this chapter include: Worksta-
itor local and remote transactions and alarm
tions, Operators, Permissions, Site Parame-
activity in real time.
ters, Local Configuration, Time Zones,
Holidays, Panels, Terminals, Input and Out-
put definitions, Elevators and Cabinets,
Note: The screen captures shown in this man- Message Filtering and Routing, Access
ual may differ slightly, depending on the software
Groups, and Cardholder Options.
version you are using.
Chapter 3: Operating the System.
Describes the primary features used to run
the P2000 system. It shows you how to pro-
Getting Started vide access to cardholders and visitors,
monitor alarms, control doors, set outputs
Operators familiar with Windows-based pro- and panel relays, control areas and muster
grams should easily master the P2000 soft- zones, control and detect intrusion in a
ware. This manual provides complete instruc- facility, create events, and monitor the sys-
tions on configuring and operating the system; tem in real time.
and virtually the entire manual content is Chapter 4: Advanced Features. Describes
accessible from the P2000 online Help. features that provide a more efficient way to
operate and monitor your access control
Take a few moments to review the information system. These include Partitioning, Video
in this chapter and get familiar with the P2000 Imaging, MIS Interface, pivCLASS Integra-
system basics. tion, Metasys® System, Guard Tour, CCTV,
DVR/VMS, Redundancy, FDA Part 11,
Intercom, P2000 Enterprise, and Web
Access.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
2 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
24-10832-194 Rev. E
3
24-10832-194 Rev. E
4 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Field Panels – This term refers to CK721-A External Device – This general term describes
S321-IP, OSI, HID®, Assa Abloy®, and Mer- any device wired to one of the terminal types,
cury network panels. These connect to termi- such as readers, motion sensors or other input
nals and communicate with the Server. See devices, door strikes, or audible alarm devices.
Appendix C: Panel Comparison Matrix for a
detailed list of features and capabilities.
Main Menu
Terminals – Terminals provide a point of con-
tact with panels to facilitate a variety of func-
tions. Depending on your panel type, some ter- The Main menu is the backbone of the P2000
minal boards can be used to connect readers, system. From here, you select each feature and
input points, and output points and can be option available in the system. While logical
mounted in the basic panel enclosure or an operation of the system does not follow the
expansion enclosure. CK721-A terminals con- Main menu from right-to-left, every menu and
nect to RDR2S-A and RDR8S modules. option is displayed.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
5
Parameters associated with your system, such Output Relays – Provides a basic description
as maximum number of badges, terminals, and of output relays.
workstations are enabled via the entry of a Events – Describes how input points and out-
Registration Key. Also, if your system takes put relays can be manipulated automatically or
advantage of advance features such as Enter- manually in various ways to create events.
prise or integrate with third-party hardware
such as OSI devices, it requires the entry of Database Partitioning – Provides an over-
Option Keys to control those features (some of view of how database partitioning is used
these features must be selected during installa- within the P2000 system.
tion). Both the Registration and Option keys
are provided by Johnson Controls and are
associated with your purchase contract. Refer P2000 Application Programming
to the P2000 Software Installation manual for Interface
instructions.
Various published P2000 Application Pro-
gramming Interfaces (APIs) are available for
third-party integrations into the P2000 system.
System Overview The APIs published by Johnson Controls are
product features that are tested and validated;
This section is designed to help P2000 users customer issues related to their use can be
understand basic concepts before configuring resolved through Hotfixes and Service Packs
the system. The following topics are covered: by raising cases through the appropriate sup-
port channels. Full technical support is avail-
P2000 Application Programming Interface able for tickets associated with P2000 system
– Provides information on P2000 application APIs published by Johnson Controls.
programming interfaces.
Controlling Special Access – Describes fea- CK721-A panels support terminals, readers,
tures that can override normal system opera- input, and output devices, and connect to the
tion. P2000 Server via a network card. Each panel
has an embedded 32-bit processor, with
Alarms – Describes various types of alarms. 64-reader capability.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
6 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
You can configure an entire system using Central – This mode is useful when you want
CK721-A panels, or use them in combination to assign access restrictions on a global scale
with S321-IP panels; or use third-party devices (throughout the entire system). All access
such as OSI, HID, Assa Abloy, or Mercury requests are forwarded to the Server for an
panels. access grant or deny decision. Central mode
has the most impact on system performance
A single workstation is shown in Figure 1-1 on (the slowest), and should be used only when
page 3; however, a fully configured Server can necessary.
support multiple workstations. The number of
workstations (including the Server) depends on Shared – Access decisions are made either at
the type of system you purchased. the panel level or by the Server. Field panels
first search for a badge in their memory, as in
If Integrated Video Imaging is part of the con- Local mode. If a badge’s record is not found at
figuration, the Video Imaging workstation is the panel level, the access request is then for-
attached to the network similarly to the work- warded to the Server, as in Central mode.
stations. Shared mode is useful when a panel’s badge
capacity is exceeded.
Communication Modes Shared mode is the preferred method of opera-
The P2000 Server communicates with panels tion. This mode not only gives you the high
that provide reader interfaces, input points, or performance of Local mode for badges stored
output relays. Communication is bi-direc- in the panel memory, but also gives proper
tional, some messages are sent from the Server access to all badges even if they are not stored
to the field panels, other messages are sent in the panel memory.
from the panels to the Server, and then can be
distributed within the system (through work- Types of Communication
stations). The volume of messages across the
communication link depends, in part, on the The P2000 Server communicates with system
overall operating mode of the system. field panels via Transactions, Downloads, and
Commands.
While several factors affect overall system per-
formance (performance is defined as the speed Transactions – Transactions indicate some
with which communication occurs between the form of system activity. They can include
Server, workstations, and field panels), the items such as access requests and general sys-
most significant factor is operating mode, tem messages such as when a panel loses com-
which is defined when configuring the system. munication with a reader. Typically, transac-
The P2000 system provides the following three tions represent communication initiated at field
operating modes for CK721-A panels: panels and sent to the P2000 Server.
Local – In this mode, the field panels make all Downloads – Downloads refer to the transfer of
access decisions. This eliminates the need for system configuration information from the
panels to communicate with the Server every P2000 Server to the memory of the field pan-
time an access request is presented at a reader. els. This includes information such as badge
Local mode provides the best overall system records and access rights. Network panels can
capability; however, access is denied to those be downloaded in minutes using the download
badges not stored in the panel memory. feature.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
7
24-10832-194 Rev. E
8 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
The other means of providing special access is When a door is unsecured because of unautho-
through badge privileges. Privileges are con- rized activities, the door is considered to be in
figured as part of a badge’s definition. Badge a forced alarm state and is reported to the sys-
privileges allow the cardholder the following tem. The system can also monitor cases where
access: the door is propped open after a valid access
grant.
access to the facility outside normal operat-
ing hours.
Software-Only Alarms
access using different access times, to sat-
isfy the requirements for assisted access Software-only alarms are unlike external
according to ADA (Americans with Dis- device alarms in that software alarms are trig-
abilities Act). gered by system activities (such as when a
extended access by manually executing panel loses AC power), rather than by external
override features. devices, which are wired to the system panels
and terminals.
Alarms
P2000 Host Alarms
Another fundamental principle of P2000 sys-
tem operation is to report alarm activities. The P2000 system also reports host alarms,
Alarms can be triggered by several methods such as alarms originated by P2000 event
including the following: actions, mustering alarms, or FDA record
retention alarms.
External device alarms
Door alarms
Remote Alarms
Software-only alarms
P2000 host alarms These are external device alarms, door alarms,
software-only alarms, and host alarms that are
Remote alarms
generated at remote sites.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
9
24-10832-194 Rev. E
10 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
24-10832-194 Rev. E
11
24-10832-194 Rev. E
12 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
7. You may also enter the Full Name of the Navigating through the
operator assigned to the User Name. For
more details on adding operator informa-
P2000 System
tion into the P2000 system, see Add Opera-
tors to the System on page 21. The P2000 system provides an easy-to-use
8. Click OK to save your settings. graphical user interface (GUI) for making
selections and entering data.
9. Click Done to close the window.
Mouse Conventions
Note: You must log off from the P2000 system
for the changes to take effect (see the following The standard pointing device for the P2000
section for details). Server and workstations is a two-button
mouse. The left mouse button is the primary
mouse button. The following terms are used
throughout this manual to describe how you
Logging Off from the P2000 navigate through the P2000 system.
System Software
Pointer – The pointer may display differently
depending on the action that you are perform-
After changing the default User Name and ing. For example, the pointer is normally an
Password, you must log off from the P2000 arrow, but changes to an hourglass to denote
system. You are not required to shut down the the system is saving, retrieving, or compiling
Server or workstation. information. When in a text field, the pointer
changes to a cursor.
To Log Off from the P2000 System: Select – This term directs you to select a menu,
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select submenu, or list item. For example, select
Exit>Exit. Control>Output Control means to click on the
Control option from the Main menu bar, then
click on the Output Control submenu.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
13
Selected Cleared
From the P2000 Main menu, select Config> 1. Select the P2000 Main menu bar as the
Cardholder Options>Company. active window.
2. Press <Alt> + <the underlined letter
In this example, click the Config option from shown on the Main menu bar>.
the P2000 Main menu bar, then click the
Cardholder Options menu, and then click the 3. Once a Main menu is open, simply press
Company submenu item to open the Company the underlined letter of the submenu item
dialog box. you wish to select.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
14 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
24-10832-194 Rev. E
15
2. Place the mouse over an icon to display the Note: A Partition selection box is available on
name of the icon. the right side of the toolbar and can also be posi-
tioned anywhere on the screen
24-10832-194 Rev. E
16 CHAPTER 1
Introduction
24-10832-194 Rev. E
17
T
o operate your P2000 Security Manage- After you configure your system components,
ment System, you must set up and con- these items are available to you as you work
figure the software to communicate your way through hardware configuration. The
with the system hardware. After you parameters set up during hardware configura-
complete all hardware installations, you are tion are accessible when you begin creating
ready to configure the P2000 software. Config- your database. As soon as the system is com-
uration is typically performed by a System pletely configured, you are ready to begin sys-
Engineer or System Administrator. tem operation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
18 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To Add an Item to the System 3. Continue to add items in this manner until
Configuration all components and their related controls
are configured in the P2000 system.
1. From the configuration tree, select the item
you wish to add, and either click Add at
the bottom of the window, or right-click to To Edit System Configuration Items
access a shortcut menu and select Add.
1. From the configuration tree, select the item
The appropriate dialog box opens.
you wish to modify and click Edit at the
bottom of the window (or right-click the
item and select Edit from the shortcut
menu). The Edit dialog box opens.
2. After you complete your changes, click
OK to save the settings and return to the
2. After you add the information according to System Configuration window. The
the field definitions, click OK to return to changes are reflected on the right window-
the System Configuration window. When pane.
dialog boxes offer several configuration
tabs, such as in the Panel or Terminal Edit
dialog boxes, continue to the next tab, as
applicable. After you enter all settings,
click OK to save your data and return to
the System Configuration window. The
settings for the new item are listed on the
right windowpane.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
19
24-10832-194 Rev. E
20 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Partition – Select the partition to which the Normal – Default option for workstations.
Workstation has access. See Partitions on Enables an authorized operator to open and
page 355. close the Alarm Monitor window on this
workstation.
Public – Click this check box to make this
Workstation visible to all partitions.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
21
24-10832-194 Rev. E
22 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
23
Assigning Operators
After initial login, the system is ready for oper-
ator configuration. Depending on the user 3. To add a new operator, click Add. The Edit
type, an operator is assigned a name, which Operator dialog box opens.
uniquely identifies the user, and is usually the 4. Enter the information in each tab, as
person’s first and last name. The user pass- described in the following tab definitions.
word and name are used to verify access to the You can click Apply to save your entries.
system. Use the Edit Operator dialog box to set
up user information, including menu permis-
sions, partitions to which the user is assigned, Note: If FDA Part 11 Record Retention Policy
and other system functions. is enabled in Site Parameters, you cannot delete
operators for the number of years specified in the
To Add an Operator Retention Period field; see page 39 for details.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Opera- 5. After you enter all the information, click
tor>Operator Account/Profile. OK. The operator now has access to sys-
2. Enter your password if prompted. The tem elements as defined.
Operator Account/Profile dialog box 6. Click Done to close.
opens. All operators that have been created
in the system are listed along with their user
name, user type, full name, menu permis-
sions to which the operator has access, and
the partition to which they are assigned.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
24 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
User Info Tab User Name – Enter the name the operator must
type when logging on to the system. Although
User Type – Select one of the following user not required, it is recommended that you use
types to be assigned to this operator: the same user name that the operator uses to log
P2000 Account – This is the default P2000 on to Windows (passwords can be different).
user type. Users can log on to the P2000 Full Name – Enter the operator’s full name.
system by entering their password.
AD Account – This is an Active Directory Password – Enter the password the operator
user account. Users can log on to the P2000 must type when logging on to the P2000 sys-
system if their user name and password tem. If you wish to change the password at a
combination can be validated by the Direc- later time, see Changing the User Password on
tory Services Password Validation (see page 28. In addition, see Password Policy Tab
Directory Services Password Validation on on page 40 for additional password complexity
page 41), and not by the P2000 system. rules.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
25
Account Type – Select the type of account that User must change password at next logon – If a
the operator is authorized to access. If FDA user forgets his or her password, the system
Part 11 Password Policy is enabled in Site administrator may grant a temporary password
Parameters (see page 40), then only one and force the user to change the password at
account type can be selected. the beginning of the next login. This option is
only available if the Account Type selected is
Account Disabled – Select this option if you P2000; a password cannot be changed for MIS
wish to disable this account. Once this option or XML RPC users.
is selected, this account can no longer be used
for logging into the P2000 system, until the Password never expires – Select this option to
account is enabled again. A message displays define passwords that never expire, for MIS
at the next login informing the operator that users for example. This option is not available
the account has been disabled. if FDA Part 11 Password Policy is enabled in
Site Parameters (see page 40).
Create NT user account on server – If selected,
a user account is automatically added to the Password expires – If you select this option,
operating system on the Server. You must have the password expires on the displayed date.
administrative rights on the P2000 Server to This date depends on the value defined in Site
select this option. This option is not available Parameters (page 40).
for selection if your Server is part of a domain.
As an alternative, you can manually add the Verify Password for Critical Functions – If
account using the Windows interface; see Set selected, the operator is required to enter the
Up User Accounts on page 29. login password to access certain system-criti-
cal functions.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
26 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
27
24-10832-194 Rev. E
28 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The Directory Services Path field must be See the following examples:
set in the Password Policy tab of Site
Parameters (see Directory Services Pass- Directory Services Path for a Windows
word Validation on page 41). The actual domain named companyname:
value to use for the Directory Services Path WinNT://companyname/Users
is unique to your specific network configu- Directory Services Path for an Active Direc-
ration and needs to be obtained from your tory domain named companyname.com:
network administrator. LDAP://companyname.com/CN=Users,DC=compa-
For each P2000 operator that you want their nyname,DC=com
password verified by directory services, you For more details on path values and typical
need to select the AD Account or AD Pro- examples, refer to LDAP ADsPath and to
file User Type in the Edit Operator dialog WinNT ADsPath on Microsoft’s MSDN
box (see User Info Tab on page 24). Library.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
29
5. Click OK to save your new password. Users – Gives rights to log on to the server
There is no need to log out of the system. computer locally.
The new password is now valid within the
P2000 system. Administrators – Gives rights to administrate
the server computer (add users, change hard-
ware configuration, and so on).
Set Up User Accounts
To add operators to the P2000 system,
accounts must be set up in the operating sys- Note: The following instructions are provided
for Windows Server® 2008 R2 operating sys-
tem. Without proper authorizations, the system tems. For other operating systems, follow the
may not allow connections to the Server. general outline to enter your settings.
Note: If the Create NT user account on Add Users to Windows Server 2008 R2
server option (see User Info Tab on page 24) Details
was selected at the time you added the user to
the P2000 system, the following steps were per- 1. Run the Computer Management program;
formed automatically by the P2000 system. select Start>Settings>Control Panel>
Administrative Tools. Double-click the
Computer Management icon.
Adding a P2000 Login Name and
Password into the Operating System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
30 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
7. Click Add.
8. In the Select Groups window, click
Advanced.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
31
Registration Parameters
Configure System
Components You can review the maximum number of ter-
minals and workstations, the maximum badges
allowed, and other parameters specified for
System components that operate globally your system. Select Config>System from the
throughout the P2000 system include Site P2000 Main menu bar, enter your password if
Parameters, Partitions, Local Configuration, prompted, and click the Registration Param-
Time Zones, and Holidays. To speed the con- eters icon at the top of the configuration tree
figuration process, we recommend that you set in the System Configuration window. The
up system components in the following order: parameters display on the right windowpane.
In addition, you can expand Registration
1. Site Parameters – Site Parameters define Parameters and select Option Keys to dis-
general system information, real time play additional P2000 features available for
printing, panel types, facility codes, record your system.
retention times, and other parameters that
are specific for the entire facility. All these parameters are enabled via the entry
2. Partitions – You can divide the P2000 data- of your valid Registration Key and Option
base into smaller sections that can be indi- Keys provided by Johnson Controls. These
vidually managed. Partitions allow a keys are associated with your purchase con-
system to function as multiple, separate tract and cannot be modified within the pro-
systems. gram.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
32 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Root System
Right Windowpane
Components Tree
24-10832-194 Rev. E
33
To Edit Site Parameters Max Visitor Validity Period – Enter the maxi-
mum number of days that a Visitor badge may
1. With Site Parameters selected, click Edit. be valid. If an operator tries to set the validity
The Edit Site Parameters dialog box opens period for a Visitor badge longer than the con-
at the General tab. figured value, an error message displays and
the badge is not saved.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
34 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Badge Trace Alarm for Granted Access – Select Cross Site Access Group Editing – Select to
to generate an alarm when a badge with the allow modifying access groups for other Enter-
Trace flag set is granted access at any reader in prise sites.
the system.
Display asterisks instead of pin code – If
Badge Trace Alarm for Denied Access – Select selected, the PIN code entered in the Badge
to generate an alarm when a badge with the dialog box displays as asterisks.
Trace flag set is denied access at any reader in
the system. Max PIN Code Digits – Select the maximum
number of PIN code digits that can be entered
Alarm Options – Click to open the Alarm Cate- in the Badge dialog box.
gories window and assign alarm options asso-
ciated with the Badge Trace Alarms. For
detailed instructions, see Alarm Configuration Note: If your facility uses Mercury panels, you
on page 270. must restart the P2000 Mercury Interface Service
for this change to be effective. You must also
Comms Server – Defaults to the server that download all items to all Mercury panels with the
handles communications. Reset Panel Before Download flag selected;
see Downloading Data to Panels on page 425.
DB Server – Displays the name of the server
that handles the databases.
Special Access – The system provides three
System Information URL – This field displays Special Access flags to satisfy the require-
the location of the server that is hosting the ments for assisted access according to Ameri-
P2000 Web services. In the following URL cans with Disabilities Act (ADA). The Special
example: Access fields A, B, and C can be renamed
according to your facility needs, Handicap
https://<ComputerName>/jcihostingenvironment/ Access for example. The names entered in
systeminformation/v1/api these fields become effective throughout the
<ComputerName> is the name of the com- system. For configuring special access for your
puter where the P2000 Web API is deployed. panel type, see your specific hardware configu-
ration section for information on setting up
Number of Floors – Enter the maximum num- these flags.
ber of floors at your facility (up to 128) for ele-
vator access. This is the number of floors that
Printing Tab
displays in the Floor Name Configuration list.
Real Time printers can be set up only from the
Number of Doors – Enter the maximum number
system Server, even if the operators have per-
of doors at your facility (up to 128) for cabinet
missions to modify Site Parameters at their
access. This is the number of doors that dis-
workstations. Printers to be used by the P2000
plays in the Door Name Configuration list.
system must first be set up using the Windows
printer set up function. If you need assistance
adding printers to the system, see your system
administrator or refer to your Windows docu-
mentation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
35
24-10832-194 Rev. E
36 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Panel Types Box If you select more than one panel type
Select the panel types to be used at your facil- and enable Enforce Limitations, you force
ity. Specific features for the selected panel type the system to use the lowest values among
display when configuring the panels and their the panel types selected. For example, if
system and hardware components. Your sys- you select CK721-A and HID as the panel
tem can be configured with any combination of types, you are only able to configure up to 8
panel types. access groups, even though CK721-A pan-
els support 32 access groups.
Parameters Box If you unselect a panel type, the system
does not automatically change the values
The Parameters box defines various elements accordingly for the remaining panel types.
for each panel type. Before entering your In general, the system automatically reduces
selections, see the following table for the max- the configured values, but never increases
imum default values for each panel type. them automatically. This must be done man-
Enforce Limitations – Select to force the system ually, if desired.
to use the default values listed in the following If you select more than one panel type
table. If you select to Enforce Limitations, you and do not enable Enforce Limitations,
are not required to enter any values in the you can enter any value, but the system only
Parameters box and all tabs are disabled. There recognizes the maximum values for each
is a combination of options depending on panel type selected. For example, if you
whether or not you select this check box and select CK721-A and HID as the panel types
the type or types of panels selected. See the and you enter 32 in the Number of Access
following rules: Groups, you can download up to 32 access
If you select one panel type and enable groups for CK721-A panels, and only up to
Enforce Limitations, you force the system 8 access groups for HID panels.
to use the maximum default values for the
panel selected.
Note: Regardless of the Enforce Limitation
If you select one panel type and do not settings, the system enforces the maximum val-
enable Enforce Limitations, you can enter ues displayed here.
any value up to the maximum default values
for the panel selected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
37
Badge Tab Max Issue Level – Enter the highest issue level
that can be assigned to a badge. The maximum
Settings entered in this tab govern how badges value displays in the Issue drop-down list of
are configured for the entire system. When you the Badge dialog box. See the table on page 36
create a badge, the system uses this informa- for the maximum default values for each panel
tion to determine the maximum allowed val- type.
ues. For more information, see Badge Field
Definitions on page 252. Max Security Level – Enter the highest security
level that can be assigned to a badge. This is
the maximum number that displays in the
Security Options tab of the Badge dialog box.
Security levels are supported by S321-IP pan-
els (Version 2.6 and later) and CK721-A pan-
els. See Security Threat Level Control on
page 293 for more information.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
38 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Assume you selected the CK721-A Assume you selected the S321-IP Assume you enable
panel type. panel type. Enforce Limitations
CK721-A allows: S321-IP allows:
10 time pairs per day 4 time pairs per day
40 unique time pairs per Timezone 40 unique time pairs per Timezone
NOTE: According to the Enforce Limitation rules (see page 36), the system uses the lowest values among the panel
types selected. In this case 4 pairs per day.
Using the preceding values, the Time Zone dialog box displays 4 time pairs for each day...
... and allow you to configure up to 40 unique time pairs for the entire Time Zone.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
39
24-10832-194 Rev. E
40 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Settings in this box are available if your facil- Settings in this tab provide additional security
ity uses the FDA Part 11 option. See FDA Part to your system by allowing the system admin-
11 on page 392. istrator to define several parameters to set up
strong passwords, passwords that are hard to
Enforce FDA Title 21 CRF Part 11 Record Reten- break.
tion and Validation Policy – Select to enable
FDA Part 11 record retention policy, which
addresses the protection of records for a speci-
fied period.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
41
Minimum Length – Enter the minimum number Principal – This is a service account that is
of characters in a password. FDA recommends used to connect to the LDAP source for single
the password to be at least 6 characters long. sign-on login of an Active Directory Group
account.
‘A’ to ‘Z’ or ‘a’ to ‘z’ – Enter the number of let-
ters (uppercase and lowercase) required in a Password – Enter a password for the Principal
password. service account.
‘0’ to ‘9’ – Enter the number of numerals Use Encryption – Forces the connection to the
required in a password. Directory Services to use data encryption for
network communications. Not recommended
Other – If you wish to use characters not for Windows Active Directory. May be
defined as letters or numerals (symbols such as requested by your Directory Services adminis-
& or !), enter the number of symbols required trator.
in a password.
Secure Authentication – Requests the connec-
Enforce FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 Password Pol- tion to the Directory Services to be made using
icy – This feature is available for selection if secure communications such as Kerberos.
your facility uses the FDA Part 11 feature. Recommended for Windows Active Directory.
Select this box to enable FDA Part 11 pass- May be requested by your Directory Services
word policy. For more information, see FDA administrator.
Part 11 on page 392.
Bind Server – Requests the Directory Services
IMPORTANT: Changes to any of the FDA to bind to the server. Not needed for Windows
Password Policy settings take effect only after all Active Directory. May be needed for LDAP
services have stopped and restarted using Ser- systems if your Directory Services Path
vice Control. You must also log off and on at the includes a server name or when requested by
Server computer to see these changes. your Directory Services administrator.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
42 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Download to disabled panels – Select if you Download Access Groups of badge – Select to
wish to download items to disabled panels. If enable downloading of access groups when
this option is not selected and the panel is downloading badges after a Central mode
offline, items that are automatically down- request for a terminal in Shared mode.
loaded by the system are not queued for down- Changes to this option only take effect after
load until you select this check box again. you restart the P2000 CK721-A Priority Ser-
vice; see Starting and Stopping Service Control
on page 432.
Note: If you do not select this option, when you
enable the panel again using the Enabled func-
Port Configuration Tab
tion in the Edit Panel dialog box, you should
queue a complete download for that panel; see Use the Port Configuration tab if you wish to
Downloading Data to Panels on page 425.
change the default port values that are assigned
to the P2000 system applications during soft-
Download badges with Undefined entry/exit sta- ware installation. To change a port number,
tus – Select to change the entry/exit status of double-click the desired value and enter a
downloaded badges to Undefined. number between 1 and 65535; you are
prompted to restart the Server and all worksta-
Delayed download for badges and access
tions.
groups – If you select this option, badge and
access group downloads to panels are per-
formed using Smart Download instead of per-
forming the download immediately. This
moves the burden of building the download
from the workstation to the server, in addition
to delaying the download by the number of
minutes set in the Smart Download Rules box.
This option only effects downloads caused by
editing badges, access groups, or terminal
groups. This option does not apply to badge
and access group downloads performed using
the Download application. See Controlling
Smart Download on page 427.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
43
If the mix of panel versions in the P2000 sys- Message Filter Group – Select the Message Fil-
tem does not need a particular port, set the ter Group that defines which remote messages
value to 0 to disable that port. your P2000 Remote Message Service pro-
cesses. If you select <None>, your local P2000
site can receive all remote messages. See Con-
Note: We recommend not changing the P2000 figure Message Filtering and Message Routing
XmlRpc Interface Port. If you need to do so, con- on page 221 for detailed information.
tact Technical Support for further instructions.
Local Alarms – Select to allow operators at a
remote site to acknowledge, respond, and
RMS Tab complete alarms originated at your P2000 site.
By default, this option is not selected.
Settings in the Remote Message Service
(RMS) tab determine if your P2000 site Remote Alarms – Select to allow operators at a
receives messages from remote P2000 sites. In remote site to acknowledge, respond, and
addition, you can define whether remote mes- complete alarms originated at other P2000
sages indicating alarm status changes for local sites. By default, this option is selected.
or remote alarms are to be processed.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
44 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
All remote message server communication Use Authorized SMTP – Select if your ISP
alarms generated by the local system are reset requires authenticated email connections that
to Secure when the P2000 Remote Message need a username and password to send emails.
Service is restarted. The Dial-up Connection Username and Pass-
word is used.
EMail Tab
Use Dial-up Connection – Select if your P2000
Use this tab to enter a valid email account that site uses a dial-up connection (via telephone
can be used to send email messages, and also lines).
where automatic error returns could be sent.
Dial-up Connection Name – Enter the name of
Before you enter your connection parameters,
the dial-up connection used at your P2000 site.
check with your Internet Service Provider
(ISP) or IT department to verify the required Username – Enter the name to be used to estab-
connection settings. lish the dial-up connection.
Changes to any of the Email settings take Password – Enter the password to be used to
effect after you restart the P2000 RTL Route establish the dial-up connection.
Service.
External Event Trigger Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
45
RS232 External Trigger – If you select Enable, File External Trigger – If you select Enable, the
the P2000 system opens the configured RS232 P2000 system periodically checks the config-
port and listens for incoming characters. When ured location to look for the existence of the
characters are received, they are placed into an configured file name. When the specified file
input buffer. When a carriage return is is found it is renamed to <original
received, the current contents of the input buf- name>.BAK. After it has been renamed, the
fer is processed and checked to see if it meets a lines in the file are processed. The file must
trigger condition. When the input buffer has contain only ASCII text. If the file contains
been processed, it is cleared and P2000 starts multiple lines, each line must be separated by a
waiting for the next message. If you select this carriage return. The last line in the file may
option, you must specify the COM Port to optionally include the carriage return or not.
use. The RS232 port is initialized with the Each line in the file is processed separately
Baud Rate, Parity, and Stop Bits configured and checked to see if it meets a trigger condi-
for that port. tion. After the file has been processed, it is
deleted. If you select this option, you must
TCP/IP External Trigger – If you select Enable, enter the path and Filename of the ASCII file
the P2000 system creates a TCP/IP socket on to look for, as well as the Scan Interval time
the configured IP port and listens for incoming (1 to 65535 seconds) between scans.
characters. When characters are received, they
are placed into an input buffer. When a car- Database External Trigger – If you select
riage return is received, the current contents of Enable, the P2000 system periodically checks
the input buffer is processed and checked to for any records in the external trigger database
see if it meets a trigger condition. When the table. Each row found in this table is processed
input buffer has been processed, it is cleared separately and checked to see if it meets a trig-
and the P2000 starts waiting for the next mes- ger condition. After a row has been processed,
sage. The external system may connect to this it is deleted. If you select this option, you must
TCP/IP socket and remain connected or it may enter the Scan Interval time (1 to 65535 sec-
disconnect after each message. If the external onds) between scans.
system remains connected, then only one
external system may send messages. If the
external system connects, sends the message, Note: Since these external inputs do not
and then disconnects, then multiple external authenticate the user sending the incoming mes-
systems may send messages. If the P2000 sage, enabling any of these inputs may cause the
detects a network error or if the external sys- P2000 system to be non-compliant with FDA Title
tem closes its connection, the P2000 returns to 21 CFR Part 11. When you enable any of these
external inputs, Site Parameters checks the
the listen state waiting for new incoming con-
Enforce FDA Rules setting. If this setting is on,
nections. then a warning message displays to inform that
the P2000 system may now be non-compliant if
the events modify database records. See FDA
Part 11 on page 392.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
46 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
47
6. If you click IP Address, enter the IP The system allows changes to the Local Site
Address of the computer or device from name, for example to change the name of the
which to accept messages. Use this option facility location, however frequent changes to
for a device that is not a Windows com- this setting are not recommended. Changes to
puter. the Local Site name can only be performed
7. If you click Computer Name, enter the from the P2000 Server.
Windows Computer Name from which to
accept messages, or click the browse [...] To Edit the P2000 Local Site Name
button to find a computer by name on your
network. 1. In the System Configuration window,
expand Site Parameters.
8. If you click Allow, the P2000 software
allows communication with this device. If 2. Select Local Site and click Edit to open
you do not click Allow, the P2000 system the Local Site Edit dialog box.
denies communication with this device but
does not log any error messages for this
device.
9. Click Use for XmlRpc if this device uses
the XmlRpc protocol. See XmlRpc Tab on
page 46 for details.
10. Click OK to save the settings and return to 3. Enter a Local Site Name (up to 32 charac-
the System Configuration window. ters) that easily identifies your P2000 site.
4. Click OK to save the Local Site Name.
5. A message displays, warning that changing
Note: The External IP settings take effect after the site name requires you to update exist-
you stop and restart the P2000 XmlRpc Interface ing database records that refer to the cur-
service; see Starting and Stopping Service Con-
rent site name. Click Yes if you want to
trol on page 432.
proceed to change the name.
6. You are prompted to stop all P2000 ser-
Local Site vices at the Server (see Starting and Stop-
ping Service Control on page 432) and to
The P2000 Local Site name is assigned during log out of all workstations.
the initial software installation and uniquely 7. Click OK to proceed with the update of the
identifies the P2000 site within the P2000 database tables.
Enterprise System.
8. After the database tables have been
The Local Site name is a system wide setting updated, click Yes to restart the Server
and does not require a partition reference. The computer.
site name is part of all audit entries, alarms,
and transactions originated in your system.
Applications such as the Alarm Monitor and
Real Time List display the site name to indi-
cate the P2000 site where the message origi-
nated.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
48 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
49
24-10832-194 Rev. E
50 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To Create a New Time Zone Check the box and select the hour from the
spin box. For example, if the time period
1. In the System Configuration window, starting at midnight is Inactive, enter the
select Time Zones and click Add. The hour at which the time period becomes
Time Zone dialog box opens displaying the Active. In the next field, select the time at
maximum number of time pairs, as defined which the period returns to Inactive. You
in Site Parameters; see Timezone Tab on can include minutes, if needed.
page 38.
2. Select the day of the week (or a holiday)
you wish to define and click Edit. A time Note: The number of Active and Inactive times
is limited to the number of time pairs per day
zone dialog box opens with the name of the defined in Site Parameters. Select only those
day in the title block. The number of time time check boxes you wish to enable. For exam-
periods available depends on the parame- ple, to create a Time Zone that is active from 6:00
ters selected in Site Parameters. A.M. to 6:00 P.M., select the first check box and
set the time to 6:00 A.M.; then select the second
check box and set the time to 6:00 P.M.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
51
You can set different Holiday Types for differ- To Add a Holiday
ent Time Zones. For example, Night Shift
full-day holiday hours may begin and end at 1. In the System Configuration window,
different times than Day Shift full-day holiday select Holidays and click Add. The Edit
Holiday dialog box opens.
hours.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
52 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
53
Configure Hardware
Components
Panel Configuration
The logical configuration sequence; however, Before configuring the panels that control your
does not follow the order presented on the Sys- security system, you must identify the type of
tem Configuration window. We recommend panel installed at your facility and follow the
hardware configuration be performed in the pertained instructions.
following sequence:
The following sections describe procedures to
configure CK721-A panels and related compo-
nents.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
54 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The steps to configure other panel types differ 4. Fill in the information on each tab. (See
from the procedures described here. If you plan Edit Panel Field Definitions for details.)
to configure OSI, S321-IP, HID, Assa Abloy, 5. As you work through the tabs, you may
or Mercury panels, you must skip the remain- click Apply to save your entries.
ing sections and proceed to one of the follow-
ing sections: 6. Click OK to save your entries. A message
box displays asking if you wish to auto-
Configure OSI Panels and Components on matically add all time zones to the new
page 95. panel. If you select No, you can add the
Configure S321-IP Panels and Components time zones later; see Configure Panel Time
on page 108. Zones on page 62.
Configure HID Panels and Components on 7. If you select Yes, the time zones are auto-
page 122. matically added. When you return to the
System Configuration window, the new
Configure Assa Abloy® IP Door Locks and
panel name displays under the selected
Components on page 136.
panel type.
Configure Mercury Panels and Components
on page 151.
Also, see Appendix C: Panel Comparison Note: For CK721-A panels, the panel version
Matrix to see the features supported by each number displays on the right windowpane of the
panel type. System Configuration window, after that panel
establishes communication with the Server.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
55
Edit Panel Field Definitions Enabled – The system does not recognize the
panel unless you click Enabled. If you wish to
temporarily disable the panel, without having
General Tab
to delete the panel or disconnect the network
This dialog box defines descriptive informa- cable, click again to clear the check box to dis-
tion of the panel. able it. When you disable a panel, the readers
continue to grant access, but the panel does not
communicate with the Server until you enable
the panel again.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
56 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
This dialog box defines Primary IP addresses History settings govern how the panel uploads
for the panel. (You cannot complete panel con- data to the Server, and how long the panel
figuration unless you assign an IP address.) retains data in the transaction database before
older data is deleted.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
57
Time Offset – Click if the panel is in a different Note: The override state gets cancelled when
geographical time zone from the P2000 server. communication with the panel is lost for more
than 20 seconds. The override resumes when
Enter the appropriate hours and minutes for
communication is reestablished. In addition, be
the time offset. For example, if the P2000 aware that if you perform the Resume Normal
server is in California and the panel is in New Operation function from the Control All Doors
York, click the plus (+) sign, and select 3 hours application, the override state gets cancelled, but
from the spin box. the System Override option remains enabled.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
58 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Broadcast Port Number – Enter the UDP port Panel relay, latch output functionality, and
number used by the Peer to Peer Badge Sync other parameters are set up in the Alarm tab.
UDP Broadcast agents. This number must
match that configured at the other CK721-A
panels.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
59
24-10832-194 Rev. E
60 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Lowest Floor for Group Controller – Available Poll Delay Factor – Available when configuring
when configuring KONE HLI elevators. Enter Otis EMS Serial elevators. Enter the poll delay
the lowest level (1 to 64) of the building served factor (0 to 9) that prevents the Otis equipment
by any KONE elevator in this KONE group from being overloaded. A lower value speeds
controller. An incorrect setting secures and up the integration. We recommend not chang-
unsecures floors other than those intended. ing the default value.
Elevator Integration Server – Available when Retries – Available when configuring Otis
configuring ThyssenKrupp Serial and Otis EMS Serial elevators. Enter the number of
EMS Serial elevators. Select the name of the times (0 to 9) a message is retried before the
CK721-A panel that communicates directly Otis elevator system is declared offline. We
with the Otis EMS or the ThyssenKrupp eleva- recommend not changing the default value.
tor system using a serial communications link.
The list displays all available CK721-A panels
Encryption Tab
that are marked as elevator servers. If you
select <This Panel>, the CK721-A panel Use this tab to configure the P2000 software to
becomes the elevator server for the elevator secure every message to and from a CK721-A
protocol. You cannot define elevators under a panel, using Advanced Encryption Standard
CK721-A panel that is defined as an elevator (AES) to protect the P2000 system from unau-
server. thorized sources. This encryption methodology
is supported for all three channels: Upload,
Elevator Integration Server TCP Port – Avail-
Download, and Priority.
able when configuring ThyssenKrupp Serial
and Otis EMS Serial elevators. The TCP port
provides the communication between the
CK721-A server and the CK721-A client. This Note: P2000 Encryption is implemented using
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
field displays 48500 as the default elevator
140-2, validated, (Certificate #2398), cryp-
TCP port. You can modify this setting accord- tographic module, from Microsoft http://www.mic-
ing to your specific site needs. rosoft.com.
Total Number of Floors in Building – Available
when configuring Otis EMS Serial elevators.
This is the total number of floors in the build-
ing. A zero is the suggested value and tells the
Otis EMS Serial to use the floor count from the
elevator floors definition. The maximum floor
number is 64.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
61
24-10832-194 Rev. E
62 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Note: Any changes to the panel time zones for 3. Use the drop-down lists to select any time
Mercury panels requires downloading Access zones configured in the system.
Groups and Card Events to the affected panel.
4. If your panel type allows it and you need to
assign more than 16 time zones, click the
You can automatically operate outputs such as Timezones 17–32 tab and continue to add
lights, air conditioning, and so on, by associat- time zones as in step 3. Select additional
ing Output Groups with Panel Time Zones (not tabs and enter additional time zones as
available for OSI, S321-IP, HID, Assa Abloy, needed, up to a total of 64.
or Mercury panels).
5. After all time zones (and Output Groups, if
Panel Time Zones must be defined before you applicable) are assigned, click OK to save
can complete Terminal configuration. If you your entries and return to the System Con-
have not yet configured Terminals and Output figuration window.
Groups, you should enter Panel Time Zones
now, and return to add the Output Groups and
To Assign an Output Group to a Panel
any additional time zones.
Time Zone
To Assign a Panel Time Zone 1. In the Panel Timezone Edit dialog box,
select the Time Zone to which you wish to
1. In the System Configuration window, associate an Output Group.
expand the Panel to which you wish to 2. Select the associated Output Group. Out-
assign the Time Zone. The panel compo- put Groups must be created before they can
nents are listed below the panel icon. be accessible from the Panel Time Zone
2. Select Panel Timezones and click Edit. drop-down lists. (See Create Output Points
The Panel Timezone Edit dialog box opens. and Groups on page 80.)
24-10832-194 Rev. E
63
24-10832-194 Rev. E
64 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
3. Double-click to enter the Name and corre- 3. To add a custom card format, click the line
sponding Code to define each Air Crew item you wish to define and click Add.
PIN Number. The Code number can have 4. Navigate to the directory where your card
up to 16 digits. format files are stored and double-click the
4. When you finish defining all Air Crew PIN <name>.txt file you wish to use. Click Yes
numbers, click OK to return to the System if you wish to enable the format for all
Configuration window. These names dis- CK721-A terminals and also want to add it
play in the Air Crew Pin tab of the Edit to S321-IP terminals with no custom card
Terminal dialog box. assignment. The name and description of
the selected card format file displays in the
line item selected. You can add up to eight
Configure Panel Card Formats
custom card format files.
P2000 supports up to eight custom card for- 5. If you wish to update or replace an existing
mats that can be downloaded to CK721-A and file, select the file name from the list and
S321-IP panels. Upon selection, custom card click Update. A verification message dis-
files are stored in a separate database table. plays, click Yes then proceed to select the
Once the selected card formats have been com- replacement file.
piled, they are available for selection using the
6. To delete a file format, select the file name
Card Type tab in the Terminal dialog box.
from the list and click Delete. You are
prompted for verification.
7. To view the contents of a file format, select
Note: Contact Johnson Controls for instruc-
tions in generating Custom Card Format files. the file from the list and click View. A text
file displays the format code string of the
selected format. When you finish viewing
To Add Custom Card Formats the file, close the window.
8. Click Done to close the Panel Card For-
1. In the System Configuration window,
mats dialog box. The new card formats are
expand Panels.
available from the Card Type tab in the
2. Select Panel Card Formats and click Terminal dialog box.
Edit. The Panel Card Formats dialog box
opens.
Configure Additional Panel
Components
24-10832-194 Rev. E
65
24-10832-194 Rev. E
66 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Note: You must perform the Write DB to Flash Module Type – Select one of the following
function (see page 444) when adding or deleting module types connected to your input or output
RDR2S-A or RDR8S terminals, or when modify- terminal: RDR2SA, RDR8S, I8O4, or I32O16.
ing any field on the General tab of an existing
RDR2S-A or RDR8S terminal (except Name, Address – Select the address (0 to 31) of the
Public, or Query String fields). hardware module.
Name – Enter the name of the new terminal. Reader – Select to define this terminal as a card
Use descriptive names according to your Nam- reader terminal. If selected, additional tabs are
ing Conventions Plan. added.
Panel – This field displays the name of the Module Type – Select one of the following
panel you selected from the System Configura- module types connected to your reader termi-
tion window. nal: RDR2SA or RDR8S.
Query String – This value is used with message Address – Select the address (0 to 31) of the
filtering (see Define Query String Filters on hardware module.
page 225).
Index – Select the index number of the hard-
Number – Select a terminal number. This ter- ware module.
minal number differs from the physical address
Reader Type – Select if this is an Access, an
as installed at the panel. (Refer to your specific
Entry, or an Exit reader terminal.
hardware configuration documentation if you
need more information on terminal number
assignment.) Note: For Entry and Exit to work, all Entry and
all Exit terminals must run in Central mode or they
Public – If this is a partitioned system, select must all be defined on the same panel and run in
Public if you wish this terminal to be visible to Local mode.
all partitions.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
67
Reader Mode – Select a reader mode. You can- Facility Code Only when Offline – If enabled,
not mix Wiegand and non-Wiegand reader the terminal accepts any badge with the correct
modes on the same RDR2S-A. Choices are: facility code when the terminal is offline from
the panel. This option is supported with some
Wiegand card formats. See Facility Codes Tab on
OSDP version 1 – Open Supervised Device page 74 for more details.
Protocol readers are supported with
CK721-A panels Version 3.2 and later with PIN Required when Offline – If enabled, an
RDR2S-A (firmware PS-217F and later) or algorithmic PIN number is required for badge
RDR8S (firmware PS-218B and later) mod- acceptance if the terminal goes offline.
ules. Allow PIN after Badge – If enabled, the card-
holder can enter the PIN number after present-
Note: OSDP reader status is supported with ing the badge instead of before presenting the
panels Version 3.4 and later. After you save the badge. Press the <#> key after entering the
terminal record, a terminal input point is automat- PIN number (see Configure PIN Codes on
ically created for input point 16 and displays as page 78). If disabled, the conditions under
Reader <terminal name>. The purpose of input Trigger Type in the Options box of the Panel
point 16 is to report alarms associated with the Card Event apply; see page 92.
communication status of the OSDP reader con-
nection to the hardware module (RDR2S-A or Reverse Reading – If enabled, when you turn a
RDR8S); you must configure alarm options for badge facing away from you and swipe in the
input point 16, other input point features are not normal direction, the badge still reads. Applies
supported.
to Binary BaFe and BCD BaFe cards only.
Log Reader Strike Message – If enabled, the
Flags Tab transaction displays in the Real Time List and
on the System Status window. This option
does not apply if the reader is to be assigned to
an elevator or cabinet.
Access Grant Message on Door Open Only – For
this feature to work, the terminal must be con-
figured to run in Local mode. If enabled, access
grant messages are generated when the card-
holder swipes the badge and opens the door.
When enabled, the Keyless Override timer
starts after swiping a badge (with override
privileges) and immediately opening the door.
When disabled, the Keyless Override timer
starts after swiping a badge (with override
Reader Box privileges).
Alarm Shunt Only for Auxiliary Access – If Also, in the case of elevator readers when this
enabled, the Aux-Access Input Point on the flag is enabled, elevator access grant messages
terminal suppresses only the Door Open are generated only when the cardholder pres-
Alarm. If disabled, the Aux-Access Input ents a badge at an elevator reader and a valid
Point on the terminal performs an access grant. floor is selected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
68 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Re-lock on Door Open – If enabled, the door is Valid & Unauthorized – If enabled, a green light
re-locked when the door is opened. Shunt indicates that badging has taken place; how-
remains active until after temporary override ever, the system does not grant access to the
timers (if any) expire and then after the shunt cardholder. A security guard must manually
time also expires. When the Anti-Tailgate or unlock the door with a key or push a button to
Timed Shunt options are enabled, shunt can open the door and allow access.
end earlier if the door closes. The Re-lock on
Door Open option is disabled during scheduled Reverse Swipe Duress – If enabled, you can
override periods. turn the badge away from you and swipe in the
normal direction to report a duress alarm. (Soft
No Green Light on Aux Access – If enabled, no alarm must be configured for this reader; see
green light displays on auxiliary access. Soft Alarms Field Definitions on page 94.)
Applies to Binary BaFe and BCD BaFe cards
Deny If Door Open – If enabled, an access only. When you enable Reverse Swipe Duress,
denied message is generated when the card- the Reverse Reading option is automatically
holder swipes the badge at an opened door. enabled.
Anti Tailgate – If enabled, the strike and shunt PIN Plus 1 Duress – If enabled, a duress alarm
timers are immediately reset and the door is generated when a cardholder adds 1 to the
immediately locks, following an access grant last digit of the PIN code (for example, 6
when a door closes. This prevents reopening becomes 7, not 61). When this option is
the door using one badge access. When used enabled, the 9 does not create a duress alarm. If
with the Re-lock on Door Open option, open- the last digit of the PIN code is a 9, then the
ing a door immediately re-locks the door. user substitutes a 0 for the 9 and this triggers
Momentary Auxiliary Access – If enabled, the the duress alarm. This feature only works if the
Access Time begins timing when a switch Duress soft alarm is enabled.
shorts the terminal’s Aux-Access input point Star Feature – If enabled, the cardholder can
contact. If disabled, the terminal’s Aux-Access press the star (*) key at the keypad plus a fea-
input point contact energizes the door relay as ture number, to activate some of the panel’s
long as the contact is shorted. functions that are normally invoked from key-
Reader Override Timezone Enable – If enabled, pads that contain the A, B, C, or D keys. The
the reader does not require a badge to open the (#) key acts as the Enter key, it wraps-up the
door during the reader override time zone. (A previously entered keys and starts the process-
time zone must be selected in the Override ing of the key sequence. It also clears the key-
field of the Timezone tab to enable this func- pad buffer for the next command to be entered.
tion.) The (*) key starts the feature selection process.
Once pressed, the cardholder can activate one
Soft In-X-It – If enabled, cardholders have of the following features:
access even though the In-X-It status is incor-
rect. (A soft alarm can be triggered if config- 0 = Local Override, followed by number of
ured through the Soft Alarms dialog box; see minutes
page 93.) 1 = Enable event, followed by event number
2 = Air Crew PIN
4 = Disable event, followed by event number
24-10832-194 Rev. E
69
* = Clear the keypad buffer. This works inde- Log Output Status Message – (Outputs only)
pendently of the Star Feature setting Click to send output relay messages from the
panel to the P2000 Server (whether or not
The cardholder must enter all PIN and Card ID access is granted). Must be selected to show as
information before selecting a feature. As an active on the System Status window. This
alternative, instead of pressing the (#) key, the option is disabled for output points assigned to
cardholder can swipe the badge to wrap-up the an elevator or cabinet.
previously entered keys and start the process-
ing of the key sequence; however, with the
Allow PIN after badge option the (#) key is Override Reset Threat Level Box
always required.
Each reader terminal defined for a CK721-A
For details, see Appendix D: Using a Keypad panel can be configured with an Override
Reader on CK721-A Panels. Reset Threat Level ranging between 0 and 99.
A value of 0 disables the Override Reset fea-
Log Auxiliary Access – If enabled, the system ture; a value between 1 and 99 invokes the fol-
reports when a Request to Exit (REX) input lowing behavior:
point activation allows a door to open, without
generating a forced door alarm (someone Whenever a terminal’s Security Level reaches
exits). When the REX input point grants Aux- or exceeds the terminal’s Override Reset
iliary Access and a door opens, the system Threat Level, all time zone based overrides,
reports this as a panel event. We recommend host initiated overrides and cardholder over-
that the REX inputs operate in 4-state mode. rides are immediately disabled. Subsequent
Also make sure you enable Forced/Propped attempts to invoke host initiated overrides or
soft alarms. You should also note that: cardholder overrides are denied.
Reporting REX transactions is not sup- Once a terminal’s Security Level drops below
ported on devices operating in legacy the terminal’s Override Reset Threat Level, the
addressing mode. time zone based override is restored immedi-
ately. Host initiated overrides and cardholder
Log Auxiliary Access is not supported
overrides are not automatically restored, but
when door inputs are reassigned as general
subsequent attempts to invoke host initiated
purpose inputs.
overrides or cardholder overrides are granted,
provided the configuration allows these over-
Input/Output Box rides.
Alarm Debounce Time – (Inputs only) Enter a The System Override feature is not affected by
delay time in milliseconds that the system the Override Reset Threat Level, and remains
waits to sample this terminal’s Supervised in effect as long as the panel’s System Over-
Input Point Circuits. The default is 20 msec. ride flag is set.
This improves system performance by ignor-
ing a circuit disturbance, such as a door jiggle
as it closes, rather than reporting an alarm. To Create an Input/Output Terminal
24-10832-194 Rev. E
70 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
71
Shunt Time – Enter a time in seconds that the There are two modes of temporary override:
door open alarm is suppressed after a valid
badge access request. The shunt time should Timed Override – Select this option if you want
be longer than the access time. The maximum to unlock the door for an extended period of
value is 255 seconds. time.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
72 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
5. Badge into the keypad reader, so that the Warning Auto Off – If enabled, the Warning
override/shunt privilege can be checked Output Group is reset when the door closes or
against the badge record. when override is extended past the point when
6. If you wish to terminate the timed over- the warning should be triggered. Just an access
ride/shunt period (before the number of grant alone does not deactivate the Override
minutes selected have run out), repeat steps Warning. This feature is most useful in connec-
1 through 5, entering 0 minutes in step 3. tion with the Timed Override/Anti-Tailgate
option enabled. If Timed Override/Anti-Tail-
For details, see Appendix D: Using a Keypad gate is not enabled, it is possible that the Over-
Reader on CK721-A Panels. ride Warning is deactivated before the override
actually expires. If you want to avoid this sce-
Keyless Override/Shunt Time – Instead of hav- nario, disable this option.
ing to enter the number of minutes for the
timed override/shunt at a keypad reader, you
can have the system do it for you. Entering a Assisted Access Box
time from 1 to 1440 minutes into this field
treats a qualifying badging procedure as if the
number of minutes had been entered at the Note: This feature only works on terminals that
keypad. You can still choose to enter a differ- operate in Local mode.
ent number of minutes at the keypad reader,
which takes priority over the configured over- This option allows you to set up a door’s
ride/shunt time. Entering a 0 into the Keyless access time to be different, to satisfy the
Override/Shunt Time field turns this feature requirements for assisted access according to
off. The rules as to who can invoke a keyless ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act). The
timed override/shunt are identical to those gov- system provides three Special Access flags, A,
erning the keypad invoked override. When the B, and C, which can be renamed in the Site
Access Grant Message on Door Open Only Parameters dialog box according to your facil-
flag is selected in the Flags Tab, the keyless ity needs, and then assigned to a cardholder
override timer starts after the cardholder that requires special access at a door.
swipes the badge with override privileges and
then opens the door. Additionally, you may activate an ADA relay
in conjunction with granting assisted access.
Warning Output Group – Select the output
group to be activated when the timed over- Assisted Access – Select one of the following
ride/shunt expiration for this terminal falls options:
within the time set in the Warning Time field.
Never – Assisted Access is not available at
Warning Time – Enter the time (0 to 10 min- the door, even if the cardholder’s badge has
utes) to activate the Warning Output Group to the Special Access A flag enabled.
warn operators that the override/shunt is about Always – The door is always opened for the
to expire. For example, if you have created a Assisted Access Time, regardless if the
temporary door override/shunt for 8 hours, you cardholder’s badge has the Special Access
can create an audible output group that acti- A flag enabled.
vates 10 minutes before the override/shunt
expires to let operators know the door shortly
begins operating in normal mode.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
73
ADA Relay Connector – Select the connector Time – Enter the time in seconds during which
that is activated for the ADA Relay time when the number of cardholders in the team are
assisted access is granted. Choices are: required to present their badge.
Green – if the ADA relay is connected to Visitor Escort Mode – If enabled, a visitor can
the supported module connector that nor- gain access after badging at an N-Man Rule
mally drives the green light defined reader, as long as the visitor’s sponsor
Shunt – if the ADA relay is connected to the presents the badge after the visitor. If this
supported module connector that normally option is selected, the default number in the
indicates the shunt condition Cardholders field is 2.
<none> – if the ADA relay is not connected
to any supported module connector. Timezone Tab
Note that when connecting the ADA relay to The Timezone tab defines the time zones in
either one of these outputs, its regular func- which this terminal operates. Panel Time
tion, such as activating the green light or indi- Zones must be set up before they display in
cating the shunt condition, is no longer avail- drop-down lists.
able. Also, refer to the CK721-A
documentation about wiring procedures.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
74 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Override – Select a time zone that can be set as The FASC-N (PIV, CAC, TWIC) and the
an override for this terminal. This field is UUID (PIV-I, CIV, FRAC) card formats are
available if Reader Override Timezone Enable provided to support Federal Identity, Creden-
is selected in the Flags tab. tial, and Access Management (FICAM) com-
pliant smart cards. These card formats do not
PIN Suppression – Select a time zone during work with the Facility Code Only when
which cardholders do not have to enter a PIN Offline and PIN Required when Offline
number. options.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
75
CK721-A panels Version 3.5 and later sup- If you click either of the Calibrate buttons, the
port HID Corporate 1000 card types that Server sends a calibration command to the
use 48-bit formats, in addition to the 35-bit panel, the panel then forwards the command to
format currently supported. The 48-bit for- the RDR2S-A or RDR8S module to initiate the
mat cannot be used with RDR2S-A and input’s calibration. When the module com-
RDR8S modules in offline mode (using the pletes its calibration, typically within a few
Facility Code Only when Offline option). seconds, the panel sends a transaction message
In offline mode both modules only process to the Real Time List indicating the calibration
35-bit formats. result. After a successful calibration, four-state
input statuses are functional for the input
The Custom Card Formats box displays the point; however, auxiliary access inputs do not
card formats that were downloaded into the report Open and Short conditions to the P2000
panel, using the Panel Card Formats dialog system.
box; see page 64 for detailed instructions.
If you click either of the Uncalibrate buttons,
the Server sends a command to the panel to
Calibrate Tab
uncalibrate the module’s input. The panel then
Use this tab to calibrate auxiliary access input sends a transaction message to the Real Time
point contacts on the terminal, as well as door List indicating the uncalibration result. After
contact input points. the uncalibration, four-state input statuses are
no longer functional for the input, only
two-state statuses.
IMPORTANT: During the entire input calibra- Air Crew Pin Tab
tion procedure, the input’s contact must be physi-
cally closed. Otherwise, the input’s status is To enable the use of PIN codes at this terminal,
unreliable. select from the list any or all previously
defined Air Crew PIN Codes that were set up
in the Edit Air Crew PIN Number dialog box
(see page 63 for details).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
76 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
77
24-10832-194 Rev. E
78 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
PIN Only
24-10832-194 Rev. E
79
For PIN Only to work, you need to configure 3. The terminal’s PIN Suppression in the
the following parameters: Timezone tab has no effect, that is, you
cannot use time zones to waive the require-
1. The panel’s PIN Code Type must be set to ment to enter a PIN in PIN + Card ID
Algorithmic (see page 58). mode.
2. The panel’s PIN Code Digits must be set
to 5 (see page 58). To use PIN + Card ID mode, you must enter
your PIN followed by your 5-digit badge num-
3. The panel’s Scramble Mode must be set ber, followed by the # key. You must enter
to the value used to create the PINs from leading zeros if your badge number has fewer
the badge numbers (see page 58). than 5 digits.
4. The terminal’s PIN Only card type must
be selected in the Card Type tab. All other
PIN
card types must not be selected (see
page 74). In this mode, the PIN needs to be entered in
5. The terminal’s Allow PIN after Badge in conjunction with a valid badge presented at the
the Flags tab has no effect (see page 67). reader. This feature works with 4 or 5-digit
algorithmic and with 4 up to 9-digit custom
6. The terminal’s PIN Suppression in the
PINs.
Timezone tab has no effect. For obvious
reasons you cannot waive the requirement For PIN to work, you need to configure the
to enter a PIN in PIN Only mode. following parameters:
To use PIN Only mode, simply enter your 1. Select a card type in the terminal’s Card
5-digit algorithmic PIN at the keypad followed Type tab that matches the reader’s technol-
by the # key, and the access decision is made. ogy (see page 74).
2. All other card types should not be selected.
PIN + Card ID 3. The terminal’s PIN Only card type in the
In this mode the badge does not have to be pre- Card Type tab must not be selected.
sented at the reader. The numeric keypad is 4. The terminal’s PIN + Card ID card type in
used to enter the PIN and the badge number. the Card Type tab should not be selected,
This feature works with 4 or 5-digit algorith- unless you want to use the PIN + Card ID
mic and with 4 up to 9-digit custom PINs. mode as an alternative for people who
have forgotten their badge.
For PIN + Card ID to work, you need to con-
figure the following parameters: 5. The terminal’s PIN Suppression in the
Timezone tab must be set to a defined time
1. The terminal’s PIN + Card ID must be zone. PINs are only required to be entered
selected in the Card Type tab. All other when the time zone is inactive.
card types should not be selected, unless
you want to use the PIN + Card ID mode To use PIN mode when the terminal’s Allow
only as an alternative for people who have PIN after Badge option in the Flags tab is not
forgotten their badge (see page 74). set, you must key in the entire PIN before pre-
senting the badge. The PIN does not need to be
2. The terminal’s Allow PIN after Badge in terminated with a # key.
the Flags tab has no effect (see page 67).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
80 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To use PIN mode when the terminal’s Allow PIN Retry Alarm
PIN after Badge option in the Flags tab is set,
the PIN must be terminated with a # key. You A PIN Code Retry alarm is generated when the
can enter the PIN and the # key before, during, respective soft alarm is defined at the panel,
or after the badge is presented. and three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to
enter a PIN were made for the same badge (see
To use PIN mode when you also have the PIN page 94). In Local mode, the three consecutive
+ Card ID card type selected, as an alternative attempts can be made at any terminal of a sin-
for people who have forgotten their badge, the gle panel. In Central mode, the three consecu-
# key must not be entered before the badge is tive attempts can be made at any terminal at
presented. any panel.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
81
24-10832-194 Rev. E
82 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
4. The Panel field displays the name of the To Create Input Points
Panel selected.
1. In the System Configuration window,
5. The Group Number field displays the select a Terminal that has been configured
number that is automatically assigned for inputs.
when you create an output group.
2. Select Input Points (under the Terminal
6. If your system is partitioned, click Public icon) and click Add. The Input Point dia-
if you wish this group to be visible to all log box opens at the General tab.
partitions.
3. Enter the information in each tab, as
7. In the Output Point Names box, select an described in Input Point Field Definitions.
Output Point from the list of Available
Output Points. 4. Click OK to save your settings and return
to the System Configuration window. A
8. Click << to move the Output Point to the new Input Point icon is listed under the
list of Output Points in Group. root Input Points icon. When you click on
9. Continue to move available output points the new input point, the settings display on
from the Available list to the Group list the right windowpane.
until all output points you wish to include
are in the Output Points in Group box.
Note: You must perform the Write DB to Flash
10. To remove an output point from the Output function (see page 444) when adding or deleting
Points in Group box, select the output point RDR2S-A or RDR8S input points.
and click >>.
11. Click OK to save your settings. A new
Output Group icon is listed under the root Input Point Field Definitions
Output Groups icon for the panel.
General Tab
Create Input Points and Groups
After the terminal is created, the Input Points Partition – If you use partitions, select the
icon is added under the terminal. From here, appropriate Partition that has access to this
you create the input points for the terminal. (If input point.
you need more information, see Configure Ter- Public – If you use partitions, click Public if
minals on page 65.) you want this input point to be visible to all
partitions.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
83
Name – Enter a descriptive Name for the input Open and short conditions for 4-state input
point. points are reported immediately.
Number – Select an input point number. Set Panel Relay When Active – If enabled, the
relay on the panel activates when the input
Query String – This value is used with message point is activated. If disabled, the relay on the
filtering (see Define Query String Filters on panel does not activate.
page 225).
Status – If you select Enable, all input point Alarm Options Tab
changes of state are reported. Select Disable if
you do not want these changes reported. Use this tab to configure alarm options for
P2000 devices that generate alarms, such as
Disabled During Time Zone – Select a Time input points, cameras, switches, and so on.
Zone during which the input point is disabled. Each alarm must belong to at least one Alarm
For example, it is impractical to report a door Category (see Alarm Configuration on
contact alarm during business hours when the page 270 for details), but can also be assigned
door is in constant use. to multiple alarm categories, each with its own
set of alarm options.
Type – Choose either Two State or Four State.
Changing the input type requires using the For example, if an input point connected to a
Un-calibrate command (for two-state inputs) glass breakage sensor generates an alarm, the
or the Calibrate command (for four-state P2000 system may create two separate alarms
inputs) in the Misc Tab. for two configured alarm categories:
P2000\Maintenance\Building 1 and P2000\
Entry Exit Delay – Enter a time (0 to 600 sec-
Security\Building 1. Typically, a single opera-
onds) that the alarm is suppressed until an
tor is configured to receive only a single cate-
event disables the alarm. If a delayed
gory of alarms, and therefore could only
entry/exit value is defined for an input point,
receive a single alarm. However, higher level
the system delays reporting activation of this
operators such as supervisors, or an operator at
input point for the time value specified. If the
a central alarm monitoring location, may be
input point is suppressed within this delay
configured to receive both of these alarms.
period (that is, by a card event), the alarm is
not reported. For example, a cardholder can 1. Click the Alarm Options tab. The P2000
badge at a reader, open the door, and then Alarm Category displays by default.
badge at a second reader to suppress the door
alarm before it reports. If the cardholder does
not badge and suppress the alarm (by card
event) at the second reader within the specified
time, the alarm is reported.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
84 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
2. If you wish to assign this alarm to other Disable Alarm – Do not select if you wish this
alarm categories, click Add. The Add alarm to be added to the alarm queue and dis-
Alarm Categories dialog box opens dis- played in the alarm monitoring window to
playing all previously created alarm cate- notify the operator of its activation. Enabling
gories (see page 270 for details). or disabling the alarm is specific to a particular
Alarm Category. For example, you can enable
an alarm for a Security alarm category and dis-
able the same alarm for a Maintenance alarm
category.
Alarm Priority – Enter a value from 0 to 255.
Zero equals the highest priority. This is the
order in which the alarm message is placed in
the alarm queue. If alarm messages have the
same alarm priority, the date and time deter-
mine which alarm is positioned higher in the
Note: If you use the Enterprise option, the
Alarm Categories defined for all P2000 sites queue.
within an Enterprise system are listed. Alarm Timezone – Select the time zone during
which new alarm state changes are to be added
3. Select one or more categories and click to the alarm queue and displayed in the Alarm
Add. The list displays all the selected Monitor window. If you select <None>, the
alarm categories. alarm state is reported any time it changes.
4. If you wish to remove a category from the Alarm Popup – When you enable Alarm Popup
list, select the alarm category and click for an alarm, the Alarm Monitor window auto-
Delete. matically displays in front of all other windows
5. Once you have all the alarm categories you on the screen whenever the alarm is in the
want to assign to this alarm, select an alarm alarm state. If disabled, the alarm is simply
category from the list and click Edit to entered in the alarm queue.
modify the alarm options. You can select
and edit more than one category at a time. Note: Some computers may not allow the
The Alarm Options dialog box opens dis- Alarm Monitor window to automatically pop up in
playing the General tab. See the following front of other windows on the screen; instead the
definitions. Alarm Monitor button begins flashing in the Win-
dows taskbar.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
85
Other Popup – When you enable Other Popup Event 1-4 – You can define up to four events
for an alarm, the Alarm Monitor window auto- that can be triggered from the Alarm Monitor
matically displays in front of all other win- window whenever the alarm goes into an
dows on the screen whenever the alarm is in a alarm condition and is entered into the alarm
state other than alarm or normal. queue. Enter a descriptive Event name and
select a previously configured Event from the
Other Instruction – Select the Instruction Text associated drop-down list; see To Activate an
that displays in the Alarm Response window Event from the Alarm Monitor on page 277.
when the alarm enters a state other than alarm
or normal.
Escalation Tab
Acknowledgement Required before Completion
The alarm escalation function constantly mon-
– Select to require acknowledgement of this
itors all generated alarms that have their esca-
alarm before its completion.
lation options enabled. Escalation level value
Response Required before Completion – Select range is from 0 to 10, where 0 indicates a
to require response to this alarm before its non-escalated alarm.
completion.
The alarm escalation feature provides for two
Associated AV Channel – If your facility uses different conditions when an alarm may be
the DVR/VMS feature, select the camera to be escalated:
associated with this alarm. If applicable, this
If an alarm is generated for a specific alarm
selection overrides the selection made in the
category and there are currently no opera-
Input to camera mapping window.
tors logged on to the P2000 system that
Associated Real Time Map – Select the Real have privileges to receive alarms for that
Time Map to be associated with this alarm. If category.
applicable, this selection overrides the default If an alarm is generated and remains pend-
behavior of the Real Time Map containing the ing for the configured escalation timeout
alarm. That is, when you click the Map button period.
in the Alarm Monitor, the associated Real
Time Map displays, even if it is different from
the Real Time Map containing the alarm.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
86 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
If either of these conditions occurs, that alarm Escalation Timeout (1 to 1440 minutes) – Enter
is regenerated with an elevated escalation the time period (in minutes) after which an
level. The escalation level is incremented by alarm remaining in pending state is escalated
the configured escalation increment value. by the Escalation Increment.
This process may be repeated multiple times
until a high enough escalation level is reached Escalation Increment (1 to 10) – Enter the value
that matches the privileges of a currently by which to escalate an alarm each time the
logged on operator. If no operators are logged escalation takes place.
on to the P2000 system, the alarm is regener-
ated until the maximum escalation level is MSEA Tab
reached, and then no further action is taken.
In facilities that use the Metasys system, this
After an escalated alarm has been completed, feature allows an alarm that is forwarded to the
the next occurrence of that alarm is created Metasys system to contain an embedded refer-
with no escalation level. ence to a Metasys graphic. For more informa-
tion, see Defining MSEA Graphics on
page 368.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
87
Misc Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
88 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
89
When a reader terminal is created in the sys- 1. In the System Configuration window,
tem, a Terminal Down Input Point is automati- expand the panel that contains the input
cally created for input point 25 on the terminal points you wish to group.
and displays under its input point icon as Term 2. Select Input Groups and click Add. The
Down <terminal name>. If you wish to report Input Point Group dialog box opens.
this type of alarm, edit the input point and
make sure the Disable Alarm option is not
selected in the General tab of Alarm Options,
otherwise the alarm does not report to the
Alarm Queue, but continues to report to the
Real Time List (see Alarm Options Tab on
page 83).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
90 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
91
24-10832-194 Rev. E
92 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
93
Event Duration – Enter the duration, in minutes Output Group – Select the name of the Output
that the event is active (up to 1440 minutes). If Group that can be activated or deactivated.
the event activates an output group, the output
group is deactivated after this time period. If Misc.
the event suppresses an input group, the input
group is unsuppressed after this time period. Operate Door Strike – If not selected, a valid
Event duration applies only to event activa- event invokes the event action only, but does
tion, and not to event deactivation. Further- not unlock the door. This setting does not
more, only output group activation and input apply to badges with executive privilege. Also,
group suppression may be assigned a duration, events with trigger type Any Void Card never
but not output group deactivation and input unlock the door.
group unsuppression.
Reset Panel Alarm Relay (Acknowledge Alarm)
– If selected, the panel alarm relay is reset.
Input Group
Enable – Click to enable the Input Group Sup- Note: If a panel card event is created for
pression function. CK721-A panels and none of the boxes to sup-
press output points or strike readers are enabled,
Suppress – Click to suppress the specific Input the panel card event still shows in the Real Time
Group when this event is activated. Do not List, as an activated event.
select Suppress to unsuppress the specific Input
Group when this event is activated. When this
event is deactivated, the selected action is Valid Readers for Current Event
inverted; that is, an event that suppresses an
The terminals connected to this panel display
input group on activation, unsuppresses that
in the list. Select those terminals that are used
input group on deactivation, and an event that
to initiate this card event. Select terminals run-
unsuppresses an input group on activation, sup-
ning in Local mode; the card event may not be
presses that input group on deactivation.
triggered on terminals running on Shared
Input Group – Select the name of the Input mode. Terminals not selected are not affected
Group that can be suppressed or unsuppressed. by the event.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
94 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
2. Select Soft Alarm and click Edit. The Edit PIN Code Retry – When enabled, an alarm is
Soft Alarm dialog box opens. generated when three consecutive invalid PIN
3. Select the Reader or Panel Soft Alarms codes are entered at a keypad reader.
you wish to enable, and click the corre-
sponding Relay box to activate the panel
relay. See Soft Alarms Field Definitions Note: If you enable the Relay box associated
for detailed information. with a Duress or PIN Code Retry alarm to activate
the panel relay, you must also enable the Latch
Output option on the Alarm tab of the Edit Panel
dialog box; see page 58.
Note: Make sure the Set Panel Relay When
Active check box is selected in the Input Point
dialog box to activate the relay on the panel when Forced Door/Propped Door – If enabled, a
the input point is activated, see Input Point Field Forced Door alarm message is printed when-
Definitions on page 82. ever there is a door open condition without a
valid badge read detected first; and a Propped
Door alarm message is printed whenever there
is a door open condition with a valid badge,
but the door is left open past the entry time.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
95
Configure OSI Panels and The portal gateway communicates with the
Components P2000 Server via standard 10/100Base-T
Ethernet connectors. The transmit range from
portal gateway to reader is typically 150 to 300
feet. Each portal gateway supports up to 128
IMPORTANT: This release of the P2000 soft-
ware is compatible with Stanley® Wi-Q™ Version readers. The wireless reader performs the
3.00.38, Portal Firmware Version 3.0.17.155, and actual access validation and can support up to
Reader Version 3.00.039. Older versions of the 65,000 badges. The OSI interface has no hard
OSI software are not compatible with this P2000 limit on the number of portal gateways but
release. enforces the existing P2000 limits on the num-
ber of readers.
Use this section to configure your P2000 sys-
The portal gateway includes a built-in Web
tem to communicate with OSI Wireless Access
server that provides a simple easy-to-use user
Management Solutions (WAMS) hardware. It
interface for configuring the portal, monitoring
is assumed that the OSI hardware is already
the status of the portal, and updating the firm-
installed before you can configure and use the
ware loaded into the portal and the readers.
essential functions described in this section.
Refer to the OSI documentation for hardware
installation instructions and to the P2000 Soft- Unsupported OSI Features
ware Installation Manual for instructions asso-
ciated with the installation of the OSI Interface The following OSI system features are not
software. compatible with the P2000 system architecture:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
96 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The OSI Web Service runs in the context of the This automatic hardware detection also affects
Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) long term operation. If an OSI reader is unable
Web server, sends data and commands to the to communicate with its portal gateway for a
readers, and receives transaction data from the period of about 30 minutes or more, it attempts
readers. The OSI Web Service reads and writes to connect to any other portal gateway within
data to the OSI WAMS database that is hosted wireless range. This provides communication
in the same SQL Server® as the P2000 system. redundancy if a reader is within communica-
The P2000 OSI Interface Service provides the tion range of multiple portal gateways. Since
interface between the P2000 system and the the P2000 software maintains a relationship
OSI system. The OSI Interface Service per- between panels and terminals (and displays
forms all of its functions by calling functions this relationship in several different locations),
in the Stanley Wi-Q Version 3.x SDK. All it must update the database when a reader
other major principles of the P2000 architec- switches to a new portal gateway. The P2000
ture remain the same. OSI Interface Service detects this condition
and updates the database as required.
Hardware Detection Since the terminal record is only updated and
not recreated, any links between terminals and
The OSI system provides automatic hardware
other items remain unchanged. The only
detection. When new portal gateways or read-
impact is for partitioned P2000 systems. Since
ers are added to the system, they are detected
by definition the terminal belongs to the same
by the OSI Web Service and the appropriate
partition as its panel, moving a terminal to a
record is created in the WAMS database. The
different panel may require the partition of the
P2000 OSI Interface Service periodically scans
terminal to change. In practice, this is usually
for these new items. When a new item is
not a problem since P2000 partitions usually
found, the appropriate record is created in the
correspond to some physical barrier or separa-
P2000 database.
tion such as different buildings or different
areas of the same building.
P2000 Server
Reader
Ethernet
OSI P2000
Web Service Software
Portal
Gateway
24-10832-194 Rev. E
97
24-10832-194 Rev. E
98 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Once the OSI Facility record is saved, it is Database Name – This field displays the name
written in the OSI system. At that point, the of the OSI database.
system automatically recognizes the new hard-
ware when it is activated, as well as automati- Keypad Credential Length – Enter the number
cally adds it to the P2000 database. of digits that cardholders need to enter at wire-
less keypad readers in your facility.
OSI Facility Field Definitions PIN Length – For facilities that require addi-
tional security, enter the number of PIN code
digits that cardholders need to enter at wireless
General Tab keypad readers in your facility. OSI supports
Use this tab to define general descriptive infor- PIN codes ranging from 3 to 6 digits.
mation of the OSI Facility record and the Manager Flag – Select one of the three special
access parameters associated with the readers. access flags to be assigned to users with Man-
ager privileges who require special access at a
reader.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
99
Extended Shunt Time – Select the amount of Use Secondary Badge Format – Click if your
time that the door alarm is suppressed to allow facility uses a secondary badge format.
access to cardholders with special needs. The
Extended Shunt Time must exceed the Secondary Badge Format – Click the [...] but-
Extended Access Time. ton and select the secondary badge format to
be used at your facility.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
100 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Magnetic Stripe Tab Expiration Date Format – Select the card expi-
ration date format.
If your facility uses Magnetic Stripe cards, use
this tab to configure the software to accept the Expiration Date Position – Enter the position in
card types and settings. Default settings are the card of the expiration date field.
sufficient for most systems.
Expiration Date Position Type – Select if the
position type is a Character, a Field, or
Unused.
Card Track – Select Track 2 or Track 3 mag- Issue Number Position – Enter the position in
netic cards. The system can be used with either the card of the issue number field.
Track 2 or 3 cards; however, you cannot use Issue Number Position Type – Select if the posi-
both types within the same facility. Most users tion type is a Character, a Field, or Unused.
use Track 2 cards and do not need to set up any
type of advanced card parameters. ID Position – Enter the position in the card of
the ID field.
Card Track Limit – There is a limitation on the
number of characters for each track. These ID Position Type – Select if the position type is
characters include any digits and field separa- a Character, a Field, or Unused.
tors; however, they exclude the starting and
ending sentinels. The maximum number of
characters that the system can read on Track 2
is 26 characters; Track 3 can read up to 70
characters. The P2000 software does not
enforce these limits.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
101
Use this tab to adjust Daylight Savings Time Use this tab to define up to 32 Access Groups
(DST) settings according to your region. DST and corresponding Timezones that can be
varies from country to country. Some countries assigned to all badges that are used at OSI
may not observe DST, while in many other readers. You must create Access Groups
countries the start dates and end dates for DST (page 232) and Time Zones (page 49) before
change from year to year. the selections display in the drop-down lists.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
102 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
103
24-10832-194 Rev. E
104 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
8. The Query String value is used with mes- Readers with Keypads – For a reader with a
sage filtering (see Define Query String Fil- keypad, you must enter the Sign On Key from
ters on page 225). the P2000 OSI Facility record into the keypad;
9. The Mac Address field displays the Media see page 98. To place the reader into enroll-
Access Control address automatically ment mode, enter 5678 on the keypad. A green
assigned to the portal. light on the reader flashes three times. Within
five to six seconds, enter the six-digit Sign On
10. Select from the Channels box, the Radio Key from the OSI Facility record. The reader
Frequency (RF) channels or frequency goes through a sequence of alternating red and
bands that this panel uses to communicate green lights and should finish with three green
with the readers. flashes. That means the reader successfully
11. The Reboot button is provided to restart communicated with the portal.
the portal; for example, if the portal is not
responding or to recover from an error. Readers without Keypads – For a reader with-
out a keypad, the reader is placed into enroll-
12. Click OK to save your entries. ment mode by presenting the default badge
After you create the OSI panel, the system that was included in your package from OSI.
automatically creates a Panel Down soft input Within five to six seconds, present the badge
point for input point 25 and displays it under that was defined in the Reader Sign On Badge
the Soft Input Points icon. If you wish to box of the OSI Facility record; see page 99.
report this type of alarm, edit the input point The reader goes through a sequence of alter-
and make sure the Disable Alarm option is not nating red and green lights and should finish
selected in the General tab of Alarm Options, with three green flashes. That means the reader
otherwise the alarm does not report to the successfully communicated with the portal.
Alarm Queue, but continues to report to the
Real Time List (see Alarm Options Tab on After a successful sign on, the reader should be
detected and automatically added to the P2000
page 83).
database as a new terminal. Note that the Real
Time List displays messages associated with
Configure OSI Terminals the new OSI components.
After a portal is up and functional, you can add Each reader installed in your system must be
new readers to the system. A new reader needs set up and configured in the P2000 software to
to be enrolled into the OSI system to become establish communication and control. Once
functional. The enrollment process is different Terminals are configured, they may be
for readers that have keypads and readers that included in Terminal Groups to provide com-
do not. mon access throughout your facility.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
105
24-10832-194 Rev. E
106 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Enable – Click if you wish the system to recog- Statistics Update Interval – Select the frequency
nize this terminal. at which the reader sends messages to the por-
tal gateway with signal strength, battery volt-
Public – If you use Partitioning, click if you age, external supply voltage and packet trans-
wish this terminal to be visible to all partitions. fer ratio information.
Door Sensors – Click if your reader has the
optional Door Sense Module for monitoring of
the actual strike status. Note: The smaller the interval, the greater the
battery use. For a high volume area, you may
Channels – Click the Radio Frequency (RF) want to keep the interval time at 1 minute to
channels or frequency bands that this terminal ensure adequate coverage. (You need to monitor
uses to communicate with the readers. battery use to ensure adequate power supply.)
However, for little used areas, you can set the
update interval up to 24 hours to preserve battery
Access Tab life.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
107
Override – Select a time zone during which the Reboot and Clear DB – Click to reset the reader
reader does not require a badge to open the and temporarily clear current reader data.
door. After you perform this command, you must
reset the OSI terminal using the instructions
PIN Required – Select a time zone during provided on To Set Up OSI Readers on
which cardholders are required to enter a PIN page 103.
number.
At times it may be necessary to use this tab to Viewing OSI Wireless Devices Status
reset the reader. This could typically happen
only if you were to take the reader offline, for The System Status window displays the cur-
example to change batteries. rent status of all OSI devices that have been
configured in the system. It also allows you to
view portal and reader values related to the
wireless signal they receive.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
108 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Configure S321-IP Panels and You should logically name S321-IP panels,
Components including information such as a panel’s loca-
tion or what it controls, but bear in mind that
Use this section to configure your P2000 sys- the maximum number of characters allowed in
tem to communicate with S321-IP panels. an S321-IP component name is 32. When you
S321-IP panels communicate with the P2000 use long panel names, you need to remember
Server using a standard TCP/IP network proto- that a terminal input point name is <input
col to provide badge access, alarm monitoring, name> <terminal name> <panel name> and
history reporting, input/output linking, and therefore, that combination should not exceed
card and system activated events. 32 characters. If the combination does exceed
32 characters the resulting name is truncated to
The S321-IP is an advanced, intelligent, net-
32 characters.
work panel capable of monitoring and con-
trolling one or two fully configured doors. The
S321-IP panel provides the ability to configure
supervised 4-state inputs and unsupervised IMPORTANT: Although the P2000 system
allows S321-IP component names to have up to
2-state inputs. When interfacing to a single
32 characters, the S321-IP panel user interface
door, you can configure the unused points as only supports names of up to 16 bytes long.
general purpose input/output points.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
109
Note: In addition to applying time zones to the Version – Select the firmware version of the
panels (described in Configure Panel Time Zones S321-IP panel. Certain features are enabled or
on page 62), you may also define panel holidays disabled depending on the panel version
if you wish to restrict access in your facility during selected.
a holiday period; see Configure Panel Holidays
on page 63.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
110 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
111
24-10832-194 Rev. E
112 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
113
General Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
114 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
115
Timezone Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
116 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
117
24-10832-194 Rev. E
118 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
119
Alarm Options Tab Output Link – This option links the input point
to an output point, so that the output point can
be triggered by a change in the input point’s
state. For example, when an input point, such
as a motion sensor, is tripped (the input point
state changes from secure to alarm), an output
point triggers an external device (a light is
turned on). Select the number of the output
point that can be triggered by the selected
input point. The list display the output point
number preceded by the terminal number, as in
<terminal number>-<output number>.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
120 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Configure S321-IP Output Points The following possible output points are avail-
able:
S321-IP output points are automatically cre-
ated under terminals that operate with the
Input/Output Mode enabled. These output
points are used to trigger external devices Output Name Description
using the S321-IP panel. These devices might Green If the terminal is enabled, this out-
include warning indicators for alarm situations put point controls a green LED
or non-alarm related functions, such as lighting associated with the terminal. When
access is granted, this output is
or environmental control. activated. If the terminal is disabled,
this output point can be used as a
When the terminal operates in Reader Mode, general purpose output.
the output points are dedicated to access con- Red If the terminal operates in Reader
trol functions, such as controlling the door Mode, this output point controls a
strike, shunting an alarm, and turning green red LED associated with the termi-
nal. When access is denied, this
and red LEDs on and off to indicate access output is activated. If the terminal
granted or denied. operates in Input/Output Mode, this
output point can be used as a gen-
If the terminal operates in Input/Output Mode, eral purpose output.
the output points that were used by the reader Shunt If the terminal operates in Reader
can be used to trigger external devices, such as Mode, the alarm shunt prevents the
external alarm system from sound-
lights and sirens – these output points are ing an alarm when a valid access
referred to as general purpose outputs. occurs. When a valid access
occurs, the shunt relay is energized
Output points are created under the selected for the number of seconds entered
in the Shunt Time field on the
S321-IP terminal and are named using the out- Access tab of the S321-IP Terminal
put name and <terminal name> <panel name>, Edit application. If the terminal
as in Shunt <terminal name> <panel name>. operates in Input/Output Mode, this
output point can be used as a gen-
If you rename the panel or terminal, you can eral purpose output.
edit the output point to manually enter the new
Strike If the terminal operates in Reader
panel or terminal name. Mode, the door strike controlled by
the terminal unlocks for the number
of seconds entered in the Access
Time field on the Access tab of the
S321-IP Terminal Edit application. If
the terminal operates in Input/Out-
put Mode, this output point can be
used as a general purpose output.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
121
24-10832-194 Rev. E
122 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
123
Configure HID Facility Parameters 7. Enter the Controller Buffer Size that
defines the number of events buffered on
Before configuring your HID components, use the HID controllers when offline.
the following instructions to define facility
parameters associated with HID readers. 8. In the Badge Formats box, click Add to
define the badge formats to be used at your
facility. The Badge Format Edit dialog box
To Configure HID Facility Parameters opens.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
fig>System. Enter your password if
prompted. The System Configuration win-
dow opens.
2. Expand Panels to display the panel types.
3. Expand HID Network Panels to open the
HID components.
4. Select HID Facility and click Add. The
HID Facility Edit dialog box opens. 9. Click the [...] button, select a *.bft file
from the list, and click Open. The name of
the selected *.bft file displays in the Name
field. You cannot edit this name.
10. Select the Technology type.
11. Enter the total number of Bits expected to
be returned from the reader when the
badge is read.
12. Select a Qualifier number. The number
selected represents a 32-bit numerical
value that allows differentiating formats
with the same technology and the same
number of bits. The default value is 1.
5. Enter the Name of the HID Facility record.
This field displays P2000 by default, but IMPORTANT: The Technology, Bits, and
you can change the name according to Qualifier badge format settings must match the
your facility needs. badge format settings defined for a cardholder
badge (see Create Badge Formats on page 237).
6. Select from the Extended Access Flag
drop-down list, one of the three special
access flags that are used by cardholders 13. Click OK.
with extended access privileges who 14. Repeat these steps for each badge format
require special access at a reader. Special to be used with HID readers.
access allows a door’s access time to be
different. The list displays the special
access flag names as configured in Site Note: The system may generate “Facility code
too large” Event Log error messages when the
Parameters; see page 33. facility code is too large for the selected format.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
124 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
125
24-10832-194 Rev. E
126 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Communications Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
127
Important Notes:
The P2000 system does not monitor the sta-
tus of HI-O bus modules.
EVO panels may display download errors
unless the items selected on this tab match
exactly the HI-O bus modules physically
connected. P2000 configuration should be
updated after new HI-O modules are added
and rebooted. P2000 configuration should
Hardware – Displays the hardware type be changed before old HI-O modules are
selected in the General Tab. removed.
If you select any group 1 module type, a
Built-in Reader – This is selected by default for P2000 terminal number 1 is automatically
EHR40 and EHRP40 panels, and indicates that created. If you select any group 2 module
a reader is integrated into the panel. Not avail- type, a P2000 terminal number 2 is auto-
able for EH400. matically created.
Hi-O Modules Connected – Select the HI-O Tabs in the HID Terminal Edit are available
hardware module connected to the HID panel. for configuration, depending on the module
Depending on the selections made in the check type selected.
boxes, other check boxes are enabled or dis- When you define two readers for a single
abled. The final selection must not exceed 2 door, most terminal parameters are synchro-
readers, 12 inputs, and 3 outputs. The follow- nized between the two readers to ensure a
ing table displays the options provided with predictable behavior of the door.
each module type: Terminal Inputs are available for configura-
tion if terminal 1 contains an EDM module.
Module Type Specification
EDM (Hi-O Grp 1) 4 dedicated input points
You can configure input points, if the termi-
2 output points * nal contains an EIM or EDM group 2 mod-
EDM (Hi-O Grp 2) 4 general purpose input points ule for the selected group number.
2 output points **
EWM (Hi-O Grp 1) 1 reader terminal. Can be You can configure output points, if the ter-
defined as a Keypad reader. minal contains an EDM or an ELM module
EWM (Hi-O Grp 2) *** 1 reader terminal. Can be for the selected group number.
defined as a Keypad reader.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
128 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
For example, if you select an EIM for group 6. When you finish with all the entries, click
2 and an EWM for group 2, a terminal with OK to save your settings and return to the
index 2 is created. In addition, 4 inputs are System Configuration window. If you wish
available for creation under that terminal. to include HID terminals in groups that
provide common access, see Create Termi-
Configure HID Terminals nal Groups on page 78.
Depending on your hardware selection, the
HID EVO panel can control up to two door ter- HID Terminal Field Definitions
minals, which are automatically created after
you configure and save the HID panel informa- General Tab
tion. The HID terminal may contain input and
output points. When the terminal is created, it
displays under the Terminals icon as Term 1
<panel name > or Term 2 <panel name>.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
129
Door Contact – to indicate when the input Propped Door is Annunciated at Door – If
point receives a signal from the door con- enabled, the reader beeps when the propped
tact associated with the reader. door condition is reported. A Propped Door
Forced Door – to indicate when there is a condition occurs when the propped input point
door open condition without a valid badge is configured and a door is held open longer
read detected first. than the Time Before Propped Door Reported
setting, as indicated on the Access tab.
Propped Door – to indicate when the door is
held open longer than the time entered in Tamper Alarm Activates AUX Relay – Click to
the Time Before Propped Door Reported activate the auxiliary relay upon receiving a
field. tamper signal. The relay deactivates when the
tamper becomes secure. A tamper signal is
received from one or more tamper switches on
Note: When the Edge reader is in override, the the panel to indicate a tamper condition if for
Propped Door alarm does not go back to secure example, a reader has been disturbed or
state after the door is closed. removed from the wall.
Flags Tab
24-10832-194 Rev. E
130 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Card only – The cardholder must swipe the A command is received from the Door Con-
badge to gain access. trol application to change the door’s condi-
Card and PIN – The cardholder must swipe tion.
the badge and is also required to enter a PIN
The following describes the keypad sequence
code. If this option is selected, you must
necessary to unlock the door and return the
complete the Keypad Entry Parameters set-
door to normal operation.
tings. Selection is not available when the
other reader is in Card ID only mode or Depending on the Access Method used
Card or Card ID mode. (Card and PIN, Card ID only, or Card or
Card ID only – The cardholder must enter the Card ID) gain access and enter 9 9 # to
badge number at the keypad. If this option unlock the door.
is selected, you must complete the Keypad Depending on the Access Method used
Entry Parameters settings. Selection is not (Card and PIN, Card ID only, or Card or
available when the other reader is in Card Card ID) gain access and enter 0 0 # to
and PIN mode. return the door to normal operation.
Card or Card ID – The cardholder could
either swipe the badge or enter the badge Note: HID panels do not report transactions
number at the keypad. If this option is associated with Cardholder Override.
selected, you must complete the Keypad
Entry Parameters settings. Selection is not
available when the other reader is in Card Anti Passback
and PIN mode.
Enable – Click to enable the anti-passback fea-
ture at this reader for the number of seconds
Note: PIN or Card ID entries are completed by entered in the Time Active field. The
pressing the # key. Also, if you make any badge anti-passback function prevents cardholders
format changes, you must download all badges to from using their badge at the same reader until
the HID panels that have the Card ID only or the timer has expired.
Card or Card ID terminal option selected.
Cardholder Override – This feature is not avail- Note: If cardholders swipe their badge while
the anti-passback timer is active, access is
able if the Access Method is Card only. If
denied because the anti-passback timer is on.
Cardholder Override is enabled, an authorized
cardholder may place the reader in an override
condition by performing a badging procedure Time Active – Enter the time in seconds that a
at the reader’s keypad. The override remains in badge used at the reader is invalid before it can
effect until: be used at the same reader.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
131
Access Time – Enter the time (up to 60 sec- Enabled – Select a time zone during which the
onds) that the door remains unlocked after a terminal is active. For example, you may not
cardholder presents a valid badge at this want the reader to be used between midnight
reader. The cardholder has up to 60 seconds to and 5:00 AM, so assign a time zone with the
open the unlocked door before it re-locks desired inactive time period. If you select
when the access time elapses. <always enabled>, the terminal is always
active.
Extended Access Time – Enter the time (up to
1620 seconds) that the door remains unlocked Override – Select a time zone that can be set as
to provide extended access time to cardholders an override for this terminal.
with special needs.
PIN Suppression – Select a time zone during
Time Before Propped Door Reported – Enter the which cardholders are not required to enter a
number of seconds (up to 60) that the door can PIN code.
remain opened before the propped door alarm
is reported.
Configure HID Input Points
24-10832-194 Rev. E
132 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The following input points are available: 2. Expand HID Network Panels to display
all HID panels configured in the system.
Input 3. Expand the panel that contains the input
Input Name Description
Type
points you wish to configure.
Panel Power Failure Indicates the reader has
Input a power failure. To configure panel inputs, expand Input
Points Points, select the input point you wish
Panel Battery Provides low battery
indication. to configure and click Edit.
Panel Down Internal to the P2000 To configure terminal inputs, expand the
system to indicate that terminal that contains the input point
the panel is not active.
you wish to configure, then expand
Tamper Typically wired to a tam- Input Points, select the input point you
Switch (for per switch to indicate
Edge EVO) tampering. wish to configure and click Edit.
A tamper alarm may be
generated in configura-
tions where there are
multiple enclosures Note: Depending on your HID EVO hardware,
whenever the tamper you can also add terminal input points.
sensor on one those
enclosures is activated.
Terminal Door Contact This input point receives The HID Input Point Edit dialog box opens
Input signal from the door con- at the General tab.
Points tact device associated
with the reader. 4. Enter the information in each tab according
Forced Door Indicates when there is a to your system requirements. The fields
door open condition available for configuration depend on the
without a valid badge type of input point selected. (See HID Input
read detected first.
Point Field Definitions for detailed infor-
Propped Door Indicates when there is a mation.) As you work through the tabs,
door open condition with
a valid badge, but the click Apply to save your settings.
door is left open past the
entry time
5. When you finish with all the entries, click
OK to save your settings and return to the
Request To This input point receives
Exit signal from the REX System Configuration window.
device associated with
the reader.
HID Input Point Field Definitions
Tamper General purpose input.
Switch (for Typically wired to a tam-
Edge) per switch to indicate General Tab
tampering.
Terminal Internal to the P2000
Down system to indicate that
panel communications
have ceased.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
133
Note: HID input points do not differentiate Debounce Time – Enter the time in millisec-
between short or open changes of state, they are onds (15 to 2040) that the input must remain in
both considered fault conditions; however, they a transition state to establish the detected state.
are reported in the system as short alarms. Without a debounce time, the panel may detect
that the input is in an incorrect state because of
the bouncing of the input device’s contacts.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
134 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
2. Select Output Points and click Add. The 11. When you finish with all the entries, click
HID Output Point Edit dialog box opens. OK to save your settings and return to the
System Configuration window.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
135
24-10832-194 Rev. E
136 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Configure Assa Abloy® IP Door The following figure illustrates a DSR running
Locks and Components in a virtual environment.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
137
Each Assa Abloy Intelligent Lock is repre- Before configuring your Assa Abloy compo-
sented by a panel and a single reader terminal nents, use the following instructions to define
in the P2000 software. The P2000 system facility parameters associated with Assa Abloy
automatically adds Assa Abloy panels, termi- panels.
nals, and associated soft input points to the
P2000 system configuration tree after the DSR
detects the corresponding locks, which occurs Note: Facility parameter modifications affect
after the DSR Interface Service restarts or all Assa Abloy panels and associated compo-
when a change occurs to the fields on the Assa nents defined in the P2000 System Configura-
Abloy DSR Edit dialog box (see page 141). tion.
Each component has a predefined name,
including a 16-character string identifying the Configuring Assa Abloy facility parameters
panel serial number as defined in the DSR. consists of the following:
Panel names have the following predefined Assigning special access requirements for
structure: Assa Abloy panels (see Special Access for
Assa Abloy Panels on page 137)
[PoE or Wi-Fi] [Lock Serial Number]
Setting up badge formats for use with Assa
Example: PoE IT107E2577PA0BCE Abloy panels (see Set Up Badge Formats
for Assa Abloy Panels on page 138)
Terminal names have the following predefined
structure:
[PoE or Wi-Fi] [Lock Serial Number] Term Note: Changing any Assa Abloy Facility
parameters requires a manually initiated down-
Example: PoE IT107E2577PA0BCE Term load of all badges to the DSR. This can be most
efficiently done by using the Full Download but-
Soft input points have the following pre- ton on the Assa Abloy DSR Edit dialog box.
defined structure:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
138 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
139
The P2000 software provides the following In addition to creating *.bft files, you must
formats to be used with Assa Abloy locks: perform additional badge format configuration
steps specific to Assa Abloy panels, as
Cardkey 34 bit with Sentinel described in this section. These steps consist of
Corporate 1000 with Sentinel the following:
H10301 with Sentinel (this is the 26 Bit
Creating badge formats to be assigned to
Wiegand format)
cardholder badges (see Create Badge For-
H10302 with Sentinel (this is the HID Pro- mats on page 237). These settings must
prietary 37 Bit Wiegand format. As this for- match the settings defined for Assa Abloy
mat does not have a facility code, use supplemental badge formats.
facility code 0 for all badges of this format.)
Selecting the primary badge format for
Assa Abloy locks (see To Select a Primary
Badge Format for Assa Abloy Locks on
Note: If any other binary card formats are to be page 139).
used for Assa Abloy locks, a Sentinel version of
the card format must be created. In addition, a Adding supplemental badge formats, as
card format for Magnetic stripe cards must be needed (see To Add Supplemental Badge
created to match the encoding on the magnetic Formats on page 140).
stripe cards. Contact Technical Support for assis-
tance in creating card formats.
To Select a Primary Badge Format for
Assa Abloy Locks
Note: The system may generate “Badge num- 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
ber encode failed” Event Log error messages fig>System. Enter your password if
when the badge number or facility code is too prompted. The System Configuration win-
large for the selected format. dow opens.
2. Expand Panels to display the panel types.
To start, add any badge formats (*.bft files) not
3. Select Assa Abloy Panels and click Edit.
already defined that are required by Assa
The Assa Abloy Facility Edit dialog box
Abloy locks. See P2000 Badge Format on
opens.
page 193 for more information. All badge for-
mats (*.bft files) are located in \Program Files 4. In the Primary Badge Format field, click
(x86)\Johnson Controls\P2000\BadgeFormats. the [...] button and select the badge format
that is the primary format used at the site
for Assa Abloy locks.
5. Click Apply.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
140 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To Add Supplemental Badge Formats 9. Repeat these steps for each badge format to
be used with Assa Abloy locks.
1. On the Assa Abloy Facility Edit dialog
box, click Add. The Badge Format Edit
dialog box opens. Using the Card ID feature with Assa
Abloy Locks
24-10832-194 Rev. E
141
To Add an Assa Abloy DSR 12. When a DSR status changes to Down, the
P2000 system receives notifications about
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- the panel status, according to the following
fig>System. Enter your password if selections in the Panel Status When DSR
prompted. The System Configuration win- is Down drop-down list:
dow opens.
Down – The P2000 system receives a panel
2. Expand Panels to display the panel types. down notification for each panel associ-
3. Expand Assa Abloy Panels. ated with the DSR.
4. Right-click over Integration Components No Change – The P2000 system receives
and click Add. The Assa Abloy DSR Edit only a single notification that the DSR is
dialog box opens. currently down. The P2000 system does
not receive panel down notifications for
each panel associated with the DSR. This
option is recommended for large instal-
lations.
13. Click the Clear DSR button if you wish to
delete all P2000 data (for example, badge
data or access groups) from the DSR. Use
the Clear DSR button only if the DSR has
gone through abnormal conditions that
make its database inconsistent with the
P2000 data, such as restoring the DSR
database to an earlier backup, or using a
DSR that was previously loaded by a dif-
ferent P2000 system.
11. The Encryption feature is currently not 15. Click the Full Download button to down-
supported in this release. load the DSR with all data to ensure its
provisioning data matches the P2000 data.
16. Click OK to close.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
142 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
143
In rare occasions, for example when you An error message when trying to delete a
change a badge format or when the DSR is time zone associated with Assa Abloy pan-
not informed about a badge change because els, may indicate that the P2000 Assa Abloy
someone emptied the download queue, the DSR Interface service has not yet for-
system may generate a User already exist warded the deletion information to the
with same credentials error message in the DSR. Wait for the information to get for-
Real Time List. If this error occurs, you warded, and then delete the time zone.
must clear the DSR and perform a manual Downloading Holidays to a specific Assa
download from the P2000 server using the Abloy panel results in an automatic for-
Clear DSR, Quick Restore, and Full warding to all Assa Abloy panels.
Download buttons on the Assa Abloy DSR
Therefore, downloading Holidays to a sin-
Edit dialog box.
gle Assa Abloy panel updates all Assa
Avoid unnecessary downloads using the Abloy panels with respect to Holiday con-
Download application or through Down- figuration.
load event actions.
Downloading Input Points, Output Points,
The DSR queues all download records Soft Alarms, Access Groups, Card Events,
received from the P2000 system. and Elevator/Cabinets has no effect, and
Any unnecessary download records may therefore be omitted.
increase the load on the DSR, and more
importantly, the time it takes to synchronize
Additional DSR Downloading Notes
the locks.
Therefore, observe the following instruc- To ensure that the DSR remains in synch with
tions to reduce the amount of messages the the P2000 database, the DSR is expected to be
DSR has to process. online all the time.
In general, all modifications in the P2000 In case the DSR is offline, downloading of cer-
system are automatically queued for down- tain configuration data, including badges and
load. Unless the download queues are emp- access groups, is suspended for the DSR.
tied, or a lock or the DSR were cleared, or
the P2000 informs you that a manual down- The suspension of downloads is automatically
load is required, there is no need to manu- lifted as soon as the DSR is online to the
ally download to an Assa Abloy lock. P2000 Server, and any suspended downloads
resume automatically. No user action is
Downloading a Time Zone to a specific
required.
Assa Abloy panel results in an automatic
forwarding to all Assa Abloy panels. However, if a DSR goes offline frequently, or
Therefore, we recommend that only one goes offline for unknown reasons, an investi-
Assa Abloy panel lists in its Panel Time gation must be initiated as soon as possible.
Zone table all time zones used on the DSR.
This way, downloading Time Zones to this Edit Assa Abloy Panels
single Assa Abloy panel updates all Assa
After you add a DSR, a panel list displays
Abloy panels with respect to Time Zone
under the DSR in the System Configuration
configuration.
tree.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
144 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
145
1. Ensure that DSR1 is online to the P2000 Assa Abloy Panel Time Zones
system.
2. Use the LCT configuration tool to config- Note: Each Assa Abloy lock can only store up
ure the lock to not talk to any existing to 32 different time blocks. A time zone may have
multiple time blocks.
DSR; that is, neither DSR1 nor DSR2.
3. Delete the panel from the P2000 system,
To keep the number of time blocks inside
under the DSR1 integration component.
each lock to a minimum, we recommend
4. Use the LCT to configure the lock to talk using a very basic Time Zone strategy for
to the new DSR; that is, DSR2. Assa Abloy locks.
5. Ensure that DSR2 is online to the P2000 The access rights of a badge are determined
system. by the combination of Access Groups and
6. The panel shows up under the DSR2 inte- Time Zones.
gration component. Ensure that Access Groups containing Assa
7. Clear the lock and download from the Abloy panels are only paired with Time
P2000 system. Zones that are suitable for Assa Abloy pan-
els.
It is not required to list a Time Zone in the
Panel Time Zone table of an Assa Abloy
panel in order for it to be used to grant
access to badges.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
146 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
It is required to list a Time Zone in the Define a specific day to be an Assa Abloy
Panel Time Zone table of an Assa Abloy Holiday by doing two things:
panel in order for it to be used as the “Over- declare the specific day as a Holiday (of
ride Timezone” in the terminal definition. Type 1, 2, or 3) in the Edit Holiday
The exclusion of a Time Zone from the application (see page 51), and
Panel Time Zone table cannot be used to define the time blocks in a Time Zone
curtail the access rights of defined badges. for the Holiday’s Type as always Inac-
Instead, the Access Groups shall be chosen tive.
to only include the applicable Assa Abloy
This configuration matches the intent to
panels.
have no access and no overrides during the
In general, removing or rearranging Time entire holiday.
Zones in a Panel Time Zone table is not
advisable. If such actions are necessary, we If in a Time Zone there is any Active period
recommend downloading all Time Zones defined for a Holiday of Type 1, 2, or 3,
and badges to the affected panel after the then this configuration is not supported by
changes were made by using the Full Assa Abloy locks, and the Assa Abloy inte-
Download button on the Assa Abloy DSR gration ignores the particular holiday type
Edit dialog box. for that Time Zone and treat the day as a
regular day.
It is recommended to select one Assa Abloy
panel and list in its Panel Time Zone table
all time zones that are used on the DSRs. Configure Assa Abloy Terminals
This panel can then be selected in the Each Assa Abloy panel controls a single door
Download application to download Time terminal, which is automatically created with
Zones, if necessary. each panel added to the System Configuration
window via the DSR. The Assa Abloy terminal
consists of seven soft input points.
IMPORTANT: Keep the Time Zone strategy
for Assa Abloy locks as simple as possible.
To Configure Assa Abloy Terminals
Assa Abloy Holiday Definition 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
fig>System. Enter your password if
Holiday periods behave differently for Assa prompted. The System Configuration win-
Abloy locks. See the following notes: dow opens.
If a day is defined as a Holiday in an Assa 2. Expand Panels to display the panel types.
Abloy Time Zone, that Time Zone does not 3. Expand Assa Abloy Panels.
grant access to anyone during the entire day, 4. Expand Integration Components.
regardless of the Holiday’s defined time
periods. 5. Expand the DSR that has the panel or ter-
minal you wish to configure.
If a day is defined as a Holiday in an Assa
Abloy Time Zone, and that Time Zone is 6. Expand the panel that has the terminal you
used to drive the Unlock or First Person wish to configure.
Through feature, those features do not work 7. Right-click over the terminal and select
during the entire day, regardless of the Time Edit. The Assa Abloy Terminal Edit dialog
Zone’s defined time periods. box opens at the General tab.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
147
8. Enter the information in each tab according Lock Type – Displays the name indicating the
to your system requirements. (See Assa terminal lock type, as defined by the DSR.
Abloy Terminal Field Definitions for This field cannot be edited.
detailed information.) As you work through
the tabs, click Apply to save your settings. Wireless – By default, this check box is
selected for Assa Abloy wireless locks (indi-
9. When you finish with all the entries, click cated as Wi-Fi in the default name) and not
OK to save your settings and return to the selected for wired locks (indicated as PoE in
System Configuration window. If you wish the default name). Do not change the default
to include Assa Abloy terminals in groups setting unless special circumstances require it.
that provide common access, see Create
Terminal Groups on page 78. This field enables you to define the time inter-
val when the lock connect to the DSR. Since
wireless Assa Abloy locks typically run on
Assa Abloy Terminal Field Definitions
battery power, configuring the lock to connect
to the DSR too often significantly drains the
General Tab lock’s battery power.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
148 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Access Time – Enter a time in seconds that the Override Type – If a time zone is selected in the
door strike is energized after each valid badge Override Timezone drop-down list, the Over-
access request. The default value is 5 seconds. ride feature functions according to one of the
following options:
Shunt Time – Enter a time in seconds that the
door open alarm is suppressed after a valid Unlock – The door automatically unlocks
badge access request. The shunt time should be and remains unlocked during the active
longer than the access time. The default value period of the selected time zone.
is 10 seconds. First Person Through – The door remains
locked during the active period of the
Extended Access Time – Select the amount of
selected time zone until a cardholder pres-
time that the door remains unlocked to provide
ents a valid badge at the reader, at which
extended access time to cardholders with spe-
time the door remains unlocked for the
cial needs.
remainder of the time zone’s active period.
PIN Type – Determines the use of PIN codes. Override Timezone – To disable the Override
Select one of the following options: feature, select <never overridden>. To use the
Override feature in accordance with the Over-
No PIN Required – In this mode, cardholders
ride Type selected, select a time zone during
do not enter a PIN to gain access through a
which the override period is active.
door.
PIN Required – In this mode, cardholders
that have a PIN must enter their PIN in con- Configure Assa Abloy Soft Input Points
junction with presenting a valid badge. PIN
The P2000 system monitors the following soft
codes can be entered before or after present-
input points for Assa Abloy panels and termi-
ing a badge. This feature is not supported on
nals:
all locks (for example, Persona or Passport
locks). Check with your local Assa Abloy Low Battery (Low Batt) – Indicates that the
dealer for information on PIN support with wireless lock’s battery is failing. Does not
other locks. Cardholders that do not have a apply to wired locks.
PIN, do not have to enter a PIN in conjunc-
tion with presenting a valid badge. Forced Door (Forced) – Indicates when the door
has been opened without a valid badge having
PIN After Badge – In this mode, cardholders
been presented to the reader first.
that have a PIN must enter their PIN in con-
junction with presenting a valid badge. PIN Out of Sync (OutOfSync) – Indicates when the
codes must be entered after presenting a DSR and lock are out of sync, which can be
badge. Cardholders that do not have a PIN, caused by numerous events (for example,
do not have to enter a PIN in conjunction downloading a badge with an invalid badge
with presenting a valid badge. format for the lock or exceeding the number of
time periods for the lock).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
149
Tamper – Indicates when someone has tam- 9. Modify the fields on the desired tabs
pered with the lock or firmware. accordingly. For information on the Gen-
eral and Alarm Options tabs, see Input
Terminal Down (Term Down) – Since an Assa Point Field Definitions on page 82.
Abloy panel and terminal are essentially the
same in the P2000 system, watch for panel 10. Click OK.
down indications.
Assa Abloy Status Information
Panel Down (PanelDown) – Listed under Soft
Input Points in the System Configuration The status of Assa Abloy components can be
tree; this soft input point indicates when panel monitored on the P2000 System Status win-
communications have ceased. dow.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
150 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
151
Before you use the functions described in this Mercury Facility Field Definitions
section, the Mercury hardware must be prop-
erly installed and configured to communicate
Facility Tab
with the P2000 system. Refer to the hardware
installation instructions that were shipped with Use this tab to define access parameters asso-
your Mercury equipment. ciated with Mercury readers.
Once you define your Mercury panels, termi-
nals, inputs, and outputs, see Configure Mer-
cury Elevators on page 184 for specific
instructions to implement elevator access con-
trol using Mercury panels, and also see Mer-
cury Intrusion Interface on page 323 for spe-
cific instructions to implement intrusion
detection using Mercury panels.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
152 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Access Levels – Displays the maximum num- PIN Duress Mode – Select one of the following
ber of access groups (up to 32), that can be PIN code modes used for detecting duress:
assigned to a badge.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
153
24-10832-194 Rev. E
154 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Click Save. You can assign up to four of these Note: The Order column displays the order in
calibration tables to each Mercury panel; see which the card formats are created. The first eight
the General Tab on page 157 for more informa- card formats are defined to work in offline mode.
Verify that your reader terminals display the cor-
tion. rect card formats; see Card Type Tab on
page 169 for details.
Note: Mercury provides two standard settings Name – Enter the name you wish to give to the
for non-supervised inputs, Normally Open and
card format.
Normally Closed. Those inputs do not require an
Input Calibration table. Facility Code – Enter the facility code of the
card format. For Card ID Without Facility
Code formats, you must enter -1.
Card Format Tab
Offset – Enter an offset number to add to the
This tab determines the card formats to be used
card number (based on the card format type) to
at Mercury readers. You can define up to 16
create a unique card number.
card formats to allow your facility to use
badges with different facility codes, different Function – Select one of the following card
data lengths, and so on. Once the selected card types to use with the card format:
formats are defined, they are available for
selection using the Card Type tab in the Mer- No formatting
cury Terminal dialog box. Wiegand
Magnetic stripe
24-10832-194 Rev. E
155
Details – Click to open the Details dialog box Even Parity Number of Bits – Enter the number
to enter the details of the card format. Configu- of bits that are used to calculate even parity.
ration of these fields depends on the card type
selected, Wiegand, Magnetic stripe, and so on. Even Parity Start Bit – Enter the starting bit
position of the even parity.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
156 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
After you install the Mercury hardware and 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
define facility parameters, you must configure fig>System. Enter your password if
the P2000 Server to communicate with Mer- prompted. The System Configuration win-
cury panels by defining connection settings, dow opens.
time information, and other parameters. 2. Expand Panels to display the panel types.
3. Select Mercury Panels and click Add.
The Mercury Panel Edit dialog box opens.
Note: Encryption of all messaging between
Mercury panels and the P2000 Server is done 4. Fill in the information on each tab. (See
through the Transport Layer Security (TLS) proto- Mercury Panel Field Definitions for
col. The encrypted communication uses the TLS details.)
If Available setting, which is configured using
Mercury’s web browser interface. 5. As you work through the tabs, you may
click Apply to save your entries.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
157
6. Click OK to save the panel information. A Partition – Select the partition that has access
message box displays asking if you wish to to this panel.
automatically add time zones to the new
panel. If you select No, you can add the Public – Click Public to allow all partitions to
time zones later; see Configure Panel Time see this panel.
Zones on page 62. Name – Enter a descriptive name for the panel.
7. If you select Yes, the time zones are auto-
matically added. When you return to the Enabled – The system does not recognize the
System Configuration window, a new panel unless you click Enabled. To temporarily
panel icon bearing the name assigned dis- disable the panel, without having to delete or
plays under the root Mercury Panels. disconnect the panel, click again to clear the
check box. When you disable a panel, the
readers continue to grant access, but the panel
does not communicate with the Server until
Note: In addition to applying time zones to the you enable the panel again.
panels (described in Configure Panel Time Zones
on page 62), you may also define panel holidays Query String – This value is used with message
if you wish to restrict access in your facility during
filtering; see Define Query String Filters on
a holiday period; see Configure Panel Holidays
on page 63. page 225.
Mercury Panel Field Definitions Note: You cannot change the Mercury Panel
Type once you add the panel to the system.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
158 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
159
Downstream Connections Tab Port – Displays the available ports for the
selected panel type. See the following table for
details.
IMPORTANT: You cannot modify certain
Panel
parameters in this tab after you save the panel Type
Port Protocol
information in the database.
Mercury Primary 10/100 Ethernet MSP1
EP1501
TB2 (RS-485) MSP1
Mercury panels connect to their terminals Schlage PIM
using downstream ports. These ports contain Direct Reader *
parameters that define the port’s behavior, Mercury Primary 10/100 Ethernet MSP1
EP1502
including the type of devices that can be con- TB3 (RS-485) MSP1
nected. The availability of the ports varies by Mercury Primary 10/100 Ethernet MSP1
panel type. Also, the options in the Mercury EP2500
Port 2 (RS-485) MSP1
Terminal configuration depend on the choices Schlage PIM
made in the port definition. Port 3 (RS-485) MSP1
Schlage PIM
Schlage TB2 (RS-485) Schlage PIM
PIM400- (uses a fixed
1501 9600 baud rate)
* Select Direct Reader for the EP1501 panel if you want
to use a reader on connector TB2 instead of an MSP1
bus.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
160 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The information in this tab defines time A variety of terminal types can be installed into
zone-related information and Daylight Savings Mercury panels to control devices such as card
Time (DST) settings. readers, inputs that control alarm monitoring
devices, outputs that control other devices such
lights or alarm annunciators, or they can be
configured to control soft input points.
Daylight Savings Used – When you select a Note: SIO devices are not necessarily serial
time zone, the system uses the standard day- devices or pure input/output devices.
light savings time settings for the selected
region, the panel’s clock is automatically The term sibling, refers to all terminals that are
adjusted for daylight savings time. If you wish on the same SIO device; for example, a termi-
to change the default settings, click Daylight nal on an MR52 may have up to one sibling, a
Savings Used and select: terminal on a Schlage PIM400-485 may have
up to 15 siblings.
the Begin and End Month
the Begin and End Week of Month The following rules apply to terminal siblings:
the Begin and End Day of Week A terminal can only have siblings that are in
the Begin and End Time of Day the same panel.
Terminals that are siblings to each other
Added During Daylight Savings – A value of 1
have the same SIO number.
hour is currently the world standard. You can-
not change this value.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
161
Terminals that are siblings to each other Siblings share their P2000 inputs and
have the same address configuration (such P2000 outputs on a first come first serve
as Port, Address, IP Address, or MAC basis. This allows a more flexible assign-
Address), but a different Index. ment of inputs and outputs, in case one ter-
If you change the address configuration minal needs more inputs/outputs than the
(such as Port, Address, IP Address, or MAC other. For example:
Address) of a terminal, the following warn- Out of the 8 inputs of an MR52 there
ing message displays: may be 6 assigned to terminal 1 and the
remaining 2 to terminal 2.
Out of the 8 inputs of an MR52 there
may be 8 assigned to terminal 1 and
none left for terminal 2.
Out of the 8 inputs of an MR52 there
may be 8 assigned to terminal 2 and
none left for terminal 1.
If you click Yes, the same change is also Out of the 8 inputs of an MR52 there
made to all siblings of the terminal. may be 4 assigned to terminal 1 and the
remaining 4 to terminal 2.
If you change the Enabled flag of a termi-
nal, the following warning message dis- All inputs of an SIO device are equally visi-
plays: ble in the System Configuration tree under
the Mercury Input Points branch for all of
the siblings on that SIO device.
The System Configuration tree under the
P2000 Input Points branch shows only
P2000 inputs assigned to that specific ter-
minal, and not to a sibling.
All outputs of an SIO device are equally
visible in the System Configuration tree
If you click Yes, the same change is also under the Mercury Output Points branch for
made to all siblings of the terminal. all of the siblings on that SIO device.
Updating the firmware of a terminal applies The System Configuration tree under the
automatically to all of its siblings. P2000 Output Points branch shows only
P2000 outputs assigned to that specific ter-
For Mercury terminals MR52, MR51e, and the
minal, and not to a sibling.
on-board SIO devices on the EP1501 and
EP1502 panels, the following additional rules
apply:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
162 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Wide Area
Network
IP Network
Schlage Schlage
AD-300 series AD-300 series
Supports up to 16
wireless locks .
24-10832-194 Rev. E
163
24-10832-194 Rev. E
164 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
165
24-10832-194 Rev. E
166 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
167
24-10832-194 Rev. E
168 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Anti-Passback – Select to enable the anti-pass- Performing the activation sequence while the
back feature to prevent cardholders from using timer is running will again unlock the door for
their badge again at this reader until the a normal access time and start a new timer.
anti-passback time entered expires.
Entering *0600# starts or extends an override
for 10 hours.
Note: If cardholders use their badge at a differ- Entering *0000# starts an override that will
ent reader on the same panel and are granted end immediately.
access, the system resets the anti-passback
period to its initial value.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
169
Assisted Shunt Time – Enter the time in sec- For magnetic stripe cards, select the Trim
onds that the door alarm is suppressed to allow Zero Bits and Format To Nibble Array for-
additional access time to cardholders with spe- mats. Make sure the Data1 / Data0, Wie-
cial needs. The assisted shunt time should gand Pulses format is not selected.
exceed the assisted access time by the same For magnetic stripe cards, you can select the
amount that the regular shunt time exceeds the Allow Bi-Directional Mag Decode format to
regular access time. also read cards that are reverse swiped.
ADA Relay Mode – Select one of the following For readers that send their input as a Wie-
relay modes that specifies the time the ADA gand signal, select the Data1 / Data0, Wie-
relay is activated minus any ADA Relay Delay. gand Pulses format and make sure the Trim
Zero Bits, Format To Nibble Array, and
<none> – if there is no ADA Relay support. Allow Bi-Directional Mag Decode formats
Same as Access Time – if an ADA Relay is are not selected.
used, make sure you select the ADA Relay To use Card ID, see How to Use Card ID
button in the Input/Output tab. using a Keypad Reader on page 188.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
170 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Card Format Types with Offline Support – Select Terminal – Select the terminal associated with
the card types to be used with this reader. the door contact input point. The terminal list
These card types are configured using the Card includes only terminals that are configured in
Format tab in Mercury Facility; see page 154 the same panel.
for details. These formats are defined to work
in offline mode. Input – Select the Door Contact input point
number that receives signal from the door con-
Card Format Types without Offline Support – tact associated with the terminal.
Select the card types to be used with this
reader. These card types are configured using Debounce Scan Count – Select the number of
the Card Format tab in Mercury Facility; see consecutive input scans that must agree, before
page 154 for details. These formats do not a change of state is reported. Each scan period
work in offline mode. is 16.7 milliseconds.
Primary REX
24-10832-194 Rev. E
171
Input – Select the REX input point number that Hold Time – Select the number of seconds (2 to
receives signal from the primary REX associ- 15) to hold a higher priority status before a
ated with the terminal. lower priority status is reported. Select 0 to
prevent any hold time.
Debounce Scan Count – Select the number of
consecutive input scans that must agree, before Calibration – Select the calibration table that
a change of state is reported. Each scan period provides the predefined mode of operation of
is 16.7 milliseconds. the secondary REX input point. You can define
additional calibration tables by using the Input
Hold Time – Select the number of seconds (2 to Point Calibration tab in Mercury Facility; see
15) to hold a higher priority status before a page 153 for details.
lower priority status is reported. Select 0 to
prevent any hold time.
Strike
Calibration – Select the calibration table that
provides the predefined mode of operation of Enable – Click to enable the Strike output
the primary REX input point. You can define point. You can disable this option to disassoci-
additional calibration tables by using the Input ate this output from the terminal and reassign
Point Calibration tab in Mercury Facility; see the output as a general purpose output point,
page 153 for details. see To Configure Mercury Outputs on
page 176.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
172 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
No Change – The strike output state does not Normal – This mode sets the output point if
change. the output state is Active, and resets the out-
Inactive – This mode locks the door when put point if the output state is Inactive.
the strike output drive mode is Normal, and Inverted – This mode resets the output point
unlocks the door when the strike output if the output state is Active, and sets the out-
drive mode is Inverted. put point if the output state is Inactive.
Active – This mode unlocks the door when Offline Mode – Select one of the following
the strike output drive mode is Normal, and modes that define the output point state when
locks the door when the strike output drive the terminal goes offline:
mode is Inverted.
No Change – The output state does not
change.
Shunt/ADA Relay
Inactive – This mode resets the output point
when the output drive mode is Normal, and
sets the output point when the output drive
Note: The Shunt Relay or ADA Relay output
point is always defined as the next output point of mode is Inverted.
the selected Strike output point. If the Shunt Active – This mode sets the output point
Relay or ADA Relay output point is not available, when the output drive mode is Normal, and
the Not used option is automatically selected. resets the output point when the output
Also, you must define a Door Contact to make the
drive mode is Inverted.
Shunt Relay or ADA Relay work, and you must
also define the reader on the same terminal as
the Door Strike. Configure Mercury Inputs
Not used – Select if there is no output relay The Mercury configuration provides several
connected to the reader. types of input points. Some of these input
points have a predefined and unchanging pur-
Shunt Relay – Select if the relay is connected to pose, such as to indicate panel tamper. Other
an output point that indicates a shunt condi- input points are dedicated to access control
tion. functions, such as receiving input from door
contacts and REX devices; and other input
ADA Relay – Select if the relay is connected to points can be used for a variety of purposes
an output point that controls a door opening and devices, such as power failure.
device.
The system automatically creates panel input
Terminal – Displays the name of the terminal points under the selected Mercury panel and
associated with the shunt/ADA relay output can be enabled for alarm and non-alarm pur-
point. poses.
Output – Displays the shunt/ADA relay output The system also automatically creates two sets
point number that is activated after each valid of terminal input points under the selected ter-
badge access request. minal: P2000 Input Points and Mercury Input
Drive Mode – Select one of the following Points. The terminal hardware type determines
modes that define the output point behavior the available number of input points on both
upon activation: sets. See the table on page 163 for the number
of inputs provided with each module type.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
173
Before you configure your input points, you The System Configuration window displays
should note that: the following icons associated with Mercury
input points:
You cannot add or delete Mercury Input
Points; those input points are associated
with other Mercury components, such as
P2000 general inputs or Door Contact
inputs.
You can configure P2000 Input Points to
indicate the current state of a device, and The following possible input points are avail-
also for alarm or non-alarm purposes. able:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
174 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To Configure Mercury Inputs 5. When you finish with all the entries, click
OK to save the input information.
1. In the System Configuration window,
expand Panels to display the panel types.
2. Expand Mercury Panels to display all Mercury Input Field Definitions
Mercury panels configured in the system.
3. Expand the panel for which you wish to General Tab
configure the input point.
To configure panel inputs, expand Panel
Input Points, select the input point you
wish to configure and click Edit.
To configure terminal inputs, expand the
terminal that contains the input point
you wish to configure, expand Input
Points, then expand P2000 Input
Points, either click Add or select the
input point you wish to configure and
click Edit.
The Edit P2000 Input Point dialog box Partition – Select the partition that has access
opens at the General tab. to this input point.
4. Enter the information in each tab according
to your system requirements. The fields Public – Click Public to allow all partitions to
available for configuration depend on the see this input point.
type of input point selected. (See Mercury Name – Enter a descriptive name for the input
Input Field Definitions for detailed infor- point.
mation.) As you work through the tabs,
click Apply to save your settings.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
175
Number – Select an input point number. This Calibration – Select the calibration table that
number is always associated with the input provides the predefined mode of operation of
point number automatically created under the this input point. You can define additional cali-
Mercury Input Points. bration by using the Input Point Calibration
tab in Mercury Facility; see page 153 for
Query String – This value is used with message details.
filtering; see Define Query String Filters on
page 225. Debounce Scan Count – Select the number of
consecutive input scans that must agree, before
Status – Select Enable to report all input point a change of state is reported. Each scan period
changes of state. Select Disable if you do not is 16.7 milliseconds.
want these changes reported.
Hold Time – Select the number of seconds (2 to
15) to hold a higher priority status before a
Alarm Options Tab
lower priority status is reported. Select 0 to
prevent any hold time.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
176 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Latching – if the input point goes into alarm, To Configure Mercury Outputs
regardless if the input point is secure, the
alarm goes off, (unless the input point is 1. In the System Configuration window,
suppressed). This transaction is reported to expand the terminal that contains the out-
the Alarm Monitor and the Real Time List. put you wish to configure.
2. Expand Output Points, then expand
Entry Delay – Enter the time in seconds (from 0 P2000 Output Points and click Add. The
to 65,535) that the system delays reporting an Edit Mercury Output Point dialog box
entry. This value must be 0 if the entry/exit opens.
Mode selected before is Normal.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
177
10. Select one of the following Drive Modes 14. If the Active State is Flash, enter the fol-
that define the output point behavior upon lowing parameters:
activation: On Time – to toggle the output point on
Normal – This mode sets the output for the time specified here.
point if the output state is Active, and Off Time – to toggle the output point off
resets the output point if the output state for the time specified here.
is Inactive.
Repeat Count – the number of times to
Inverted – This mode resets the output repeat the flash cycle.
point if the output state is Active, and
15. When you finish with all the entries, click
sets the output point if the output state is
OK to save your settings.
Inactive.
11. Select one of the following Offline Modes
that define the output point state when the Aperio Locks Particularities
terminal goes offline:
Doors connected to Aperio devices cannot
No Change – The output state does not be unlocked using Door Control, Control
change. All Doors, or Real Time Map applications.
Inactive – Resets the output point when Doors connected to Aperio devices cannot
the output drive mode is Normal, and be controlled using Mercury Procedures
sets the output point when the output and Triggers.
drive mode is Inverted. Some Aperio devices that are configured
Active – Sets the output point when the with the Card and PIN Required option,
output drive mode is Normal, and resets do not grant access after presenting a valid
the output point when output drive badge and PIN code. After presenting the
mode is Inverted. badge, there is a 2-3 second window in
12. Select one of the following Active States which the Aperio lock does not accept any
that are used with the Preset command in key presses. As a general recommendation,
the Output Control application: wait until you see the red LED light up
before entering the PIN. In Allow PIN
Reset – to reset the output point.
before Badge mode, wait to present your
Set – to set the output point. badge until the red LED has flashed 3 times
Flash – to toggle the output point on and after you enter your PIN followed by the #
off with the specified On Time and Off sign. This also takes about 2-3 seconds.
Time pattern. Also, some locks require that you enter the
Timed – to turn on the output point for asterisk key (*) key after the PIN code
the specified time entered in the Dura- instead of the pound key (#).
tion field. The Door Override feature is not available
13. If the Active State is Timed, enter the for Aperio locks. It is also not available at
Duration in seconds that the output point the door, that is, the door cannot be overrid-
is turned on. den by keying in a number of minutes.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
178 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
179
The terminal Address field of a Schlage The following table provides the different
ENGAGE Lock must be set to the Address OSDP reader messages displayed on the LCD
on an already existing Schlage ENGAGE and under what circumstances each message
Gateway under the same panel and the displays:
same RS-485 bus.
LCD Message Displays when ...
The terminal Index field (1 to 10) of a
Schlage ENGAGE device refers to the rela- Ready the reader is in Card Only or Card
and PIN Required mode and is
tive number of the door on this module. waiting for a badge to be presented.
You should become familiar with the LED Unlocked the reader is in Override mode.
Lockout the reader is in Disable Reader, no
Indicator Guide, which explains the differ- REX or in Locked (No Access, REX
ent LED colors and blink sequences. Refer Active) mode.
to the instructions provided with your Access Denied the reader signals Access Deny.
equipment. Access Granted the reader signals Access Grant or
Unlocked for Access Time.
Be aware that a Magnetic Tamper alarm is Enter Badge the reader is in Card and PIN
reported on the Web UI as a Forced Open Required mode and is waiting for
the badge after the PIN was
alarm with an alarm condition of Trouble. entered.
Enter PIN the reader is in Card and PIN
Required mode and is waiting for
OSDP Reader Particularities the PIN to be entered. For each key
pressed, an asterisk is shown after
the question mark.
P2000 supports OSDP readers connected to Next Request the reader uses the Two Badge
MR50, MR52, MR51e, EP1501, and EP1502 Access feature and is waiting for
the second badge.
Mercury devices.
Enter Next PIN the reader uses the Two Badge
Access feature and is waiting for a
Only one OSDP reader can be connected to PIN to be entered for the second
a single Mercury device reader port. The badge
... the reader is offline to the Mercury
OSDP reader must be set to address 0, device.
except the second reader on EP1501, which
must be set to address 1. The baud rate is
fixed to 9600 Baud. In addition to the messages described in the
table above, the LCD shows the current time
P2000 does not signal any reader offline of the day in AM/PM format.
condition for OSDP readers connected to
Mercury devices.
P2000 does not support biometric template
information transfer using OSDP readers.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
180 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
For example, you can define triggers that sup- 5. Enter a descriptive Procedure Name.
press an input point, activate or deactivate an 6. Click Public to allow all partitions to see
output point, or temporarily change the reader this procedure.
mode of operation whenever a specified time
zone becomes active or inactive. 7. The Query String value is used with mes-
sage filtering; see Define Query String Fil-
ters on page 225.
Configuring Procedures
8. Click Add. The action number automati-
Procedures allow you to define a sequence of cally displays in the No. column.
actions that can be executed based on the 9. Select the row, click the corresponding
selected trigger category. For example, a pro- Group field, and select a group number
cedure could unlock a door, suppress an alarm, from 1 to 4. Only actions that belong to the
and then turn on the lights. You can create sev- group selected in the Mercury Trigger defi-
eral actions within a procedure that can occur nition will be activated.
in the order they are defined.
10. Click the corresponding Category field
and select Terminal, Input, Output, or
To Configure a Procedure Timezone. The choices in the Type, Value,
and Details columns determine how the
1. In the System Configuration window, terminal, input, output, or timezone
expand Panels to display the panel types. behaves upon activation. The following
2. Expand Mercury Panels to display all table describes all possible action types.
Mercury panels configured in the system.
3. Expand the panel for which you wish to
define a procedure. Note: The Timezone procedure category
allows a reader terminal behavior to be controlled
4. Select Procedure and click Add. The Mer- by a predicted time schedule, such as a coming
cury Procedure Edit dialog box opens. snow storm, for more information see How to
Interrupt a Normal Door Schedule on page 190.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
181
24-10832-194 Rev. E
182 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
11. Click the corresponding Item field and 5. Enter a Name to describe the function of
select the name of the terminal, input, or the trigger.
output. 6. Click Public to allow all partitions to see
12. If you wish to add additional actions to the this trigger.
procedure, click Add and repeat the previ- 7. The Query String value is used with mes-
ous steps. sage filtering; see Define Query String Fil-
13. The actions within a procedure are exe- ters on page 225.
cuted in the order they are added. If you 8. Click Enabled to allow the system to per-
wish to change the sequence of the actions, form the trigger.
select the action line and click Up or
Down. 9. Select the Time Zone during which this
trigger is operational. If you select
14. Once you define your actions, click Apply <always enabled>, this trigger is always
or OK to save the Procedure. operational.
Configuring Triggers
Note: If you set the Time Zone to a time zone
Triggers are defined to detect a specific trans- defined as “Never,” the trigger is never opera-
action, such as a time zone or input point tional. If you set the Time Zone to a time zone
change of state, and to invoke a procedure that defined as “8 to 5,” the trigger is only operational
in turn executes a list of actions. from 8:00 to 5:00. Therefore, when triggering on a
time zone going active or inactive, we do not rec-
ommend using the same time zone to make the
To Configure a Trigger trigger operational, as you will miss either the
activation or the deactivation. When triggering on
1. In the System Configuration window, a time zone, we recommend to set the Time Zone
expand Panels to display the panel types. field to <always enabled>.
2. Expand Mercury Panels to display all
Mercury panels configured in the system. 10. Select from the Category drop-down list if
3. Expand the panel that contains the trigger the trigger is to be activated by Access
you wish to configure. Granted transactions, Door Status
(alarm), Door Status (secure), Input
4. Select Trigger and click Add. The Mer- Point changes, or Timezone transitions.
cury Trigger Edit dialog box opens.
11. If you select Access Granted, the Any
Access Grant Type displays by default
indicating that the trigger is to be activated
upon any access grant operation.
If you select Door Status (alarm), select
from the Type drop-down list if the trigger
is activated when the door status is Forced
Open, Forced or Propped Open (only first),
Forced then Propped Open, Propped Open
(always), or Propped Open (only after nor-
mal access cycle).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
183
If you select Door Status (secure), select 14. Select a Group number from 1 to 4. Only
from the Type drop-down list if the trigger actions that belong to this group can be
is activated when the door status is Door triggered.
Closed, Door Opened, Forced Open Can- 15. Click Apply to save the Trigger informa-
celled, Forced or Propped Open Cancelled, tion.
Open Pre-Alarm Only, or Propped Open
Cancelled. In the following example, the procedure pro-
vides access to the cleaning crew. First, the
If you select Input Point, select from the
door alarm is suppressed, the door is unlocked,
Type drop-down list if the trigger is acti-
and the lights turn on. These three actions
vated when the input goes into Alarm,
belong to Group 1.
Fault, or Secure state.
If you select Timezone, select from the The defined trigger specifies that all three
Type drop-down list if the trigger is acti- actions in Group 1 will be triggered when the
vated when the time zone becomes Active selected time zones becomes active.
or Inactive.
You can create another trigger that includes the
12. Select from the Item drop-down list, the defined Group 2 actions, and that will be trig-
name of the door, input point, or time zone gered when the selected time zone becomes
that activates the trigger upon change of inactive.
state.
13. Select the Procedure that contains the
actions that can be activated when the
selected item changes state.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
184 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The Mercury elevator integration is a low level The Mercury elevator control requires that you
interface that allows you to configure one out- configure one physical output for each elevator
put for each floor. If you select floor tracking, floor. If floor tracking is enabled, you must
you must also configure one input for each also configure one physical input for each ele-
floor. vator floor.
Input and output points are selected by picking All input and output points used for an elevator
terminal boards. The start point can be selected must be continuous. That means that if floor 1
on the first board only. Each subsequent board uses output point 1, floor 2 must use output
must start on point one. point 2. Output point 2 cannot be used for any
other purpose.
The Mercury elevator integration supports up
to 128 floors, and each elevator must be To support the desired number of elevator
defined with a minimum of two floors. floors, you may need to chain the points from
one terminal board to the next. You must fol-
User experience varies depending on floor low specific rules when chaining points, which
tracking selection: is done on the Output Board and Input Board
Without floor tracking, elevator users can tabs. Note that the same rules apply to chaining
select more than one floor per access grant. both output and input points.
The system does not keep any records of If you need more output or input points to sup-
what floors were selected. port the number of elevator floors that are on
With floor tracking, elevator users can only the terminal you started with, those extra ter-
select one floor at a time. The system keeps minals are called additional terminals.
records of which floor was selected.
When defining access groups for Mercury ele- Starting the Output Point/Input Point Chain
vators, the readers in the access group are auto-
matically assigned the default timezone of the Any terminal on the panel that has spare
access group. Floor masks are also assigned to points can be used to start the chain.
the default timezone. Before you define the number of the starting
point for the chain, make sure that either
The Mercury elevator integration allows you to enough consecutive points are available to
configure and control one or more Mercury support the number of defined floors or that
elevators at a facility. all of the points to the end of the board are
available.
Before you can configure Mercury elevators,
you must configure the Mercury panels and
terminals that are to be part of the elevator sys-
tem.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
185
Note: A point is considered available if it is cur- Note: The list box displays the floor names as
rently unused or is currently used for the elevator configured in the Floor Name Configuration dia-
you are configuring. log box; see Defining Floor Names on page 197.
To Configure Mercury Elevators 9. The Query String value is used with mes-
sage filtering; see Define Query String Fil-
1. In the System Configuration window, ters on page 225.
expand Panels to display the panel types. 10. Click Floor Tracking to keep track of
2. Expand Mercury Panels to display all floor selection.
Mercury panels configured in the system.
3. Expand the panel for which you wish to
configure the elevator. Note: You must select Floor Tracking to com-
plete the Input Point settings in the Mercury Ele-
4. Select Elevators and click Add. The Mer- vator Floor Configuration dialog box and to
cury Elevator Configuration dialog box access the Mercury Elevator Input Board Selec-
opens. tion.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
186 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
187
Use the Output Board tab to define the chain Use the Input Board tab to define the chain of
of terminals that identify the output points terminals that identify the input points used for
used for the elevator floor. See Output and the elevator floor. See Output and Input Point
Input Point Chain Rules on page 184 for more Chain Rules on page 184 for more informa-
information. tion.
1. In the Mercury Elevator Configuration dia- 1. In the Mercury Elevator Configuration dia-
log box, select the Output Board tab. log box, select the Input Board tab.
2. Click Add to add an output board. The 2. Click Add to add an input board. The Mer-
Mercury Elevator Output Board Configu- cury Elevator Input Board Configuration
ration dialog box opens. dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
188 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To authenticate a user via an entered Card ID 4. If you select Card and PIN Required as the
at a Mercury keypad reader, the following con- Default Reader Mode in the Reader tab of
ditions must be met. the terminal configuration (see Reader Tab
on page 165 for details), you must enter
1. You must define a card format with a your credentials at the keypad reader by
Function value of Magnetic Stripe (even if pressing the * key, enter the Facility Code,
you are using a Wiegand reader). enter the Card ID, press the # key, and
This card format defines how many digits enter the PIN number.
need to be entered for the facility code, and The Facility Code and the Card ID must be
how many digits need to be entered for the filled up with leading zeros to match the
Card ID. If no facility code is entered, the number of digits specified in the format
card format uses a Facility Code value of defined in step 1.
-1. See Card Format Tab on page 154 for
If the PIN has fewer digits than specified in
details.
the General Tab in Site Parameters, the #
2. You must select the Card ID format in the key must be pressed after the PIN is
Card Type tab of the terminal configura- entered (you cannot enter PIN numbers
tion; and must also select the correct Card with leading zeros).
Data Formatting (select Data1 / Data0,
Wiegand Pulses for Wiegand readers; or
select Trim Zero Bits and Format To Nibble Note: A Facility Code may be absent if the card
Array for Magnetic Stripe readers). See format was defined without it.
Card Type Tab on page 169 for details.
It is possible to combine the Card ID for- 5. The Allow PIN before Badge option in the
mat with other badge based formats at the Access tab has no effect in the operation of
same reader; however, some combinations Card ID and PIN. The required sequence is
may not be operational. Contact Technical always as specified in step 4.
Support for instructions if you need to use
a specific combination.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
189
How to Save Data to the Mercury Panel Item: select the name of the time zone that
in the Event of Power Loss activates the trigger upon change of state.
Ensure that all three of the following require- Procedure: select the name of the pro-
ments are met for all Mercury panels: cedure defined in Step. 1.
Group: make appropriate selection.
1. The on-board coin cell is electrically con- This number must match the Group
nected and the isolation strip is removed. number defined in the Procedure.
2. The firmware version is 1.18.7, 1.19, or
In the previous example, the selected terminal
1.22, as displayed in the Panel Details of
unlocks every time the selected time zones
the System Status window.
becomes active or inactive, depending on your
3. The following Auto-Save settings in the selection.
Mercury Configuration Manager are
enabled:
How to Delay the Override of a Reader
Restore from the last saved settings Based on an Active Time Zone until the
Auto Save is enabled First Valid Card is Presented
Delay before save is 30 seconds Use the following procedure to avoid starting
the override when no authorized person is
How to Change Reader Mode Based on present.
Time Zone Change of State
1. Follow the same steps in How to Change
1. Create a Procedure (see page 180 for Reader Mode Based on Time Zone Change
details) that includes the following param- of State and create a second trigger that
eters: includes the following parameters:
Group: make appropriate selection. Time Zone: select the time zone
This number must match the Group defined with an override period.
number selected in the Trigger defined
Category: select Access Granted.
in Step 2.
Type: select the default option Any
Category: select Terminal.
Access Grant. This indicates that the
Type: select Set Reader Mode. trigger will be activated upon any access
Item: make appropriate selection. grant activity.
Value: make appropriate selection (for Item: select the name of the reader that
example, Unlock). will start the override when access was
2. Create a Trigger (see page 182 for details) granted.
that includes the following parameters:
Note: In paired reader mode, the leader reader
Time Zone: select the time zone during controls the access; therefore, the override is
which the trigger is operational. Select only reported on leader readers.
<always enabled>, if this trigger is
always operational. Procedure: select the name of the pro-
Category: select Timezone. cedure.
Type: select if the trigger is activated Group: make appropriate selection.
when the time zone becomes Active or This number must match the Group
Inactive. number defined in the Procedure.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
190 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
191
To Create a Snow Day Procedure Type: select Release to return the time
zone to its normal schedule setting.
1. Create a Procedure (see page 180 for
Item: select the name of the time zone
details) that includes the following param-
that normally overrides the doors.
eters:
Group: select a group number. This
number must match the Group number To Create a Snow Day Start Trigger
selected in the Trigger defined in To
1. Create a Trigger (see page 182 for
Create a Snow Day Start Trigger.
details), that includes the following param-
Category: select Timezone. eters:
Type: select Deactivate to interrupt the Time Zone: select the time zone during
normal door schedule. which the trigger is operational. Select
Item: select the name of the time zone <always enabled>, if this trigger is
that normally overrides the doors. always operational.
2. Click Add to add a second action to the Category: select Timezone.
procedure and that includes the following Type: select Active to indicate that the
parameters: trigger is activated when the time zone
Group: select a group number. This becomes active.
number must match the Group number Item: select the name of the time zone
selected in the Trigger defined in To created for the snow day mode, Snow
Create a Snow Day Stop Trigger. Day Time Zone for example.
Category: select Timezone.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
192 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Procedure: select the name of the pro- Unless the Holiday feature is used to
cedure defined in To Create a Snow Day declare a snow day, it is important to
Procedure. remove any active periods from the snow
Group: select the group number defined day time zone after the condition has
in step 1 of To Create a Snow Day Pro- cleared. Otherwise, seven days later the
cedure. building will go into the different operating
mode again.
Unless the Holiday feature is used to
To Create a Snow Day Stop Trigger
declare a snow day, snow days may be
1. Create a second Trigger with the following scheduled at most one week in advance.
parameters:
Time Zone: select the time zone during What to Do When Relocating a Mercury
which the trigger is operational. Select Panel
<always enabled>, if this trigger is If you install a Mercury panel that was previ-
always operational. ously configured for a different site or location,
Category: select Timezone. you must use the panel’s Bulk Erase Configu-
Type: select Inactive to indicate that the ration Memory function to reset the panel to
trigger is activated when the time zone factory conditions. This prevents the P2000
is no longer active. system from processing transaction messages
that are not applicable to the panel’s current
Item: select the name of the time zone use. Refer to your panel’s hardware installation
created for the snow day mode, Snow manual for details on the Bulk Erase Configu-
Day Time Zone for example.
ration Memory function.
Procedure: select the name of the pro-
cedure defined in To Create a Snow Day
What to Do When Changing an MR51e
Procedure.
IP Address
Group: select the group number defined
in step 2 of To Create a Snow Day Pro- If you change the IP address using the
cedure. P2000 Mercury Terminal Edit application,
the MR51e goes offline. If you change this
field again back to the correct IP address,
Additional Notes you must download all items to the panel
with the Reset Panel Before Download
The interruption of a normal door schedule flag selected to return the MR51e to normal
does not apply to badges with executive operation.
privileges.
If you change the IP address using the MSC
The snow day time zone must take into MR51e Address Configuration Tool before
account P2000 holidays. For example, if changing the IP address using the P2000
Wednesday through Friday are configured Mercury Terminal Edit application, when
to be snow days, and Thursday is a Holiday the MR51e is reset to begin the IP address
of Type 1, that holiday type needs to also be change (using its S2 push button), the
configured as active in the snow day time MR51e goes offline. You must download all
zone. items to the panel with the Reset Panel
Before Download flag selected to return
the MR51e to normal operation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
193
24-10832-194 Rev. E
194 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Note: For each decoding rule, you must also Encoding rule: If PI = 500
add an encoding rule that matches it in reverse Then BN = (PN-10000)
form.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
195
To Test the Badge Format 8. The Save As window opens. Enter the file
name and click Save.
1. To test the format, click Test at the bottom 9. In the P2000 Badge Format window click
of the P2000 Badge Format dialog box. Close.
The Test Format dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
196 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
General Overview
The elevator access control gives you the abil-
ity to assign cardholders access to various ele-
vators and floors in your facility, through their
access groups.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
197
Steps to perform each procedure are presented Executive Privilege – Badges with executive
in the following sections. To successfully privilege enable all floors of the elevator per
implement the elevator access control, config- elevator access grant. Executive privilege does
ure these steps in the order presented. not modify the floor’s granted access when
using PIN codes in Otis Compass elevators.
Basic Definitions
24-10832-194 Rev. E
198 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
199
Low level interface elevators have readers asso- 1. In the System Configuration window,
ciated with a set of output points and an optional expand the CK721-A panel to which you
set of input points. The field panel works with wish to assign an elevator.
the elevator manufacturer’s control system 2. Select Elevators and click Add. The Ele-
using output points to enable car-call buttons, vator Configuration dialog box opens.
and input points to monitor car-call buttons.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
200 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
3. Enter a descriptive Name for this elevator. 10. If the elevator has a Fireman Override
4. Click Public if you wish the elevator to be switch, select an available input point that
visible to all partitions. has not yet been assigned to an elevator or
cabinet. The only purpose of this input
5. The Panel field displays the name of the point is to send messages to the Real Time
panel you selected from the System Con- List; it does not control Fireman Override.
figuration window.
11. If the elevator has a Service Override
6. If you wish, enter a Query String. This switch, select an available input point that
value is used with message filtering (see has not yet been assigned to an elevator or
Define Query String Filters on page 225). cabinet. The only purpose of this input
7. Select an available Reader that has not yet point is to send messages to the Real Time
been assigned to an elevator or cabinet. List; it does not control Service Override.
8. Select from the Protocol drop-down list, 12. Enter in the Access Time field, the time in
Low Level Interface. seconds (2 to 600) that cardholders have to
9. If you enable the D620 Mode option, when press a car-call button after badging at the
a badge is presented at the elevator cab’s elevator. At the time a valid badge is pre-
reader, the panel searches the badge record sented to the elevator reader, the elevator
for floor access information. The floor access time starts. The elevator access time
access information is compared with the starts over with every subsequent presenta-
floor button selection input point. If the tion of a valid badge.
floor button selection input point matches
the floor access information, then the out- Note: At the beginning of the elevator access
put (timed) point for the floor the person time certain floor buttons are enabled by the
should have access to is enabled. It is the panel outputs per elevator access grant. Subse-
elevator control system’s responsibility to quent presentation of other badges therefore may
ensure the elevator does not go to disabled enable more outputs. Only outputs exclusively
enabled by elevator access grants are disabled at
floors.
the end of the elevator access time.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
201
Track On Input Open – Defines the normal Elevator Protocol Maximum Floors
and off-normal states. If enabled, a floor KONE HLI 64
tracking message is generated when the Low Level Interface 128
Otis EMS - Security / BMS 128
floor’s input is open. If disabled, a floor
Otis Compass 128
tracking message is generated when the KONE IP 128
floor’s input is closed. ThyssenKrupp Serial 96
24-10832-194 Rev. E
202 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
203
24-10832-194 Rev. E
204 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
8. The Protocol field displays the elevator The P2000 system provides the communication
protocol selected in the Panel Elevator tab. between the Otis Compass elevator system and
If you wish to define a Low Level Interface CK721-A panels. When a cardholder swipes a
elevator, follow the instructions provided badge, a message is routed to the Otis Compass
on page 199. elevator system for the cardholder. Based on the
operational mode, a default floor and/or a list of
9. Enter in the Access Time field, the time in authorized floors is sent.
seconds (2 to 600) that cardholders have to
press a car-call button after badging at the The Otis Compass interface requires the P2000
elevator. At the time a valid badge is pre- Server to have a dedicated network interface
sented to the elevator reader, the elevator card (NIC) connected to the Otis Compass net-
access time starts. The elevator access time work with an assigned static IP address of
starts over with every subsequent presenta- 192.168.50.250 and a mask of 255.255.255.0
with no default gateway. To configure a perma-
tion of a valid badge.
nent static network route for the Otis system, a
10. Enable Floor Tracking if you wish the static route must also be configured at the
panel to generate a history message identi- P2000 Server by issuing once the following
fying the badge number, cardholder’s command (CMD) during commissioning:
name, elevator, and floor selected when the route add -p 192.168.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0
car-call button is pressed. 192.168.50.254.
11. After you have entered all the information, The Otis system differs from typical elevator
click OK to save your settings and return systems because the floor selection is done
to the System Configuration window. outside of the elevator cab. Access to the floor
entry keypad, called a Destination Entry Com-
Continue with Configuring Floors on page 201 puter (DEC), can be controlled by a reader
to add floors to your elevator definition. connected to a CK721-A panel, if configured
to do so. The Otis system allows operation of
the DECs in four different modes that define
Otis Compass the availability of floors and the order in which
floors and badges are presented to the system.
The Otis Compass interface is a high level
interface that uses a TCP/IP network to send Once a P2000 system is connected to an Otis
elevator commands to the Otis system, and Compass system, the P2000 system is in full
also receives historical information from the control of what each DEC is able to do. This
Otis system. means that until an elevator is defined in the
P2000 system and its access parameters are
configured, no use of the elevator is permitted.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
205
24-10832-194 Rev. E
206 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
207
Continue with Configuring Floors on page 201 7. Select from the Destination Entry Com-
to add floors to your elevator definition. puter drop-down list, the user interface
device number into which the desired floor
is entered. This DEC number is associated
Otis Unsecured Elevator Configuration
with the MRE or DER selected.
Use this section to configure unsecured Otis
Compass elevators. Unsecured elevators are Note: The MRE and DEC combination settings
not associated with readers, input, or output must be unique throughout the system.
points and include floors that users are allowed
to access without any specific access right. 8. Select from the Operational Mode drop-
down list whether this is a Mode 1 or Mode
1. From the System Configuration window, 3 elevator. See Otis Compass Elevator
expand Elevator/Cabinet Parameters to Modes on page 205 for more information.
display the elevator parameters. 9. Click Enable Otis PIN to allow unsecured
2. Select Otis Unsecured Elevators and elevators to accept a PIN code to gain
click Add. The Otis Unsecured Elevator access to a floor.
Configuration dialog box opens. 10. Select from the Report on Terminal
drop-down list, the terminal that is used to
report access grant decisions.
11. Click Add at the bottom of the window.
The Floor Configuration dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
208 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
209
9. If you selected a Primary/Backup KGC 1. In the Group and Floor Configuration box,
controller type, enter the Backup Control- select the group number you wish to define
ler Name and Backup IP Address of the and click Floors. The Kone IP Floor Con-
primary/backup controller. figuration dialog box opens.
10. Click Send COP if you wish the system to 2. The Floor Number column displays the
send COP global default masks messages number of floors configured in Site Param-
to the KONE IP elevator controller. eters.
11. Click Send DOP if you wish the system to 3. The Floor Name column displays the floor
send DOP global default masks messages name assigned to each floor number. See
to the KONE IP elevator controller. Defining Floor Names on page 197.
12. In the Heartbeat Interval field, enter the 4. Enter the floor Level Number as defined
time interval at which heartbeat messages by the KONE equipment.
are sent to the KONE IP elevator control- 5. Select the Elevator Side through which
ler. the selected floor is accessible.
13. Enter the TCP Port number of the KONE 6. Click COP Destination When Connected
IP elevator controller. to specify whether the selected floor is
publicly accessible as a COP destination
Kone IP Group and Floor Configuration when the KONE IP controller is online.
This value is ignored when communicating
The Group and Floor Configuration box at the to KONE KIC controllers.
bottom of the Kone IP Controller Configura-
7. Click COP Destination When Discon-
tion dialog box displays the Group Number of
nected to specify whether the selected
the KONE IP controller and whether the group
floor is publicly accessible as a COP desti-
was defined. You can define up to 33 elevator
nation when the KONE IP controller is
groups for each KONE KIC controller. Pri-
offline. This value is ignored when com-
mary/Backup KGC controllers only support
municating to KONE KIC controllers.
elevator group address number 1 (all other ele-
vator groups are ignored).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
210 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
211
11. Enter the COP Group Address or DOP 20. Click OK to save your KONE IP elevator
Address of the elevator group. This value configuration.
must match the address of the elevator
group controller. If you selected a Primary/
Supporting the KONE IP Remote Call
Backup KGC controller type, the COP
Giving Interface (RCGIF)
Group Address must be set to 1.
12. Enter the COP Elevator Address or DOP The Remote Call Giving Interface (RCGIF)
Level Number of the elevator cab. enables a user to present a valid badge at a
reader mapped to a Destination Operation
13. In the Elevator Floor Management box,
Panel (DOP) and be taken to their configured
click Select Floors. The Select Floors dia-
default floor. In some regions, this functional-
log box open.
ity is known as Swipe-N-Go.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
212 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
213
ThyssenKrupp Serial
The P2000 system provides the communica-
tion between the ThyssenKrupp elevator sys-
tem and CK721-A panels (Version 3.2 and
later). The ThyssenKrupp elevator is com-
3. Enter a descriptive Name for this elevator.
posed of the Lift Control System (LCS) and
the Destination Selection Control (DSC) ter- 4. Click Public if you wish the elevator to be
minal. The P2000 system communicates with visible to all partitions.
CK721-A panels (acting as clients or servers) 5. The Panel field displays the name of the
through a TCP/IP connection. The communi- panel you selected from the System Con-
cation between the CK721-A panel (acting as figuration window.
a server) and the LCS is done over an RS232
6. If you wish, enter a Query String. This
serial interface.
value is used with message filtering (see
When a cardholder swipes a badge at the ele- Define Query String Filters on page 225).
vator reader and access is granted, the P2000 7. Select an available Reader that has not yet
system sends a temporary unlocking of floors been assigned to an elevator or cabinet.
message to the LCS, which contains a bitmask
8. The Protocol field displays the elevator
of all unlocked floors. This information is pre-
protocol selected in the Panel Elevator tab.
sented at the DSC terminal via its touch screen
If you wish to define a Low Level Inter-
panel located inside the elevator cab. After
face elevator, follow the instructions pro-
floor selection, the cardholder is assigned
vided on page 199.
access to the selected floor. Then, the LCS
sends a Destination Call message back to the 9. Enter the Device Number of the DCS ter-
P2000 system after the cardholder makes a minal (from 0 to 255). A value of 255,
valid floor selection at the DSC terminal. This indicates that this device is disabled.
selection gets reported to the Real Time List, if
the Floor Tracking option is set.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
214 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
10. Enter the Shaft Number (from 0 to 31) 1. In the Elevator Configuration dialog box,
that is part of the ThyssenKrupp elevator click Copy at the bottom of the window.
group. 2. The Copy Floor Configuration dialog box
11. Select if the floors in this elevator defini- opens.
tion are accessed through the Front Door
or Rear Door.
12. Enter in the Access Time field, the time in 3. Select the elevator that contains the floor
seconds (2 to 600) that cardholders have to definition you wish to copy.
press a car-call button after badging at the 4. Click OK. All existing floor information is
elevator. At the time a valid badge is pre- replaced with the selected floor configura-
sented to the elevator reader, the elevator tion.
access time starts. The elevator access time
5. You must click OK in the Elevator Config-
starts over with every subsequent presenta-
uration window to save the new floor infor-
tion of a valid badge.
mation.
13. Enable Floor Tracking if you wish the
panel to generate a history message identi-
fying the badge number, cardholder’s Otis EMS Serial
name, elevator, and floor selected when the The Otis Elevator Management System (EMS)
car-call button is pressed. controls up to 8 groups of elevators, with each
14. After you have entered all the information, group consisting of up to 8 elevators. The
click OK to save your settings and return P2000 system provides the communication
to the System Configuration window. between the Otis elevator system and
CK721-A panels (Version 3.2 and later). The
Continue with Configuring Floors on page 201 P2000 system communicates with CK721-A
to add floors to your elevator definition, or see panels (acting as clients or servers) through a
the next section Copying an Existing Floor TCP/IP connection. The communication
Configuration. between the CK721-A panel (acting as a
server) and the Otis system is done over an
Copying an Existing Floor RS232 serial interface.
Configuration
The Otis EMS Serial protocol is very similar to
The ThyssenKrupp Elevator Configuration the Otis EMS - Security / BMS (see page 203),
allows you to copy floor configuration from except that you need to define the Group Num-
other ThyssenKrupp elevators configured ber, Elevator Car Number, and Fire Floor
under the same panel. Number of the Otis EMS Serial elevator.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
215
Otis EMS Serial Elevator Configuration 9. Enter the Otis elevator Group Number
(from 1 to 8).
1. In the System Configuration window,
expand the CK721-A panel to which you 10. Enter the Elevator Car Number (from 1
wish to assign an elevator. to 8) that is part of the Otis elevator group.
2. Select Elevators and click Add. The Ele- 11. Enter the Fire Floor Number (from 1 to
vator Configuration dialog box opens. 64). If there is a fire in the building, the
elevator proceeds to the designated fire
floor and stops with its doors open.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
216 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Defining Floor Groups 6. Click Add at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Group Detail dialog box opens.
Use the Edit Floor Group dialog box to associ-
ate specific groups of floors with physical ele-
vators.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
217
24-10832-194 Rev. E
218 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
8. When you finish configuring door names, 6. From the Available Doors list, click the
click OK to return to the System Configu- door you wish to include in your group.
ration window. 7. Click <<. The door moves to the left side
of the dialog box, to be included in the
Defining Door Masks Selected Doors box.
8. To remove a door from the Selected Doors
You can group doors that have common access
box, select the door and click >>.
throughout your facility and then apply them
as a group to associate them with physical cab- 9. When all doors you wish to include in the
inets when configuring Door Groups. group have been moved to the Selected
Doors box, click OK. A Door Mask icon
1. In the System Configuration window, for the new group is added under the Cabi-
expand Elevator/Cabinet Parameters to net Door Masks root icon in the System
display the cabinet parameters. Configuration window.
2. Select Cabinet Door Masks and click
Add. The Door Mask dialog box opens. Configuring Cabinets
24-10832-194 Rev. E
219
Panel – This field displays the name of the Service Override – If the cabinet has a service
panel you selected from the System Configu- override switch, select an available input point
ration window. that has not yet been assigned to an elevator or
cabinet. The only purpose of this input point is
Query String – This value is used with message to send messages to the Real Time List; it does
filtering (see Define Query String Filters on not control Service Override.
page 225).
Door Tracking – If enabled, the panel generates
Reader – Select an available reader that has not a history message identifying the badge num-
yet been assigned to an elevator or cabinet. ber, cabinet, and door selected when an
Emergency Override – If the cabinet has an enabled door is opened.
emergency override switch, select an available Report Alarm – If enabled, an alarm is reported
input point that has not yet been assigned to an when a door, that has not been enabled, is
elevator or cabinet. The only purpose of this opened; or when an enabled door remains
input point is to send messages to the Real opened for longer than the time set in the
Time List; it does not control Emergency Alarm Suppression Time.
Override.
Access Time – Enter the amount of time in sec-
onds (2 to 600) that cardholders have to open a
door after badging at the cabinet.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
220 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
The Door Information box at the bottom of the Use the Edit Door Group dialog box to associ-
Cabinet Configuration dialog box displays the ated specific groups of doors with physical
associated doors active for access. Follow the cabinets.
next steps to add individual doors to this cabi-
net. 1. In the System Configuration window,
expand Elevator/Cabinet Parameters to
1. In the Cabinet Configuration dialog box, display the cabinet parameters.
click Add at the bottom of the window. 2. Select Cabinet Door Groups and click
The Door Configuration dialog box opens. Add. The Edit Door Group dialog box
opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
221
Do
Is this Is this operator’s
No No No
a Public a remote local partition
message? message? rights allow
7. Select a Cabinet name, previously config- access?
Doors
Yes
Access groups are described under Create
Access Groups on page 232. See this section
Does
for detailed information. workstation or
forwarded work- No
station’s message
filter group allow
Configure Message access?
Routing transmitted
Message is
transmitted
Message Filtering and Routing configuration
allows you to transmit and receive specific
messages to and from specific local or remote
P2000 systems, thereby reducing network traf- Basic Principles and Definitions
fic by transmitting and receiving only mes-
sages that pass filter criteria. The Remote Mes- P2000 Site – Uniquely identified by its Local
sage Server (RMS) maintains central control Site name. A P2000 site can have multiple
over all message routing and transmits mes- locations but only one P2000 server.
sages only to P2000 servers or workstations
P2000 Location – A physical location or place
that the RMS assumes are able and willing to
with a P2000 workstation or panel.
receive the message.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
222 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
P2000 Server – A single server that communi- Message Routing – Allows the system to route
cates with the panels for that site. Typically, it a sub-set of messages to a remote P2000 sys-
is also the database server for that site, but it is tem.
possible for another computer to act as the
database server for performance reasons. Remote Message Service (RMS) – P2000 ser-
vice that receives messages from the local RTL
P2000 Workstation – A single computer that is Route Service and transmits these messages to
connected to one P2000 server and is used to the remote P2000 Remote Message Service.
run the P2000 software. When receiving a remote message, the local
Remote Message Service processes the mes-
P2000 System – A P2000 system is defined by sage and passes it on to the local RTL Route
what is controlled by the P2000 server. A Service for distribution to the local worksta-
P2000 system has no relationship to geogra- tions.
phy, so a single P2000 system can and often
contains multiple facilities in multiple loca-
tions. Sequence of Steps
Local P2000 Server/Workstations – A P2000 The basic procedures for defining and imple-
server or P2000 workstations are local to each menting message filtering and routing are:
other, if they are part of the same P2000 sys-
tem. Define Message Filtering
Create Message Filter Groups
P2000 Remote Server – A P2000 server that
Configure P2000 Remote Servers
controls a different P2000 system to the one
where the transaction was originated. The Assign message filter groups to worksta-
P2000 Remote Server is the recipient of a for- tions (see page 20), operators (see page 24),
warded transaction and has no knowledge of and remote servers (see page 231).
the access control hardware and system infor- Define Remote Message Service settings in
mation related to the originating P2000 sys- Site Parameters; see RMS Tab on page 43.
tem.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
223
You can, for instance, filter messages to send a 3. If you use Partitioning, select the Partition
specific group to one workstation and a differ- that has access to this Message Filter.
ent group to another. By using message filters 4. If you use Partitioning, click Public to
you may for example, limit the alarm mes- allow all partitions to see this Message Fil-
sages sent to workstations located in Building ter.
A to only those alarms originating in Building
A, and do the same for Building B. For a com- 5. Enter a descriptive Name for this Message
plete list of all available message types and Filter.
associated sub-types, see Appendix B: Mes- 6. See the following sections to define mes-
sage Types and Sub-Types. sage types, filters, and ranges.
Note: All messages are sent by default to the Note: The length of all filter strings entered in
local Server at all times, therefore this feature each Selected List is limited to approximately
cannot be used at the Server. 1000 characters.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
224 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
225
5. To delete a remote site name or filter string You may enter a filter string to specify
from the list, select the name and click more than one Partition Name, for example
Delete. enter Main* to add Partition Names such
6. Once the Site Names are selected, click as Main Office - Atlanta and Main Office -
Include in the Selected List box to accept New York.
messages associated with the Site Names. 4. To edit a remote partition name or filter
7. To reject all messages associated with the string, select the name, make the change,
Site Names selected, click Exclude. then click Update.
5. To delete a remote partition name or filter
string from the list, select the name and
Define Partition Name Filters
click Delete.
The system either accepts or rejects messages 6. Once the Partition Names are selected,
associated with the Partition Names selected in click Include in the Selected List box to
this tab. The Available List displays all parti- accept messages associated with the Parti-
tion names within the local system, including tion Names.
any Remote Partitions entered in the Edit
7. To reject all messages associated with the
Operator dialog box.
Partition Names selected, click Exclude.
8. If the Message passes filter criteria, if
message has no filter value check box is
enabled, the message meets the filter crite-
ria even if there is no filter value. Do not
select the check box to stop the message
from passing the filter criteria if there is no
filter value.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
226 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
227
24-10832-194 Rev. E
228 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
7. Once the Alarm Escalation Ranges are 3. To add remote operator names to the
selected, click Include in the Alarm Esca- Selected List, enter the name in the Opera-
lation Range list box to accept messages tor Name field and click Add.
that have an alarm escalation value within If the Operator Name changes either at the
the range selected. local site or at the remote site, you must
8. To reject all messages that have an alarm re-select the name from the Available List
escalation value within the range selected, or re-enter the new name in the Operator
click Exclude. Name field.
9. If the Message passes filter criteria, if You may enter a filter string to specify
message has no filter value check box is more than one Operator Name.
enabled, the message meets the filter crite-
4. To edit a remote operator name or filter
ria even if there is no filter value. Do not
string, select the name, make the change,
select the check box to stop the message
then click Update.
from passing the filter criteria if there is no
filter value. 5. To delete a remote operator name or filter
string from the list, select the name and
click Delete.
Define Operator Name Filters
6. Once the Operator Names are selected,
Use this tab to accept or reject messages asso- click Include in the Selected List box to
ciated with the operator names selected here. accept messages associated with the Oper-
For example, you can limit the number of ator Names.
operators who respond to alarm messages gen- 7. To reject all messages associated with the
erated at your local site. The Available List dis- Operator Names selected, click Exclude.
plays the names of all the operators within the
local system. 8. If the Message passes filter criteria, if
message has no filter value check box is
enabled, the message meets the filter crite-
ria even if there is no filter value. Do not
select the check box to stop the message
from passing the filter criteria if there is no
filter value.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
229
24-10832-194 Rev. E
230 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
6. Click <<. The message filter moves to the To Create a P2000 Remote Server
left side of the dialog box, to be included in
the Selected box. 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
fig>System. Enter your password if
prompted. The System Configuration win-
Note: The Selected box displays auto-added dow opens.
next to a Message Filter that was automatically
added using a Host Event. 2. Select Remote Server and click Add. The
P2000 Remote Server dialog box opens at
7. To remove a message filter from the the General tab.
Selected box, select the message filter and 3. Fill in the information on each tab accord-
click >>. ing to the following P2000 Remote Server
8. When all message filters you wish to Field Definitions.
include in the group have been moved to 4. As you work through the tabs, you may
the Selected box, click OK. A Message click Apply at any time to save your
Filter Group icon for the new group is entries.
added under the Message Filter Groups 5. After you have entered all the information,
icon in the System Configuration window. click OK to save the settings and return to
the System Configuration window.
Message Routing
Message routing allows the transfer of alarm Note: Any change made to the P2000 Remote
Server settings only takes effect after you restart
and transaction messages between P2000 Serv-
the P2000 Remote Message Service; see Start-
ers located at different P2000 Sites. Message ing and Stopping Service Control on page 432.
routing is processed by the Alarm Monitor (see
Monitoring Remote Alarms on page 272) and
the Real Time List application (see Monitoring P2000 Remote Server Field Definitions
Remote Messages in Real Time on page 342).
General Tab
Note: Before you configure any P2000 Remote
Servers, verify your settings in the RMS Tab of Use this tab to define general descriptive infor-
Site Parameters (page 43), to make sure your mation of the P2000 remote servers that are
system is ready to process remote messages.
allowed to receive or transmit messages to
other servers.
Configure P2000 Remote Servers
24-10832-194 Rev. E
231
24-10832-194 Rev. E
232 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Maximum Duration – Enter the maximum dura- If your system is configured to operate eleva-
tion in seconds that a session is kept open. tors and cabinets, elevators floors and cabinet
doors can also be assigned to control which
Timeout Period for Session End Message – floors and doors a cardholder can access.
Enter the number of seconds that the session
waits without receiving a message, until it
declares the session closed.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
233
Once access groups are created, they are avail- 5. Select the Default Timezone during which
able for assignment in the applications that use all terminals (Mercury only) included in
access groups. You can assign up to 32 access this access group are active. To assign dif-
groups to a badge (depending on the parame- ferent time zones to the Mercury terminals
ters selected in Site Parameters; see Number in this access group, click the Details tab
of Access Groups in the Badge Tab on and follow the instructions provided in
page 37). In addition, you can also define per- step 14.
sonalized access groups for each individual
cardholder. (See Personalized Access Groups
on page 258). Note: The Details tab is only available if you
select the Terminals associated with Timezone
option in the Edit Site Parameters dialog box.
To Create an Access Group
6. If this is a partitioned system, select the
1. In the System Configuration window, Partition name in which the items for this
select Access Groups. access group reside.
2. Click Add. The Access Group Edit dialog 7. Click Public if you wish this Access
box opens at the General tab. Group to be visible to other partitions.
3. Enter a descriptive Name for the Access 8. From the list of Available Terminals list
Group. at the far right of the dialog box, select the
4. Click Enable for the system to recognize terminal to include in the Access Group.
this access group. If at any time you wish 9. Click << to move the terminal into the
to temporarily disable access to any of the Terminals box.
items in this group, without having to
delete the access group, click to clear this 10. From the Available Terminal Groups list,
box. select the Terminal Group to include in the
Access Group.
11. Click << to move it into the Terminals
Groups box.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
234 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
12. To add elevator floors to the Access Group, You can also create access templates to speed
click the Elevator tab and select from the cardholder and badge data entry, as well as cre-
Available Floor Groups list, the Floor ate badge purposes to specify the badge’s
Group to include in the Access Group. intention. Complete instructions are presented
13. To add cabinet doors to the Access Group, in the following sections:
click the Cabinet tab and select from the Define Companies and Departments
Available Door Groups list, the Door
Create Access Templates
Group to include in the Access Group.
Create Badge Formats
14. If you wish to assign a different time zone
to the any of the Mercury terminals Create Badge Purposes
selected in this access group, click the Create Badge Reasons
Details tab, double click the time zone Create Required Cardholder Fields
name you wish to change, and select a new
Create User Defined Fields
time zone from the drop-down list.
Define Automatic Employee IDs
Entering Cardholders
Note: The Details tab displays Mercury termi-
nals that are defined in the General tab, and also
Define Companies and Departments
Mercury terminals that are assigned to elevators
included in the Floor Groups defined in the Eleva- If your facility includes Company and Depart-
tor tab.
ment as part of Cardholder definition, you
must first configure Companies and Depart-
15. Click OK. The new access group displays ments from the Config>Cardholder Options
under the root Access Groups icon. When menu. The company and department names are
you click on the new Access Group icon, the then available for assignment to cardholders in
parameters display on the right window- the Cardholder Edit dialog box.
pane of the System Configuration window.
To Define a Company
Define Cardholder Options
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
At a minimum, a first and last name must be fig>Cardholder Options>Company. The
entered into the Cardholder database for each Company dialog box opens.
person who needs access to your facility. Card-
holder data entry is typically performed as part
of system operation, which is described in
detail in Chapter 3: Operating the System.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
235
To Define a Department
6. Click Done. This department name is now
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- accessible from the Cardholder Edit dialog
fig>Cardholder Options>Department. box.
The Department dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
236 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
Badge Box
2. Click Add. The Access Template Edit dia- Facility Code – Select the type of facility code
log box opens. to be assigned to this Access Template. Facility
codes identify the cards that belong to your
particular site.
Options Box
24-10832-194 Rev. E
237
24-10832-194 Rev. E
238 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
6. Select the Technology type. 2. Click Add. The Edit Badge Purpose dialog
7. Enter the total number of Bits expected to box opens.
be returned from the reader when the badge
is read.
8. Select a Qualifier number. The number
selected represents a 32-bit numerical
value that allows differentiating formats
with the same technology and the same
number of bits. The default value is 1.
9. Click OK. 3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
Partition to which this badge purpose field
10. Click Done.
belongs and click Public if you wish this
purpose field to be visible to all partitions.
Create Badge Purposes 4. Enter the Name of the badge purpose.
Users can assign a purpose to a badge for 5. Click OK. The new badge purpose field
example, to specify the badge’s intention. The displays in the Badge Purpose dialog box.
Purpose field can be used for different applica-
tions. For example, an airport employee may
have multiple badges, one for each airline ter-
minal the employee is allowed to access. The
Purpose field for each badge could be used to
identify the airline where the badge is valid.
Use the Badge Purpose tool to create the differ-
ent Purpose field values that can be available
for assignment in the Badge dialog box.
To Create Badge Purpose Fields 6. Click Done. This purpose field is now
available from the Badge dialog box.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
fig>Cardholder Options>Badge Pur-
pose. The Badge Purpose dialog box Create Badge Reasons
opens.
The P2000 system provides a list of predefined
badges reasons that are used to indicate why a
badge is being issued. This application allows
you to define new badge reasons or modify
existing ones according to your facility needs,
and then assign these reasons to badge records
for filtering and reporting purposes.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
239
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
fig>Cardholder Options>Badge Reason. fig>Cardholder Options>Required
The Badge Reason dialog box opens. Fields. The Cardholder Required Fields
dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
240 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
To Create User Defined Fields 7. Select from the Type drop-down list, the
format in which the data is to be displayed.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- Select either Text, Numeric, Boolean (tog-
fig>Cardholder Options>User Defined gle field), Date or Selection. The Selection
Fields. The User Defined Fields dialog box type allows you to define set values to
opens. choose from a drop-down list.
3. If this is a partitioned system, the partition 12. To delete a user defined field, select the
name displays in the Partition field. field from the list and click Delete. A mes-
sage displays if there are cardholders with
4. If this is a partitioned system, click Public values entered in this field. Click Yes to
if you wish to make this field visible to all continue. When the Delete User Defined
partitions. field dialog box opens, click Yes to delete
5. Enter the Name you wish to display as the the field.
field title. Names can contain alphanu- 13. To add choices to Selection type fields,
meric characters, symbols, spaces or select the field from the list and click
underlines. Choices. The Choices dialog box opens
6. Click Hide from MIS if you do not wish to displaying the name of the UDF and the
display this field in the MIS Interface current number of choices.
tables.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
241
24-10832-194 Rev. E
242 CHAPTER 2
Configuring the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
243
T
his section describes procedures typi- Provide Access to
cally performed by operators of the
P2000 Security Management System,
Cardholders and Visitors
assuming all system configuration has
been completed. If you have not completed Access privileges define which cardholder or
Chapter 2: Configuring the System, some of visitor may enter a specific area of the facility,
the functions described here may not be ready and at what time they may enter. Access privi-
to operate. leges are assigned to individual reader termi-
nals or group of reader terminals; these devices
Operations typically performed as part of sys-
are assigned to specific access groups, and then
tem maintenance, such as downloading data,
when cardholder records are added to the data-
updating software and panels, starting and
base, the cardholders are assigned to the access
stopping service control, and reviewing system
groups.
and workstation status; are typically performed
by a system administrator and are described in The Access feature provides flexible tools to
Chapter 5: System Maintenance. create cardholder records and assign badges
with which to grant or deny facility access. At
The following sections describe how to:
a minimum, a first and last name must be
Provide Access to Cardholders and Visitors entered into the Cardholder database for each
Monitor Alarms person who needs to have access to your facil-
ity. Additional cardholder information can
Perform Operator Controls include personal information such as address
Control Areas and Muster Zones and phone; company information such as a
Detect and Control Intrusion company name and department; a Photo ID;
Track Hours On Site and any additional information such as eye
color, height, weight, or other information you
Create Events can define in User Defined Fields.
Monitor the System in Real Time
MIS Interface: Cardholder
IMPORTANT: All configuration steps outlined information can be added,
in Chapter 2: Configuring the System, must be deleted, or updated from a
completed before you can program and use the APPLICATION NOTE
database outside the P2000
essential functions described in this section and software using the MIS Inter-
some system features require specific configura- face; see page 365 for more information. MIS is a
tion settings before others can be enabled. These low-level interface that requires programming to
are described in the appropriate sections that fol- implement.
low.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
244 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
The procedures are presented in the following A cardholder may have several different
sections: badges; however, each access badge must have
a unique number.
Entering Cardholder Information
Entering Badge Information
Viewing Cardholder Information
Entering Visitor Information
Defining Automatic Badge Numbers 1. Select Access>Cardholder from the
P2000 Main menu to open the Cardholder
Synchronizing Badge Status
window.
Recalling Images
2. To view current cardholder information,
select a Type from the drop-down list at
Entering Cardholder Information the right side of the window (All, Regular,
or Visitor).
Every person who needs access to the facility
must have a Cardholder and Badge record
entered into the P2000 system. Cardholders
can be entered all at once at system startup, Note: The system displays up to 20,000 card-
and then added, edited, or removed as neces- holders at a time, for the partition selected in the
Partition field. If the number of cardholders in
sary thereafter. Permanent cardholders and vis-
your system exceeds 20,000, you must use the
itor cardholders are viewed and added in the Search feature, described in To Search for Spe-
same Cardholder window. cific Cardholders on page 250.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
245
Regular – These are the permanent cardholders 1. From the Cardholder window, click Add.
in the system. Their access begins with a start The Cardholder dialog box opens at the
date, but unless terminated or temporarily Cardholder Edit tab.
reassigned, no end date is specified. Select
Regular from the Cardholder window Type
drop-down list to view only the regular card-
holders.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
246 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
ID – This field displays the ID number that was End – This is the date and time that all badges
automatically assigned from the Automatic assigned to this cardholder are voided. Select
Employee ID pool numbers. Depending on the check box and click the down arrow to
your settings, this field may allow editing. See select an end date from the system calendar.
Define Automatic Employee IDs on page 241.
Note: The system automatically voids all
badges on the date specified, and the status of all
Note: We recommend using the ID field on
badges changes to Inactive.
Enterprise systems to prevent duplicate records.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
247
Enterprise
Sponsor
24-10832-194 Rev. E
248 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
You can define different image resolution and To Enter Journal Entries
sizes, depending on your facility’s preferences;
however, you should remember these simple 1. Select a cardholder from the Cardholder
rules: list.
2. Click Journal in the Image tab located in
Keep the image resolution as small as nec- the middle of the Cardholder window. The
essary, while maintaining the desired clarity Journal dialog box opens displaying the
of the image, as this correlates directly with journal entries associated with the card-
file size. holder, together with the date and time
960 x 1280 resolutions for JPG files, on a when the journal was entered, the name of
medium-small system are recommended. the operator who last edited the journal, the
Use compressed formats, such as JPG files date and time the journal was last edited,
to reduce file sizes, as opposed to uncom- and whether there is an attachment file
pressed formats, such as BMP files, for the associated with the journal entry.
same resolution.
The smaller the file size, the smaller the
impact on SQL Server performance for the
P2000 system, including SQL-based inte-
grations, such as MIS Interface. Large file
sizes take up equivalent space on the data-
base server, and accordingly require equiva-
lent processing to query the data when you
use P2000 features, such as Badge Image
Recall or P2000 API/Integrations, such as
MIS Interface.
3. Click Add. The Journal Edit dialog box
Note: If your imported image displays cropped opens.
on the screen, you may need to contact Technical
Support if you wish to change the image aspect
ratio.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
249
4. Enter a descriptive Title to identify the 16. To delete a note, select the note from the
subject of this note. list and click Delete. You are prompted for
5. Click in the text area and enter the details verification.
of the note. 17. When you finish with the Journal entries,
6. If you want to add additional information click Exit. The Journal button displays the
to the note, click Import and navigate to number of notes associated with the card-
the directory that contains the text file you holder.
want to include. Select the file and click
Open. The text file displays in the text User Defined Fields
area.
After you create User Defined Fields (see
7. If you wish to save the note as a text file,
page 239), use the UDF tab in the Cardholder
click Export and navigate to the directory
dialog box to enter additional cardholder infor-
where the exported notes are stored. Enter
mation. The number of UDF tabs displayed
a file name and click Save.
depends on the number of UDF fields created.
8. If you wish to attach a file to the journal Select additional UDF tabs and enter the data
entry, click Attach and navigate to the as needed.
directory that contains the file you wish to
attach. Select the file and click Open.
9. If you do not wish to use the attachment Note: The UDF tab displays only the user
file, select the file and click Detach. The defined fields that were assigned to the operator.
attachment file is removed from the list. See Concealed UDFs Tab on page 27 for details.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
250 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
251
5. If you wish to clear the existing search cri- To Enter Badge Information
teria, click Clear.
1. In the Cardholder window, select a card-
6. After you define the search criteria, click holder from the Cardholder list.
one of the following:
2. In the Badge Information box at the bot-
Exact Match – to display an exact match to tom of the Cardholder window, click Add.
your search criteria. The Badge dialog box opens.
Partial Match – to display all possible selec-
tions that match the initial characters of the
search criteria; for example, if you enter
Carl in the First Name field, the list box
displays names such as Carla, Carlos, Carl-
ton, and so on.
7. The Cardholder window opens showing
the number of cardholders and the match
specified in the search criteria.
Search Criteria
24-10832-194 Rev. E
252 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
253
24-10832-194 Rev. E
254 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
255
Additional Card Use Limit Notes Otis Compass Elevator Options Tab
The card Use Limit of a badge applies to a Use this tab to define parameters for cardhold-
site. In an enterprise system, a badge may ers that need access to Otis Compass elevators,
have a different card Use Limit on each see Otis Compass on page 204 for more infor-
site. mation.
The P2000 system sets the Use Limit of a
badge to zero as soon as it learns that the
badge’s Uses Left counter has reached zero
on any Mercury panel. It will then apply
this new Use Limit of zero to all Mercury
panels that have the badge, along with the
instructions to reinitialize the Uses Left
counter to this zero value. This effectively
prevents the badge from being granted
access at all Mercury readers that enforce Floor Mask – For Otis Compass elevators that
the card Use Limit feature. are configured for PIN entry, select the floor
The Uses Left counter for each badge is mask that contains the floors that this badge is
kept on a per panel basis. This means, that able to gain access to when they enter a PIN
the system wide maximum number of uses code at the elevator.
may be higher, and that the Uses Left
Floor – Select the default floor for the user.
counter may have reached zero on one
When the badge is swiped, depending on the
panel, but still is positive on another panel.
operational mode of the elevator that is being
Rebooting a Mercury panel or performing a used, that badge’s default floor is used to dis-
Reset Panel Before Download restores the patch an elevator, assuming the default floor is
Uses Left counter to the value defined in an authorized or an allowed floor.
the Use Limit.
Passenger Type – Select the passenger types
that identify special conditions that can be
Access Rights Tab
assigned to a cardholder. When the badge is
Use this tab to define the Access Groups and presented, a message is sent to the Otis Com-
corresponding Time Zones that can be pass elevator system to dispatch a specific ele-
assigned to this badge. The number of groups vator car that the cardholder can board.
displayed here depends on the parameters
Standard – Select for cardholders that do
selected in the Site Parameters dialog box (see
not require special access. This is the
Number of Access Groups in the Badge Tab
default selection for all badges.
on page 37). See Badge Access Rights on
page 97 for details associated with OSI panels. Disability – Select for cardholders that
Also, see To Define Access Rights on require special elevator accommodations;
page 256 for complete instructions. for example, bigger elevator cars, extended
time to board the elevator, or audible
announcements at each floor.
A cardholder can be assigned with a Standard
or a Disability flag, in addition to any of the
following conditions:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
256 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
257
Whether or not you can define access 3. If you wish to modify the settings in the
groups and time zones, and assign the selected Access Group, click the [...] but-
access rights to a badge is determined by ton to open the Access Group Edit dialog
the following conditions: box. Make your changes and click OK to
Operators that belong to the Super User return to the Access Rights Definition dia-
partition can define access groups/time log box.
zones and assign the access rights to any 4. In the Time Zone field, select a time zone
badge. to be assigned to the selected Access
Operators that belong to, for example Group. If the Access Group selected
Partition A, can define access includes Mercury terminals, the system
groups/time zones and assign the access uses the default time zone defined for each
rights to any badge in Partition A. Mercury terminal, regardless of the time
zone selected here. See page 233 for
If the Access Rights tab shows three or
details on creating access groups.
more access groups/time zone entries
already defined, operators that belong to 5. If you wish to define a Temporary Access
Partition A cannot edit the first two Period for the selected Access Group,
rows but can edit the third row and select the check box and use the
beyond on the Access Rights tab for drop-down lists to select the Start date and
access rights of a badge in Partition B. time when permission for access is
granted. If the check box is not selected,
If the Access Rights tab shows less than
access is allowed immediately.
three access groups/time zone entries,
operators that belong to Partition A can-
not edit the first row but can edit the
second row on the access Rights tabs for Note: For example, if the reader doors
included in the Access Group normally grant
access rights of a badge in Partition B.
access from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., you can set
When you select the line item you wish to up temporary access on a selected date and time
define, the Access Rights Definition dialog period that can grant the cardholder permission
box opens. for limited access within the normal time zone.
This feature is performed by the Smart Download
service and therefore, you can use it only when
Smart Download is running; see P2000 Services
Definitions on page 429. This feature only works
on terminals running in Local mode.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
258 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
259
24-10832-194 Rev. E
260 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Partial Match – to display all possible selec- Delete Access Group – to remove from the
tions that match the initial characters of the selected badges access to all terminals
search criteria; for example, if you enter defined in the access group. Select the
Carl in the First Name field, the list box Access Group to remove.
displays names such as Carla, Carlos, Carl-
Delete Badge – to delete all badges in the
ton, and so on. list box.
7. Once the list box displays the cardholders
Delete Badge and Cardholder – to delete all
specified in the search criteria, select from
badges and associated cardholders in the
the Action drop-down list one of the fol-
list box.
lowing options:
Add Access Group – to assign all badges in
the list box with access to all terminals Note: If a cardholder owns more than one
defined in the access group. Select the badge, and that badge is not included in the list
Access Group and Timezone to be box, the cardholder record is not deleted.
assigned to the selected badges. The access
group is added to the first available slot on Disable Badge – to disable all badges in the
the badges. list box.
Apply Access Template – to apply all preset Replace Access Group – to replace the
access privileges, badge options, access existing access group. Select from the New
groups, and time zones that were defined in Access Group drop-down list the access
the access template. Select from the Access group you wish to assign. Select from the
Template drop-down list, the Access Tem- Old Access Group, the access group you
plate to be applied to the selected badges. wish to replace. The original timezone for
the access group does not change.
8. If you wish to print the data in the list box,
Note: You cannot apply Facility Code settings
using the Bulk Badge Change function. click Print.
9. Click Apply to change the selected badge
Change Badge Format – to change the for- records.
mat of all badges in the list box. Select the 10. Click Done to close Bulk Badge Change.
New Badge Format to be applied to the
selected badges.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
261
Entering Visitor Information 4. If you wish to save and print the badge,
click Save and Print (requires the Video
The Add Visitor function introduces an easier Imaging application).
and faster way to enter visitor and badge infor-
5. If you wish to enter additional visitors,
mation, by allowing authorized operators to
click Clear, then enter the information
enter visitor and badge data using a single user
according to the Add Visitor Field Defini-
interface. Before a visitor’s arrival, the opera-
tions.
tor enters the appropriate visitor data into the
system, assigns a visitor sponsor, enters the 6. Click Exit to close the Add Visitor dialog
date and time period of the scheduled visit, and box.
assigns access privileges using Access Tem-
plates. Subsequently and from the same
Add Visitor Field Definitions
screen, the visitor badge is printed.
Visitor Box
To Enter Visitor Information
First – Enter the first name of the visitor.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select
Access>Add Visitor. The Add Visitor dia- Middle – Enter the middle name of the visitor.
log box opens.
Last – Enter the last name of the visitor.
2. See Add Visitor Field Definitions for
detailed information. ID – Enter a unique ID for this visitor (up to 25
3. After you enter all the information, click characters).
Save to save the visitor and badge infor-
mation. The new visitor data is also
reflected in the Cardholder window.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
262 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Note: The Add Visitor application creates four First – Displays the first name of the person
UDFs: Approved Visits, Most Recent Visit, who sponsors this visitor.
Second Most Recent Visit, and Third Most
Recent Visit. These UDFs are automatically Middle – Displays the middle name of the per-
updated and allow you to monitor the visits asso- son who sponsors this visitor.
ciated with the selected visitor.
Last – Displays the last name of the person
Search – If the visitor information already who sponsors this visitor.
exists in the database, you may search the data- ID – Displays the unique ID assigned to the
base by entering a value in any of the Visitor sponsor (up to 25 characters).
fields and then clicking Search. The Find Visi-
tor dialog box opens displaying the visitor Company – Displays the sponsor’s Company
records that match the entered values. You may name.
also click Search without entering any values
to display all visitors in the database. To search Partition – Displays the partition assigned to
for specific names in the Find Visitor dialog the sponsor.
box, enter the data in any of the fields. You can
use wildcards such as “?” to replace one char-
acter (including a space), or “*” to replace
more than one character.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
263
Search – Click this button to find a Sponsor in Auto – If your facility is set up to use the Auto-
the database. The Find Sponsor dialog box Badge Management feature (see page 264),
opens. When you enter a value in any of the click Auto to insert the next available badge
fields, the list box displays the sponsor records number in the Number field.
that match the entered values. If no value was
entered, all cardholders in the database display. Issue – Enter an issue level per badge number.
To search for specific names, enter the data in If a visitor loses a badge, give the next avail-
any of the fields. You can use wildcards such able issue level and retain the same badge
as “?” to replace one character (including a number. The number of badge issue levels sup-
space), or “*” to replace more than one charac- ported depends on the panel type you use; see
ter. Max Issue Level in the Badge Tab on page 37.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
264 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
265
9. Click OK to return to the AutoBadge If, for example, they follow another cardholder
Number Management dialog box. The list out without swiping their badge, their badge
box displays the pool of numbers defined remains in the In state (out-of-sync). When
for the selected partition, together with the they attempt to badge back into the area, they
Status of each number and the Modifica- are denied access. You can manually adjust the
tion Date when the entry was created or state of a badge to return it to the correct state.
last modified. You can also reconfigure this badge as Unde-
When you assign numbers from this pool, fined to clear the Entry/Exit status until the
the Status column displays one of the fol- next badging.
lowing:
Available – this number can be assigned to Note: For Entry/Exit to work, all Entry and all
a badge. Exit terminals must either run in Central mode, or
they must all be defined on the same panel and
Reserved – this number has already been run in Local mode.
assigned, but a badge has not yet been
issued.
In Use – this number is currently in use and To Resync Badges
cannot be assigned to another badge. 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select
10. To change the status of a badge number Access>Badge Resync. The Badge
from Available to In Use, click Set In-use. Resync dialog box opens.
11. To change the status of a badge number
from In Use to Available, click Set Avail-
able.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
266 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Last Badging Terminal – to resync the status 7. Enter the information on any or all of the
of all badges last presented at the selected fields to search for specific cardholders.
terminal. 8. If you wish to search by Company and
Last Badging Terminal Group – to resync Department, select a previously defined
the status of all badges last presented at all name from the drop-down list.
terminals in the selected terminal group. 9. You can also search by UDF. Select any of
the previously defined UDFs from the
drop-down list (Date type UDFs cannot be
Note: The Last Badging Terminal and Last included in the search). Then enter or
Badging Terminal Group options are used, for select the UDF search criteria in the associ-
example, to quickly reset the status of all badges ated field.
after a mustering event or reset the status of
badges in situations when cardholders badged in 10. If you wish to clear the existing search cri-
at an entry terminal and they were unable to teria, click Clear.
badge out at an exit terminal because the exit ter-
11. After you define the search criteria, click
minal was down.
one of the following buttons:
Exact Match – to display an exact match to
4. If you selected Last Badging Terminal or
your search criteria.
Last Badging Terminal Group, select a
terminal or terminal group from the list and Partial Match – to display all possible selec-
continue with step 16. tions that match the initial characters of the
5. If you selected Cardholders, select the search criteria; for example, if you enter
Type of cardholder (Regular, Visitor, or Carl in the First Name field, the list box
<all>) that you wish to display in the list displays names such as Carla, Carlos, Carl-
box. ton, and so on.
6. If you wish to display specific cardholders 12. The list box in the Badge Resync dialog
(within the type selected), click Search. box opens displaying the cardholders spec-
The Database Search dialog box opens. ified in the search criteria.
13. If you wish to display all cardholders again
(within the type selected), click All.
14. After you define the cardholders you wish
to display in the list box, select a card-
holder name from the list.
15. The badge number and status of all badges
assigned to this cardholder display in the
Badges list. Select the badge or badges to
be resync.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
267
Recalling Images
If the Image Recall window is open on the
workstation, any badging (for the partition
selected in Image Recall Filters) displays the
cardholder’s image and information. An oper-
ator with proper menu permissions can define
access conditions and other filter criteria
(transactions set up in the Image Recall Filter 3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
Edit dialog box, such as an Access Grant or Partition in which this image recall filter
any invalid transaction), to determine if an is active.
image displays in the Image Recall window.
4. Click Public if you wish this image recall
filter to be visible to all partitions.
Image Recall Filters 5. Enter a descriptive Name for the image
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select recall filter.
Access>Image Recall Filters. The Image 6. From the Type to Display box, select the
Recall Filters dialog box opens. transactions that you wish to monitor. You
do not need to select all conditions. If you
select Any Deny, all other filtering condi-
tions are dimmed, except Access Grant and
Duress.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
268 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
269
2. Select Edit>Options to open the Image 7. Click the Text Font browse button [...] to
Recall Options dialog box and define the open the Font window and select the font
elements you wish to display. type you wish to display. The font style
and size are not configurable.
8. Click the Text Color browse button [...] to
open the standard Color window and select
the text color you wish to display.
9. Click the Background Color browse but-
ton [...] to open the standard Color window
and select the background color you wish
to display.
10. Click the Background Image browse but-
ton [...] to select a background image.
11. In the Blanking Time field, enter the time
in minutes after which the image and the
data are erased and the background is dis-
played. If you enter a value of zero, the
3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
display is not blanked.
Partition in which the image recall is
active. 12. Click OK to save your options and return
to the Image Recall FS window.
4. Select a Filter that contains the access con-
ditions that determine which images to dis- 13. Select View>Full Screen to change the
play. See Image Recall Filters on page 267. display mode to full screen. Click <Esc>
to return to previous view.
5. Select Popup if the Image Recall FS win-
dow is to move to the front of all windows 14. The image and information remain in the
on the P2000 screen whenever an access window until another cardholder badges
attempt that matches the current filter within the partition, or until the Blanking
occurs. Time defined in Image Recall Options
elapses, or until you select View>Clear to
clear the information.
Note: Some computers may not allow the
15. Leave the Image Recall FS window open
Image Recall window to automatically pop up in
front of other windows on the screen; instead, the on the workstation to view images dis-
Image Recall button begins flashing in the Win- played as a result of badgings, or select
dows taskbar. File>Exit to close.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
270 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
The Alarm Monitor window opens immedi- You can for example, define an input point to
ately after logging on to the Server, so that generate upon activation, two separate alarms
ongoing alarms are always visible. The Alarm for two configured alarm categories:
Monitor window cannot be closed at the P2000\Maintenance\Building 1 and
Server, to ensure that alarm conditions do not P2000\Security\Building 1. Typically, a single
go unnoticed. However, it can be minimized operator is configured to receive only a single
using the minimize button on the title bar. category of alarms, and therefore would only
receive a single alarm. However, higher level
If the Alarm Monitor window is minimized, an operators such as supervisors, or an operator at
alarm message pop-up can alert the operator a central alarm monitoring location, may be
that a new alarm has been reported. When an configured to receive both of these alarms.
alarm is reported, the operator acknowledges
the alarm, makes the appropriate response, and When deleting an existing Alarm Category, the
then completes the response. P2000 searches the database and issues a warn-
ing if the category is referenced by any alarm
configurations. If the operator chooses to con-
Note: Some computers may not allow the tinue, all existing references to the category
Alarm Monitor window to automatically pop up in being deleted are changed to its parent cate-
front of other windows on the screen; instead, the
gory.
Alarm Monitor button begins flashing in the Win-
dows taskbar. Alarm Categories are an Enterprise-wide con-
figuration and therefore, if you are using the
Pending alarm messages remain in the Alarm Enterprise feature, a single set of categories is
Queue until acknowledged and removed by an shared by all P2000 sites within an Enterprise
operator. Alarm History is stored in the system system.
as configured in Site Parameters.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
271
24-10832-194 Rev. E
272 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Completing an alarm – Several actions may When a new alarm displays in the Alarm Mon-
take place during the handling of an alarm. itor window, an audible beep sounds, and a red
When all actions needed to process the alarm color bell icon in the line item entry message
have been completed, the operator completes begins flashing. The entry continues in this
the alarm. This action is date and time stamped Pending state until an operator acknowledges
for the alarm history record. (See To Complete the alarm, after which the beep stops and the
an Alarm on page 277.) An alarm can only be bell icon changes to yellow.
completed if the alarm state is secure. Some
alarms in secure state, such as Guard Tour
alarms, must first be acknowledged or TIP: You can right-click a line item in the
responded, before they can be completed. Alarm Monitor window to acknowledge, respond,
complete, or remove alarms from the shortcut
menu. The shortcut menu also allows you to see
the location of the alarm on a Real Time Map, dis-
Note: Responding to an alarm that has not play live or stored AV video (if available), or view
been acknowledged automatically causes an all items when you click Display All. In addition, if
acknowledgment to occur. Similarly, completing the element that generated the alarm was config-
an alarm causes an automatic acknowledge, if ured to manually activate events, the event name
needed. also displays in the shortcut menu. Also, you can
select from the shortcut menu to Print All alarms
in the queue or select Print Displayed to print
Removing the Alarm from the queue – Accord- only the alarms that display in the list box.
ing to company policy, operators may remove
completed alarms from the alarm queue. The
alarm response sequence remains in the alarm
Monitoring Remote Alarms
history record. (See To Remove an Alarm
Message from the Queue on page 277.) You can configure your system to receive
alarm messages from remote P2000 sites,
Refreshing the Alarm Monitor window – The allowing operators to simultaneously monitor
Refresh button on the Alarm Monitor window alarms locally and at multiple remote sites.
is used to read again all current alarms from This feature is useful to monitor alarms at
the database (this should not be needed unless unattended sites that are closed for the week-
there was a loss of communication with the end or a holiday, and ensures that all alarm
Server). conditions, even at far away locations, are
watched closely at all times.
Access the Alarm Monitor from the P2000
Main menu. Select Alarm>Alarm Monitor, To be able to monitor remote alarms, both your
or if minimized just click the Alarm Monitor local and the remote site have to be properly
button to restore it. configured. The following conditions must be
met:
The Alarm Monitor queue displays alarms in a
scrolling list, as they occur. The alarm The Remote Message Service must be up
response changes as the operator performs the and running at both the remote site (to send
response steps (see the Alarm Status column the alarm message) and at your local site (to
header in the Alarm Monitor window); and the receive the alarm message). The Remote
date and time of each step is recorded in the Message Service can be started and stopped
alarm history record. using the P2000 Service Control feature, just
like the other P2000 services. See Starting
and Stopping Service Control on page 432.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
273
The Message Filter Configuration appli- If these conditions are met, your local Alarm
cation (page 222), must be properly config- Monitor window displays alarm messages that
ured at your local site and each remote site, are generated at remote sites when their alarm
to control the type of messages transmitted status or state changes.
between Servers, thereby reducing network
traffic by transmitting only messages that The procedures for handling remote alarms are
pass the filter criteria. similar as for local alarms; however, the fol-
lowing points should be noted:
The P2000 Remote Server application
(page 230), must be properly configured at Responding to remote alarms – Alarm instruc-
each remote site to be able to send their tions are sent to remote sites; however, the
alarm messages to your local site. The setup alarm responses remain local. While the Alarm
must include the name, IP address and Status column in the Alarm Monitor displays a
Remote Message Service Listener Port Responded status, the alarm response entered
number of your local site; the type of mes- at a remote site is not part of the alarm history
sages that is forwarded to your site and at in your local site.
what times; and other related parameters.
Completing remote alarms – Remote alarms
The Process Received Remote Messages
can be completed, regardless of the current
option in the RMS tab of Site Parameters
alarm state.
(page 43), must be selected at your local site
to be able to receive messages from remote Removing remote alarms – Remote alarms can
P2000 sites. If you select this option, the be removed from the queue, regardless of the
Remote Message Service processes incom- current alarm state. Removed alarm are auto-
ing messages and pass them on to RTLRoute matically completed.
for distribution within the local system and,
if applicable, to other remote sites.
Alarm Monitor Definitions
The Message Filter Group selected in the
RMS tab of Site Parameters (page 43), Date/Time – Displays the date and time the
defines which remote messages your alarm was reported to the system. Alarms that
Remote Message Service processes. If you are originated at remote sites with different
select <None>, your local P2000 site geographical time zones display the actual
receives all remote messages. time at the remote site.
The Local Alarms option in the RMS tab
of Site Parameters (page 43), must be
selected at the remote site to allow remote Note: Click any of the column headings to sort
operators to acknowledge, respond, and the alarms by the selected column heading.
complete alarms originated at your local
site. Escalation – Displays the escalation level of
The Remote Alarms option in the RMS tab the alarm (the highest is 10).
of Site Parameters (page 43), must be
selected at the remote site to allow remote Priority – Displays the Alarm Priority set for
operators to acknowledge, respond, and each alarm type (the highest is 0).
complete alarms originated at other P2000
sites.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
274 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
You can assign sounds to Alarm Priorities 0 to Alarm Status – Displays one of the following:
255 in groups of 10. The sound files can be set
up from Control Panel in your Windows desk- Pending – Not yet acknowledged.
top, clicking the Sounds icon. In the Sounds Acknowledged – Acknowledged but no
tab, select any of the Pegasys Alarm Priorities action taken.
from the Program events box, then select the Responding – Acknowledged and response
corresponding sound file from the Sounds action in progress.
drop-down list. Complete – Action taken.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
275
Action Date/Time – Displays the date and time Map Button – You can see the location
the action (respond, complete, and so on) takes of an alarm on a Real Time Map from
place. This is always the local time, regardless the Alarm Monitor window. Select an
if a remote site is in a different geographical alarm and click the Map button. The map dis-
time zone. plays and the icon blinks indicating the loca-
tion of the alarm. For more information, see
Query String – Displays the query string value Using the Real Time Map on page 346. This
(if it was defined) of the item associated with feature is available for local alarms only.
the alarm.
AV – This button is enabled if your facility uses
Alarm Site – Displays the name of the P2000 the DVR/VMS feature. If the alarm message
site where the alarm was originated. displayed is associated with a camera, you can
Partition – Displays the name of the partition select the message line from the list and click
containing the item (input point, terminal, the AV arrow, then select whether you want to
panel, and so on) that originated the alarm. display live or stored video. For more informa-
tion, refer to your DVR/VMS documentation.
Public – Displays whether the alarm message
is visible to other partitions. Print – Click the Print arrow and select whether
you want to Print All alarms in the queue or
Audible Alarm Button – Click the select Print Displayed to print the alarms that
Audible Alarm button to temporarily are visible in the Alarm Monitor list box.
disable the audible alarm beep. All
alarms are affected. Unless you acknowledge,
To Acknowledge an Alarm
respond, or complete the alarm, the beep
becomes audible again in 40 seconds. If you 1. Click the line item you wish to respond to
wish to turn off the audible alarm beep, select and click Ack. The Alarm Status changes
from the Sounds dialog box in Control Panel, to Acknowledged. This informs the system
any of the Pegasys Alarm Priorities, then and anyone else monitoring the system that
browse for the None.wav file located in the bin the alarm has been recognized.
folder of the P2000 software installation.
2. If several alarms come in at once, you can
Msg Routing Status – The Message acknowledge them in any order you wish;
Routing Status indicator displays in however, company policy may dictate that
green to indicate that all communica- you respond by priority. If desired, select
tions between the workstation and the Server the highest priority by number, or click the
are up. If communications go down, the Mes- Priority column title to sort by priority,
sage Routing Status indicator turns red. moving the highest priority to the top of
the list.
Total – Displays the total alarm count in the
Alarm Monitor window.
To Respond to an Alarm
Pending – Displays the number of pending
alarms in the Alarm Monitor window. 1. With the line item to which you wish to
respond selected, click Respond. The
Alarm Response dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
276 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
277
1. Click Complete to end the alarm process- Instruction text associated with an alarm can
ing sequence. The Alarm Status changes to be viewed from the Alarm Response window,
Complete. Alarms can only be completed the Alarm Details window, or by right-clicking
if the alarm state is secure. an alarm in the Alarm Monitor window and
selecting Instructions.
To Remove an Alarm Message from the
Queue To Activate an Event from the Alarm
Monitor
The Complete and Remove buttons do not
become active until the alarm is in the secure 1. In the Alarm Monitor window, select the
state. line item you are responding to and
right-click to open the shortcut menu.
1. Select a line item from the scrolling list.
2. Click the event name you wish to activate.
2. Click Remove. The event is triggered.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
278 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
279
13. From the control menu select Alarm Col- 3. The Name, Text, Partition, and whether or
ors. The Alarm Colors dialog box opens not the text is Public display in the list.
displaying the default colors that were 4. Click Add. The Alarm Response Text dia-
defined from the System Configuration log box opens.
window.
14. Assign the desired colors as described
before, then click OK to save your settings.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select The Bosch D6600 Security Receiver/Control-
Alarm>Alarm Response Text. The ler is capable of receiving alarm and supervi-
Alarm Response Text list opens. sory messages from the Bosch digital dialers
over analog telephone lines. It can process up
to eight individual telephone lines simultane-
ously. The Bosch Receiver/Controller is con-
nected to the P2000 system via a standard
RS232 serial interface.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
280 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
The communication takes place only in one 6. Click Enable to enable the SIA device.
direction; from the Bosch system to the P2000 7. Click P2000 Alarms to display messages
Server. The P2000 Server does not transmit from the SIA device in the Alarm Monitor
commands to the Bosch Receiver/Controller (in addition to the SIA Message Viewer
and cannot suppress any Bosch capabilities window, where they display by default).
such as print or display audible indications.
The P2000 Server acknowledges messages as 8. Select the Comm. Port to which the SIA
they are received. device is physically connected. Choices
include serial input and output ports COM1
This section describes the configuration of the to COM32.
Bosch interface to the P2000 system. You must 9. Select the Baud Rate for the SIA device
program the Bosch system before connecting it communications. The recommended value
to the P2000 Server. All information must be is 9600.
supplied by the Bosch installer.
10. Select the number of Data Bits for the SIA
device communications. The recom-
To Configure the SIA Interface mended value is 8.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- 11. Select the appropriate Parity for the SIA
fig>System. Enter your password if device communications. The recom-
prompted. The System Configuration win- mended value is None.
dow opens. 12. Select the number of Stop Bits for the SIA
2. Select SIA Device and click Add. The SIA device communications. The recom-
Device Edit dialog box opens. mended value is 1.
13. Click OK to save your settings.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
281
The Partition column displays the name To Forward Messages from One
of the partition containing the SIA device Workstation to Another
that originated the alarm.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select
The Public column indicates whether the Alarm>Message Forwarding. The Mes-
message is visible to other partitions. sage Forwarding dialog box opens listing
the workstations from where and to where
all current messages are forwarded.
Note: The Message Routing Status indicator
displayed in green indicates that all communica-
tions between the workstation and the Server are
up. If communications go down, the Message
Routing Status indicator turns red.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
282 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Fire Alarm Control The IFC fire alarm system uses the P2000 IFC
Interface Service to communicate IFC panels
The fire alarm function allows the P2000 sys- with the P2000 server using the BACnet proto-
tem to monitor alarms generated by fire col. This service allows the P2000 system to
devices connected to Notifier® and IFC (Intel- monitor alarms generated by devices con-
ligent Fire Control) fire panels. The fire system nected to IFC panels. The P2000 system cur-
consists of sensors, connected to the fire panel, rently supports IFC-320, IFC2-640, and
capable of detecting fire events. These detec- IFC2-3030 fire panels. Complete hardware
tors are grouped into zones that use audible installation and operation instructions are pro-
signals (input/output modules) to indicate that vided with the IFC panel option requested for
a zone is in alarm condition. your facility.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
283
Disabled – The state of a fire detector, zone or The P2000 software is used to:
input/output module that is disabled from
reporting fire alarms. This state is typically Provide the communication between P2000
used with devices that report false alarms or applications and the Fire OPC Server (when
can be used to turn off fire devices after an using Notifier panels), using the P2000
alarm condition. OPC Proxy Service; see page 432.
Provide the communication between P2000
Enabled – The state of a fire detector, zone or applications and IFC panels through the
input/output module that is enabled for report- BACnet protocol, using the P2000 IFC
ing fire alarms. Interface Service; see page 432.
Fire Panel – Device that is the controlling com- Enable the fire server; see page 283.
ponent of a fire alarm system. The panel Configure alarm options for fire alarm pan-
receives information from sensors designed to els, detectors, zones, and input/output mod-
detect changes associated with fire (detectors), ules; see page 286.
monitors the operation of these detectors, and Monitor and display the status of fire detec-
activates equipment (input/output modules) tors, zones, and input/output modules; see
designed to alert building personnel of poten- page 288.
tial danger.
Define event triggers associated with fire
Input/Output Modules – Device connected to a detectors, zones, and input/output modules;
fire panel that can detect input from switched see page 289.
devices, such as sprinkler systems; and acti- Run alarm activity and alarm history
vate notification signals, such as alarm bells or reports associated with fire alarms; see
telephone dialers. Traditionally, when an input page 471.
device is activated, a certain output device (or
relay) is also activated. The above sections describe fire alarm config-
uration and control procedures using the
Zone – An area in a facility that is associated P2000 software.
with fire detectors and input/output modules.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
284 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con- To Configure the IFC BACnet Gateway
fig>System. Enter your password if Keep in mind the following points before con-
prompted. The System Configuration win- figuring the IFC BACnet Gateway:
dow opens.
2. In the left pane, expand Fire Server. The P2000 system communicates with IFC
panels through the BACNET-GW-3 module
3. Expand Notifier. using the BACnet over IP protocol on UDP
4. Select the fire server name and click Edit. port 47808. You cannot edit this port using
The Fire Server Config dialog box opens. the Port Configuration tab in Site Parame-
ters.
Verify that the P2000 server that integrates
with IFC panels has its firewall disabled.
Make sure the device ID of the IFC panel is
not set as 0.
You cannot define two IFC objects (gate-
5. Verify that the fire server name displays in way, panel, input/output modules, or detec-
the Name field. tors) with the same device ID.
6. Select the Enable check box. If you enable or disable LAN communica-
7. Click OK. tions on the P2000 server, you must restart
the P2000 system to successfully integrate
Once you enable the fire server, the System with IFC panels.
Configuration window is automatically popu-
lated with the fire panel and associated fire
zones, detectors, and input/output modules. Note: The BACnet Gateway Configuration
application provides a mechanism to discover the
IFC panel and associated fire zones, fire detec-
tors and input/output modules from the actual
hardware devices.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
285
4. Select the Partition in which the BACnet 12. Select the fire objects to be imported to the
Gateway and associated IFC panel and P2000 database. When you select a check
devices are active. box for a parent object, all its children
5. Click Public to allow all partitions to view objects are also selected and imported. You
this BACnet Gateway. can manually clear check boxes for any
objects you do not want to import.
6. Enter the Gateway Name that describes
the BACnet Gateway or IFC panel. 13. Click OK to return to the BACnet Gate-
way Configuration dialog box.
7. Enter the Gateway IP address of the BAC-
net Gateway. This IP address is used to 14. Click OK to save the BACnet Gateway
discover the associated IFC objects. You information. The System Configuration
must configure the BACnet Gateway and window is automatically populated with
the P2000 server on the same subnet. the fire panel and associated fire zones,
detectors, and input/output modules
8. Enter the Polling Interval (in seconds)
selected.
that is used by the P2000 IFC Interface
Service for polling the BACnet Gateway to
obtain IFC panel status information.
9. Enter the number of times that the Server
Retries to connect with the IFC panel,
after which the panel is considered offline.
10. Enter the time in seconds by which the
P2000 system can keep searching for IFC
objects until the Wait Time elapses.
11. Click Explore Device to display the IFC
panel and devices associated with the
BACnet gateway.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
286 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
The P2000 system is now ready to operate with To Configure Notifier Fire Alarms
the IFC fire panel, continue with Fire Alarm
Configuration on page 286. 1. In the System Configuration window,
expand Fire Server.
2. Expand Notifier, then expand the fire
Note: You can configure multiple BACnet gate- server name to display all the fire panel
ways that contain multiple IFC fire panels to allow components.
the P2000 system to receive alarms from multiple 3. Select a Fire Panel or component (Zone,
IFC systems; however, the P2000 system can
Detector, or IO Module). Click Edit.
only communicate with up to five IFC panels.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
287
5. If you are configuring alarm options for a To Configure IFC Fire Alarms
Fire Panel, select from the Partition
drop-down list, the appropriate Partition 1. In the System Configuration window,
that has access to the Fire Panel. Partition expand Fire Server.
selection is only available at the Fire Panel 2. Expand IFC, then expand the BACnet
level. Gateway name to display all the fire panel
6. Click Public if you wish the fire device to components.
be visible to all partitions. 3. Select a Fire Panel or component (Zone,
7. Specify the Query String value to be used Detector, or IO Module). Click Edit.
with message filtering.
8. In the Alarms Options box, click Add to
assign this alarm to one or more Alarm
Categories. The Add Alarm Categories
dialog box opens displaying all previously
created alarm categories (see page 270 for
details).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
288 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
5. If you are configuring alarm options for a 12. Once you have all the alarm categories you
Fire Panel, select from the Partition want to assign to this alarm, select an alarm
drop-down list, the appropriate Partition category from the list and click Edit to edit
that has access to the Fire Panel. Partition the alarm options. You can select and edit
selection is only available at the Fire Panel more than one category at a time. The
level. Alarm Options dialog box opens display-
6. Click Public if you wish the fire device to ing the General tab. See the definitions
be visible to all partitions. provided on page 83.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
289
Monitoring Fire Alarms using the Alarm To add fire icons to the Real Time Map, follow
Monitor Window the instructions provided in Creating a Real
Time Map on page 348.
Fire alarms can be monitored, acknowledged,
and removed using the Alarm Monitor win- Map Maker provides a default fire component
dow. For detailed information, see Monitor image set to display various fire states. How-
Alarms on page 270. ever, you can use your own icons to create cus-
tom image sets. See Adding Image Sets on
page 352 for details.
Viewing Fire Transactions Using the
Real Time List
Viewing Fire Components Using the
All fire transactions are sent through real time System Status Window
messages to the Real Time List. As the status
of defined fire detectors, zones, and input/out- The System Status window displays the cur-
put modules changes, corresponding related rent status of fire zones, detectors, and
messages are generated and displayed. You input/output modules that have been config-
must select the Fire check box in the Real ured for fire alarm control.
Time List window to display all fire transac-
tions as they occur. See Using the Real Time See Viewing System Status on page 435 for
List on page 342 for more information. instructions on how to display fire component
status.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
290 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
291
Controlling Outputs
1. From the P2000 Main menu select Con-
trol>Control All Doors. An operator can manually control an output
(override system controls) for a specific output
2. Enter your password if prompted. The
point or group. (The operator must first have
Control All Doors dialog box opens.
menu permissions for Output Control to use
this feature.) If it is a partitioned system, the
outputs available from the drop-down list are
those active in the operator’s partition.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
292 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
293
24-10832-194 Rev. E
294 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
295
24-10832-194 Rev. E
296 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
297
24-10832-194 Rev. E
298 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Area Alarms Setting 4. In the Pre Max Allowed Alarm box, click
Popup when set or Popup when secure,
Area Alarms Setting enables the Alarm Moni- and select the Instruction Text Name
tor window to automatically pop up in front of from the associated drop-down list that dis-
other windows on the screen whenever any of plays in the Alarm Response window
the three Area Alarm types occur. The pop up whenever the Pre Max Allowed Alarm is in
displays a set of instructions related to that par- the alarm or secure state.
ticular alarm. Before you assign instruction
text to the various pop ups, you must first cre- 5. Click OK to return to the Area Configura-
ate instruction text. See To Create Instruction tion dialog box.
Text on page 90.
1. In the Area Configuration dialog box, click Note: The default Alarm Priority setting for
Area Alarms Setting. The Area Alarm Area alarms is 10.
Settings dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
299
7. In the Input box, select the input point To Control each Defined Area
from the Available list and click << to
move it to the Selected list. 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
trol>Area Control.
8. In the Input Group box, select the input
group from the Available list and click << 2. Enter your password if prompted. The
to move to the Selected list. Area Control dialog box opens.
3. Select the Partition that contains the
Areas you wish to control.
Note: The terminal or input selected here can- 4. If you wish to control a specific Area, use
not be assigned to another Area. the Filter box to enter a filter criteria, such
as M* then click Filter. The list box dis-
9. Click the Exit tab if you wish to monitor plays all Area Names that start with the let-
Exit type reader terminals and input points, ter M.
and repeat the same steps.
10. Click OK. A new icon displays under the
root Area icon. When you click the new Note: You can also select a previously typed
Area icon, the parameters display on the filter from the drop-down list. The list box
refreshes when you select * from the Filter box or
right windowpane of the System Configu-
when you close the Area Control dialog box.
ration window. Changes to Area Configu-
ration become effective after you stop and
restart all P2000 services. The list box displays the following infor-
mation for each defined Area:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
300 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
301
24-10832-194 Rev. E
302 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Area Details Field Definitions If you enter a new count in the Current Count
field that is less than the total number of card-
Area Name – Displays the Area Name selected holders showing in the list box, you are asked
in the Area Control dialog box. to remove some cardholders from the list, or
Current Status – Displays the current status of set the count to a larger value.
the Area. See the Status definitions on Refresh – To manually update the Area Details
page 300. list box, click Refresh. If a change in the Area
Current Count – Shows the total number of count occurs, only the Count fields are updated
cardholders currently in the Area, which were automatically and the Refresh button changes
granted access through either reader terminals color displaying a message to refresh the list to
or input points. see the changes.
Terminal Count – Shows the total number of Add – If a cardholder is currently in the Area,
cardholders currently in the Area, which were but does not display in the Area Details list
granted access through a reader terminal. box, click Add and select the cardholder name
and badge number, click OK, then click Yes to
Input Count – Shows the total number of card- confirm. The cardholder is added to the list and
holders currently in the Area, which were the Current Count and Terminal Count values
granted access through an input point. are updated.
Set – This button is activated when the Current Remove – This button is activated if one or
Count is manually changed, for example to add more cardholders are selected in the list box.
cardholders that you know are currently in the Click Remove if you wish to manually remove
Area, but you do not know who they are. After a selected cardholder, then click Yes to con-
entering the new count, click Set, then click firm. The Current Count and Terminal Count
Yes to confirm. The Input Count increases or values are updated.
decreases by the number you manually enter in
the Current Count field.
The word All displays if you select Show All from the Area Control dialog
box, which shows all cardholders currently in the Area. If you select Show
Only, to display specific cardholders, the criteria entered in the Area Filter
dialog box displays here.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
303
Area Layout
24-10832-194 Rev. E
304 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
For example, a system administrator may want 4. Click Public if you wish this Area Layout
to monitor how many cardholders from a spe- to be visible to all partitions.
cific department are currently in the Area. In 5. Enter the Name of the Area Layout. This
that case an Area Layout is created to display name displays in the Layout field of the
only the fields selected on the Area Layout Area Details dialog box.
Edit dialog box.
6. The Items box displays eight default fields,
plus any User Defined Fields, previously
To Define Area Layouts defined. Click the check box to select the
fields you wish to display on the Area
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
Details list box. The default width (in char-
fig>Area Layout. The Area Layout dialog
acters) of the selected field displays.
box opens.
7. To change the width, either double-click
the width field, or click Change Width
and enter the new width.
8. If you wish to change the order in which
the fields display, click Up or Down to
move the field up or down on the list.
9. When all information is entered, click OK.
The new Area Layout displays in the Area
Layout dialog box.
10. Click Done. This Area Layout is now
2. Click Add. The Area Layout Edit dialog accessible from the Area Details dialog
box opens. box.
Area Reports
24-10832-194 Rev. E
305
24-10832-194 Rev. E
306 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
307
3. Enter the required information in each tab Public – Click Public if you wish this Zone
according to your system requirements. Name to be visible to all partitions.
See the following Muster Zone Definition
Fields for details. As you work through the Enabled – Click Enabled for the system to rec-
tabs, click Apply to save your settings. ognize this Zone Name. If you wish to tempo-
rarily disable the Zone, click to clear the check
4. When all entries are complete click OK to box.
return to the System Configuration win-
dow. A new icon displays under the root Automatically start the Muster Control Dialog –
Muster Zones icon. When you click the Click if you wish to automatically open the
new Muster Zone icon, the parameters dis- Muster Zone Status and Control dialog box as
play on the right windowpane. soon as a Muster begins. If you enable this
option, select from the drop-down list the
workstation that automatically displays the
Muster Zone Definition Fields
Muster Zone Status and Control dialog box
Zone Name – Enter a meaningful zone name. when a Muster begins.
All zone names must be unique. Zones should
be named logically, including information
such as the zone location and what it contains, Note: To take advantage of this option, the
to be easily identified by rescue personnel in P2000 software must be running at the desig-
the event of an emergency. nated workstation when the Muster begins.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
308 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Two line full content – Select this option if you For mustering purposes, either the last valid or
wish to automatically print more detailed card- last invalid badging is used, depending on
holder information when a Muster begins. This which has the latest date and time. You can
report is printed at the Report Interval selected prevent invalid badging from being used to
and includes first and last name, badge num- determine the initial At Risk group; see Use
ber, last badging date and time, terminal name, only valid badging at startup on page 309 for
company, and department name. details. Thereafter, a muster in progress always
uses the last known badge activity, valid or
Report Interval – Select from the spin box the invalid. Even invalid badging shows the card-
report interval (in minutes) at which mustering holder’s current location.
reports is printed during an emergency. When a
Muster starts, the first report is printed imme- If the badge status shows that the holder is in
diately. the zone, assume holder is in the zone (select
one of the following options):
24-10832-194 Rev. E
309
Muster Zone Definition Options Muster Zone Alarm Settings enable the Alarm
Monitor window to automatically pop up in
Allow expansion – If selected, the Zone can be front of all other windows on the screen when-
dynamically expanded during a Muster. This is ever a Muster alarm condition occurs.
useful in cases where the Zones are overlapped
or not very rigidly defined. For example, an You can also specify instruction text that dis-
emergency event in one part of the facility plays when an operator responds to a Muster
might spread to adjacent areas and the Zone alarm going into a Set or Secure state.
could be expanded to include terminals in Enabling the Popup feature and selecting
those areas as the need arises. As expansion Instruction Text are independent tasks, and can
takes place, the badging activity at the newly be used in any combination.
incorporated terminals is examined to deter-
Before you assign instruction text to the vari-
mine which personnel need to be added to the
ous pop ups, you must first create instruction
At Risk group.
text. See To Create Instruction Text on
Use only valid badging at startup – If selected, page 90.
only valid badging determines if the card-
1. In the Muster Zone Definition dialog box,
holder is inside a risk area. If this option is not
click Muster Zone Alarm Settings. The
selected, any invalid badging inside a risk area
Muster Zone Alarm Settings dialog box
is included in determining if the cardholder is
opens.
inside the risk area.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
310 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
311
24-10832-194 Rev. E
312 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Mustering Events
24-10832-194 Rev. E
313
24-10832-194 Rev. E
314 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
A warning message No
Printer For Muster Reports
displays here if no printer
was selected in the Muster
Zone Definition dialog box.
Zone Hardware Status – Displays one of the Enabled – Click Enabled for the system to con-
following: trol this Zone. If you wish to temporarily dis-
able the Zone, click to clear the check box. You
Inoperable – If a panel (that contains zone or can disable a Zone only when it is in the Ready
muster terminals) is disabled or down. Also status.
if zone or muster terminals are disabled or
down. Start Time – Displays the time the Muster was
Degraded – If a panel (that contains seques- triggered or manually started.
ter terminals) is disabled or down. Also if
Elapsed Time – Displays the time that has gone
sequester terminals are disabled or down.
by since the Muster started.
OK – If all mustering terminals or panels are
enabled. Start – Click Start to manually start a Muster.
To manually start a Muster, the Zone must be
Show Group – Select the group you wish to dis- in the Ready status. Once started, the Muster
play. This allows switching the display to any Service determines the initial state of the Zone
of the available groups. Choices are: At Risk, and the At Risk group displays by default.
Trapped, Wandering, Mustered, Sequestered,
and Rescuer. See Basic Definitions on Stop – Mustering is stopped by triggering an
page 305 for details. The At Risk group is the event designated to automatically stop a Mus-
default display. ter. If you wish to manually terminate a Mus-
ter, click Stop. The Zone Status displays the
Personnel In Group – Displays the current Stopped state and analysis reports become
number of cardholders in the group selected in available by clicking first Save Data and then
the Show Group drop-down list. Reports.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
315
Once the Muster is stopped the Zone Control All mustered cardholders can be automatically
quits updating the list of cardholders. restored to their last badge location through
the De-Muster capability, as long as the
Ready – When a Muster is manually stopped, Enable de-muster option is selected in the
it may be necessary to ensure that all trigger- Muster Zone Definition dialog box. This func-
ing devices, such as alarms, manual switches, tion is password protected.
or push buttons are reset so that another Mus-
ter cannot be inadvertently started. Once it is Reset – Click to stop a Muster in progress and
determined that the Zone can be made ready reset the Zone Status back to Ready. The Reset
for another Muster, click Ready to enter the function is not normally used, but under
Ready state. unusual circumstances, such as database prob-
lems during a Muster causing the Muster to
Drill – To participate in a disaster preparedness abort, the Reset button must then be used to
exercise, a Muster can also be run as a drill by reset the Zone.
clicking Drill. A drill differs from the real
thing by the fact that during a drill, events that
would otherwise send external alarms to out- Note: A Muster in progress resets itself after
side emergency response agencies can be sup- the P2000 system recovers from a database fail-
pressed. ure.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
316 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Print Group – Click to print the group currently Viewing and Printing Muster Transac-
being displayed. Printing is done at the desig- tions in Real Time
nated printers selected in the Muster Zone
Definition dialog box. Once a Muster is started, an alarm is generated
and displayed in the Alarm Monitor window,
Expand Zone – Use this option if you wish to and all mustering transactions are sent through
expand a Muster Zone during an emergency. real time messages to the Real Time List. As
For instance, a hazard may spread requiring the Muster Zone status changes, corresponding
zones that initially were not involved, to be Muster-related messages are generated and
added to the active Muster Zone. You can only displayed. You must select the Mustering
use this option if Allow expansion was check box in the Real Time List window to
enabled in the Muster Zone Definition dialog display all mustering transactions as they
box. When you click this button, a list of avail- occur. See Using the Real Time List on
able terminals displays, where you can select page 342 for more information.
the terminals you wish to add. All personnel
who last badged at any of the new terminals If you wish to print mustering transactions as
are added to the At Risk group. they occur, you can either print them from the
Real Time List window, or select the Muster-
View Inoperable Hardware – Click this button to ing Zones check box in the Site Parameters
view muster terminals or panels that are not dialog box, Printing tab. See Printing Tab on
enabled or are down. page 34 for more information.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
317
The Muster Zone Name and Available In addition to the Muster Analysis report, the
Date/Time fields only display selections if the P2000 Standard Reports set includes the Mus-
Muster Zone was started at least once. tering Configuration report, which lists by
Muster Zone name, all the zone definition con-
In the Group Type drop-down list select one figuration, as set up in the Muster Zone Defini-
of the following reports: tion dialog box. This report lists each Muster
At Risk – Displays the list of personnel who Zone and shows its defining and mustering ter-
are within the Muster Zone and have not yet minals, and all associated events.
checked-in at a muster terminal.
Trapped – Displays the list of all personnel Detect and Control Intrusion
who may be trapped in the Muster Zone.
Wandering – Displays the list of all person-
nel who are not believed to be in the Muster The Intrusion Detection function has been
Zone, but who have not yet checked-in at a designed to sense an intrusion into a protected
muster terminal. building (detection) and report it to responsible
Mustered – Displays the list of all personnel parties (annunciation). This is accomplished
who have badged at a muster terminal. with a combination of detection, control, and
reporting devices such as a control panel, input
Sequester – Displays the list of all personnel devices (sensors), and output devices (bells,
who have badged at a sequester terminal. sirens).
Rescuer – This report tracks all rescue per-
sonnel throughout the site. The Intrusion Detection system consists of
sensors, connected to the intrusion panel,
In the Started By drop-down list select capable of detecting various intrusion or bur-
whether this Muster Zone was started by an glary events. These intrusion detection sensors
Operator or by an Event. are associated with physical zones/points and
grouped into areas; also intrusion events use
In the Reason drop-down list select the reason
audible annunciators to signal that a zone or
why this Muster was started, whether it was a
area is in alarm condition.
real Muster, a drill, or both.
The P2000 Intrusion Service resides on the
After you have entered your selections, the
P2000 Server and provides the communication
Muster Analysis Report displays in the Crystal
between the P2000 system and intrusion pan-
preview window showing the criteria selected
els. This service allows the P2000 system to
and the total number of cardholders in the
obtain status information whenever an intru-
Muster Zone. This report lists all Mustering
sion component changes and issues commands
activity within a specified time frame by zone
to control the intrusion zones/points, areas,
name, start and stop times and whether it was a
and annunciators that are part of the intrusion
drill or real emergency.
system.
This report can also be generated using the
The P2000 system supports three intrusion
Report>Run Report option and selecting the
detection integrations: OPC Aritech, Bosch®
Muster Analysis report.
(GV3 and GV4 series), and Mercury. Com-
plete hardware installation and operation
instructions are provided with the intrusion
system that is shipped with your option.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
318 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
A properly configured intrusion detection sys- Intrusion Input Point – A device used to detect
tem should: a change in a facility. A point senses an event
that could represent intrusion such as a glass
Detect an unlawful intrusion break, motion or door contact.
Identify the location of the intrusion
Intrusion Interface – TCP/IP, RS232C, or OPC
Signal an alarm to inform local security
that is used to communicate with one or more
forces that an intrusion has been detected
intrusion servers.
Signal intruders that they have been
detected Intrusion Server – A physical device or soft-
ware component that controls one or more
intrusion zones or areas.
Basic Definitions
Zone – A collection of one or more input points
Annunciator – (Not supported by Mercury) An (or Mercury readers) that are used to monitor a
annunciator is any electrical device connected particular zone within the facility.
to an Aritech or Bosch output point, which is
activated when an intrusion is detected (for
example, a siren). An annunciator can be
silenced or activated manually.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
319
24-10832-194 Rev. E
320 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Once you enable the Aritech intrusion server, 2 = vendor address format is incorrect
the System Configuration window is automati- 4 = Aritech panel is working in battery mode
cally populated with the intrusion device and
associated intrusion areas, zones, and annunci- 5 = battery charge is low
ators. Under these conditions, the Aritech panel is
still operational because:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
321
Note: We recommend the point response type For Automation (P2000 Integration):
for immediate response to be A for non 24-hour
points, and 0 or 2 for 24-hour points. 1. Set the physical switch address on the
B426 to 3.
The Bosch intrusion integration uses the 2. Set Automation TCP Enable to Yes.
TCP/IP protocol to communicate between
the Bosch panel and the P2000 Server; B426 Configuration Rules (GV4 Panels)
therefore, you must establish the availability For RPS:
of Conettix DX4020 or B426 network inter-
face. This is provided by Bosch to connect 1. Set the physical switch address on the
with the Bosch panel via a TCP/IP protocol. B426 to 4, or 2 or 1. Use this value to set
Make sure the B426 network module uses the panel address using the AUXPARM
the latest Bosch intrusion firmware version. settings.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
322 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
323
24-10832-194 Rev. E
324 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Alarm Options
Intrusion Area – Displays the intrusion area
name to which the zone is assigned. This field
displays <none> until you assign the zone to
an intrusion area.
Reader Terminal – If the Point Type is Reader Alarm options are described in detail on
Terminal, select the reader terminal that has page 83.
been designed to monitor a particular zone.
Processor Rule – This field defines the zone Configuring Mercury Intrusion Areas
type. Select:
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
24 Hour Zone – if the zone alarms are trig- fig>System. Enter your password if
gered at any time (the zone is always moni- prompted. The System Configuration win-
tored). dow opens.
Interior Zone – if the zone is only monitored 2. Expand Panels to display the panel types.
when the associated intrusion area is armed. 3. Expand Mercury Panels to display all
Delay Trigger – This field defines the entry Mercury panels configured in the system.
delay trigger type. Select: 4. Expand the panel for which you wish to
configure an intrusion area.
No delay – if the zone is not affected by an
entry delay.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
325
5. Select Intrusion Area and click Add. The Query String – This value is used with message
Mercury Intrusion Area Edit dialog box filtering; see Define Query String Filters on
opens at the General tab. Enter the infor- page 225.
mation in each tab according to your sys-
tem requirements. See the following Number – Select a number for the area. Each
Mercury Intrusion Area Field Definitions area must have a unique area number.
for detailed information.
6. As you work through the tabs, click Apply Mercury Tab
to save your settings.
7. When all entries are complete, click OK to
save the intrusion area information.
Mercury Intrusion Area Field Defini- Default Status – Select Disarmed or Armed as
tions the default status for the intrusion area.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
326 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Zones Tab
Note: To configure Mercury intrusion zone
alarms, see Configuring Mercury Intrusion Zones
on page 323. To configure Mercury intrusion area
alarms, see Configuring Mercury Intrusion Areas
on page 324.
Intrusion Alarms
Intrusion components that generate alarms
must belong to at least one alarm category, and
must provide their own set of alarm options
and parameters to define how the alarms
behave when activated, whether or not they
need to be acknowledged, at what time an
alarm can be activated, and other alarm set-
tings that provide the flexibility of automating
the alarm operation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
327
5. If you are configuring alarm options for an To Configure Bosch Intrusion Alarms
Intrusion Device, select from the Partition
drop-down list, the appropriate Partition 1. In the System Configuration window,
that has access to the Intrusion Device. expand Intrusion.
Partition selection is only available at the 2. Expand Bosch Intrusion to display all
Intrusion Device level. Bosch intrusion panels.
6. Click Public if you wish the Device, Area, 3. Expand the Bosch intrusion panel that con-
Zone, or Annunciator to be visible to all tains the intrusion component (area or
partitions. point) you wish to configure.
7. Specify the Query String value to be used
with message filtering.
8. Click Add to assign this alarm to one or Note: You cannot configure alarms that are
associated with Bosch intrusion annunciators.
more Alarm Categories. The Add Alarm
Categories dialog box opens displaying all
previously created alarm categories (see 4. Select the intrusion component and click
page 270 for details). Edit. The selected Bosch Intrusion Edit
dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
328 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
8. Specify the Query String value to be used Controlling Intrusion Items Using the
with message filtering. Intrusion Control Window
9. Click Add to assign this alarm to one or Use the Intrusion Control window to perform
more Alarm Categories. The Add Alarm commands for areas, zones/points, and annun-
Categories dialog box opens displaying all ciators. It allows operators to arm and disarm
previously created alarm categories (see areas; reset, bypass, and make any
page 270 for details). zones/points operational; and silence or acti-
vate any annunciator.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
329
Arm – (Mercury) Arms the selected areas 6. Click the >> button to move the selected
with a pre-configured delay. zone to the Selected Zones/Points box.
You can add as many zones as you wish.
Forced Arm – (Aritech) Arms the selected
areas regardless of the area’s state at the Once you have the selected zones, click
time when you issue the command. the function button on the right side of the
window to perform the associated opera-
Forced Arm – (Bosch) Arms the selected tion. The choices are:
areas immediately. This function is exe-
Bypass On – Commands the selected
cuted by the Bosch panel whether or not
zones/points to be bypassed.
points are secured.
Bypass Off – Turns off bypassing of the
selected zones/points.
Note: Forced Armed is not supported by Mer- Reset – (Not supported by Bosch or Mer-
cury panels. cury). Resets the state of the selected
zones. If you issue this command while the
Disarm – (Aritech and Mercury) Disarms input point is still in alarm because of still
the selected areas. being unsealed, you must seal the input
and send this command again to reset it.
ResetAck – (Not supported by Bosch or
Note: When a Mercury intrusion area is dis- Mercury). Resets the state of the selected
armed, and some zones were faulted but are now zones. If you issue this command while the
normal, the area still remains in the alarmed input point is still in alarm because of still
state. To get the area back to the normal state,
being unsealed, there is no need to re-send
you must disarm the area from the MRDT keypad
terminal or from the Intrusion Control window. the command after the input is sealed. The
command remains valid and reset the
zones as soon as the input seals.
Disarm – (Bosch) Disarms the selected
areas and silences the associated keypad. 7. If you wish to control an intrusion annun-
ciator, click the Annunciator tab. From
5. If you wish to control an intrusion zone, the list of Available Annunciators at the
click the Zones/Points tab. From the list of left side of the window, select the annunci-
Available Zones/Points at the left side of ator you wish to control. Not supported by
the window, select the zone/point you wish Mercury.
to control.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
330 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
8. Click the >> button to move the selected When a status changes, the associated intrusion
annunciator to the Selected Annunciators icon may start flashing. You can right-click the
box. You can add as many annunciators as icon to open a shortcut menu and choose to, for
you wish. Once you have the selected example, arm or disarm an intrusion area or
annunciators, click the function button on bypass an intrusion zone/point. If the intrusion
the right side of the window to perform the component was configured to allow the opera-
associated operation. The choices are: tor to activate events, the event name also dis-
Silence – Silences the selected annuncia- plays in the shortcut menu.
tors. To add intrusion icons to the Real Time Map,
Activate – Activates the selected annuncia- follow the instructions provided in Creating a
tors. Real Time Map on page 348.
9. When you finish controlling the intrusion Map Maker provides a default intrusion image
items, close the Intrusion Control dialog set to display various intrusion states. How-
box. ever, you can use your own icons to create cus-
tom image sets. See Adding Image Sets on
Viewing Intrusion Transactions Using page 352 for details.
the Real Time List
Viewing and Controlling Intrusion Items
All intrusion detection transactions are sent
Using the System Status Window
through real time messages to the Real Time
List. As the status of defined areas, zones, and The System Status window displays the status
annunciators changes, corresponding related of intrusion components that are configured to
messages are generated and displayed. You monitor intrusion detection. It also allows you
must select the Intrusion check box in the to issue the commands, depending on the state
Real Time List window to display all intrusion of the following intrusion component:
transactions as they occur. See Using the Real
Time List on page 342 for more information. Intrusion Areas – The system displays the sta-
tus of all intrusion areas associated with the
selected intrusion panel. You can issue com-
mands for the area by right-clicking the associ-
Note: If you wish to print intrusion transactions
as they occur, you can either print them from the ated status icon. The following commands may
Real Time List window, or select the Intrusion be available, depending on the current state of
check box in the Site Parameters dialog box, the area:
Printing tab; see page 34.
Arm – (Aritech) Arms the selected area if at
the time that you issue the command the
Monitoring Intrusion Using the Real area’s state permits it.
Time Map Arm – (Bosch) Arms the selected area after
a delay, and if the area’s state permits it.
Use the Real Time Map to display the status of
intrusion areas, zones/points, annunciators, and Arm – (Mercury) Arms the selected area
intrusion devices on a map layout of your facil- with a pre-configured delay.
ity. Upon intrusion activity, the map shows the Forced Arm – (Aritech) Arms the selected
state change and the exact location of the activ- area regardless of the area’s state at the time
ity. See Using the Real Time Map on page 346. when you issue the command.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
331
Forced Arm – (Bosch) Arms the selected Intrusion Annunciators – (Not supported by
area immediately. This function is executed Mercury) The system displays the status of all
by the Bosch panel whether or not points intrusion annunciators associated with the
are secured. selected intrusion panel. You can issue com-
mands for the annunciator by right- clicking
the associated status icon. The following com-
Note: Forced Armed is not supported by Mer- mands may be available, depending on the cur-
cury panels. rent state of the annunciator:
24-10832-194 Rev. E
332 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Track Hours On Site Use readers that are related to a particular sec-
tion of your facility. For example, you may
want to select readers located at the entrance of
This feature allows you to record a card- a production facility that provide for the in
holder’s accumulated number of hours present hours, and select readers located at the exit of
at a site. The Hours On Site application is used the facility that can be used for the purpose of
exclusively for tracking and reporting purposes reporting the out hours.
and works by recording the cardholder’s time
interval between an in badging and out badg- The Hours On Site feature does not determine
ing at reader terminals that are defined to mon- where and when cardholders have access in
itor Hours on Site. and around a facility – there is no access con-
trol or transaction processing associated with
Time is accrued only from the latest in and out this function, the terminals that are selected for
badging. For example, when a cardholder this feature are defined for time tracking pur-
badges at a reader defined as an Entry Terminal, poses only.
the cardholder’s time is accrued. If the same
cardholder badges at the same or other Entry
To Define Hours On Site Zones
Terminal, the first badging is ignored and the
time is accrued from the latest badging. The 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
reverse is true for an Exit Terminal. Hours On fig>System. Enter your password if
Site accurately reports hours present between prompted. The System Configuration win-
matched pairs of in and out badgings (that is, an dow opens.
in badging followed by an out badging, with no
2. Select Hours On Site Zones and click
other badgings in between).
Add. The Hours On Site Zone dialog box
opens.
Configuring Hours On Site 3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
Zones Partition that has access to this Hours On
Site zone, and click Public if you wish the
Before you initiate data collection, you must
Hours on Site zone to be visible to other
define the readers that provide real time infor-
partitions.
mation to track a cardholder’s time spent at a
particular area.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
333
4. Enter a descriptive Name for the Hours On 2. Scroll down to the two Hours On Site
Site zone. reports provided and select one of the fol-
5. In the Entry Terminals box, select the ter- lowing:
minals from the Available list that are used Hours on Site – Lists a detailed report of a
for Hours on Site in transactions. Card- cardholder’s accumulated number of hours
holders should use any of these terminals present at a site.
when entering a facility or area within a
Hours on Site - Simple – Lists a summary
facility, to start the accumulation of hours report of a cardholder’s accumulated num-
present. ber of hours present at a site.
6. In the Exit Terminals box, select the ter-
Regardless of your selection, the Hours On
minals from the Available list that are used
Site dialog box opens displaying filtering
for Hours on Site out transactions. Card-
options.
holders should only use any of these termi-
nals when leaving a facility or area within
a facility, to stop the accumulation of hours
present.
7. Click OK. A new icon displays under the
root Hours On Site Zones icon in the Sys-
tem Configuration window.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
334 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
335
Hours On Site - Simple Report The following sections present general instruc-
tions and examples for creating triggers and
This summary report is run using the same actions; however, not every dialog box and
Run Report criteria as the detailed report. The field is illustrated. For a complete list of all
difference between this report and the detailed available categories and associated types and
report is that the Simple report only shows conditions, see Appendix A: Event Trig-
total times for each cardholder, not badging gers/Actions.
time details.
System Events vs. Panel
Card Events: System and
card-activated events, as cre-
ated via the P2000 Main menu
APPLICATION NOTE Events feature, create sys-
To Create an Event
24-10832-194 Rev. E
336 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
337
3. When all information is completed, click Value – Click Select to select a value that
OK to save the trigger conditions and applies from the Select list. For example, if the
return to the Configure Events dialog box. category is Badge you could select is less than
The new conditions are listed in the Trig- or equal to and select a badge number from the
gers list. list to create the condition all badges less than
or equal to a specific badge number.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
338 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
2. Enter the information according to Event Order – If more than one action has been
Actions Field Definitions. defined for this trigger, the order of the action
3. When all conditions are defined, click OK displays in this field. For example, if the action
to return to the Configure Events dialog selected is first in the Action list, this field dis-
box. The new Action displays in the plays 1. You should define a delay between
Actions list. event actions to avoid executing them in ran-
dom order.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
339
24-10832-194 Rev. E
340 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
341
24-10832-194 Rev. E
342 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Monitor the System in Real A system administrator may want to look at the
Real Time List as a health check; for example,
Time to ensure all transaction types are being pro-
cessed, or trace why a specific cardholder is
The Real Time List and Real Time Map are being denied access.
dynamic displays of system transactions and
operations. The Real Time List is a Monitoring Remote Messages in Real
time-stamped display of all (or specified) local Time
or remote transactions as they occur. The Real
Time Map displays the current status of local As with remote alarm monitoring (page 272),
terminals, inputs, outputs, and other defined you can monitor transactions from multiple
elements on a map layout of your site. The facilities at multiple geographical locations.
Real Time List and Real Time Maps are typi- Although each remote site administrator has
cally used by operators and system administra- total control over their access control hardware
tors not only to view current status, but as trou- and system information related to their site,
bleshooting tools. operators can control system and event infor-
mation from different sites. This means that
remote operators might, for example, monitor
Note: HID panels do not report transactions their transactions locally during normal work-
associated with lock or output point status
ing hours, while your local operators might
changes. Point status may appear as ‘Unknown”
on the Real Time List and Real Time Map.
monitor transactions messages generated at
their remote sites after hours, as long as both the
local and remote P2000 sites are set up and con-
Using the Real Time List figured to receive and send transaction mes-
sages across P2000 sites during such periods.
The Real Time List is a time-stamped display
of all system transactions as they occur. If With the proper configuration, an unlimited
desired, an operator can monitor only specific number of sites can be monitored simultane-
transaction types. For example, an operator ously, allowing operators to administer multi-
concerned with learning when a cardholder is ple regions from a single site. To monitor
denied access can select only Access Deny to remote messages, both your local and the
filter the information displayed. The Real Time remote sites have to be properly configured.
List then displays only who, what, when, The following conditions must be met:
where, and why the access was denied.
The Remote Message Service must be up
You can open multiple windows of the Real and running at both the remote site (to send
Time List. For example, you could have one the transaction messages) and at your local
window open with all the types enabled. You site (to receive the transaction messages).
could open a second window with only the See Starting and Stopping Service Control
Badge Trace option selected that would display on page 432.
only those transactions. The Message Filter Configuration appli-
cation (page 223), must be properly config-
Note: A description of each transaction type is ured at your local site and each remote site,
presented in the Printing tab of Site Parameters to control the type of messages transmitted
on page 34. The Printing function of Site Parame- between Servers, thereby reducing network
ters operates independently from the Real Time traffic by transmitting only messages that
List function. pass the filter criteria.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
343
The P2000 Remote Server application Viewing Real Time List Transactions
(page 230), must be properly configured at
each remote site to send their transactions To access the Real Time List, select System>
messages to your local site. The setup must Real Time List. Transaction types displayed
include the name, IP address and Remote in the list area of the Real Time List can be
Message Service Listener Port number of color coded to help operators recognize a spe-
your local site; the type of messages that cific type of transaction. You can use the
can be forwarded to your site and at what default system colors, or customize a transac-
times; and other related parameters. tion type with a different color. You can also
set up a printer to print transactions as they
The Process Received Remote Messages occur, or print all transactions in the list.
option in the RMS tab of Site Parameters
(page 43), must be selected at your local
site to be able to receive messages from
remote P2000 sites. If you select this Note: Operators with View menu permissions
can access all Real Time List functions.
option, the Remote Message Service pro-
cesses incoming messages and passes them
on to RTLRoute for distribution within the The Real Time List displays transaction mes-
local system and, if applicable, to other sages in the order they are received. When a
remote sites. message is received, it displays in the row
The Message Filter Group selected in the above the scrolling list and in the first line of
RMS tab of Site Parameters (page 43), the list. As new transactions occur, they move
defines which remote messages your to the top of the list.
Remote Message Service processes. If you
select <None>, your local P2000 site
receives all remote messages.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
344 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
When you open the Real Time List for the first Query – Displays the query string value (if it
time in the session, the scrolling list is empty. was defined) of the item associated with the
Depending on the transaction types selected at message.
the top of the window, transactions begin to
display in date and time order at the top of the Item – Displays the name of the item (panel,
list. As transactions occur, the older ones scroll terminal, input point, and so on) that is associ-
down in the list as the newer ones are added at ated with the message.
the top. Operator – Displays the name of the operator
The following information is shown for each who handled the message (alarms in non pend-
transaction in the list. ing state or audit messages only).
Date/Time – Displays the date and time of the Alarm Category – Displays the Alarm Category
message. Transaction messages that are origi- to which the associated alarm belongs.
nated at remote sites with different geographi-
cal time zones display the actual time at the Note: The Message Routing Status indicator at
remote site. However, remote alarms display the bottom of the Real Time List window displays
in green to indicate that all communications
the time at which they were received at your
between the workstation and the Server are up. If
local site. communications go down, the Message Routing
Status indicator turns red.
Note: Workstation messages display the same
timestamp as their servers, regardless of the time
zone configuration of the workstation or the server. Note: If your facility uses the DVR/VMS feature
and the selected transaction message displayed
is associated with a camera, click Details located
Type – Displays the transaction types that were at the bottom of the window to start the AV Player
selected for monitoring (Audit, Access Deny, in live mode. As an alternative, you can click the
Badge Trace, and so on). Details drop-down arrow and select AV Player
(Live) to start AV Player in live mode or select AV
Message – Displays a message related to the Player (Stored) to start AV Player in video
transaction type, for example, Invalid Card for retrieval mode. For more information, refer to
an Access Deny transaction type. your DVR/VMS documentation.
Public – If the item associated with the mes- 1. Click to clear the All option and select only
sage is marked as Public, this column normally those options you wish to view. Only those
displays whether the message is visible to options begin to accumulate in the scroll-
other partitions. ing list.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
345
24-10832-194 Rev. E
346 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
To Print the Real Time List 4. Click OK. The printer name displays.
1. In the Real Time List window, click Print- 5. Click OK to enable printing.
ing in the top portion of the window. The
Printing dialog box opens.
Note: Printing transactions from the Real Time
List (performed from a workstation) is different
from Real Time Printing (performed at the System
Server). For information on Real Time Printing,
see Site Parameters Printing Tab on page 34.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
347
Note: The Message Routing Status indicator at Note: If your facility uses the DVR/VMS fea-
the bottom of the Real Time Map window dis- ture, when you right-click a map icon that is asso-
plays in green to indicate that all communications ciated with a camera, a pop-up menu displays the
between the workstation and the Server are up. If AV Player (Live) option. If there are stored vid-
communications go down, the Message Routing eos (associated with alarms), the pop-up menu
Status indicator turns red. displays the Show Alarm Video and Start
Recording options. For more information, refer
to your DVR/VMS documentation.
To View the Real Time Map
3. From the drop-down list at the bottom of
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys- the window, select the name of the map
tem>Real Time Map. The Real Time you wish to view. The list only displays
Map window opens. Normal maps.
4. If your facility uses Map Attachments,
click Prev to return to the previous map, or
click Home to return to the main facil-
ity-level map. Clicking Up level takes you
to the previous facility-level map.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
348 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
1. Locate the door terminal icon for the door Set up the Map Maker Window
you wish to unlock.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
2. Right-click the icon and select Open Door fig>Map Maker. The Map Maker dialog
from the shortcut menu. The door unlocks box opens.
for the configured time period, then locks.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
349
24-10832-194 Rev. E
350 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Place Device Icons on a Real Time Map Note: Placing an Assa Abloy Wi-Fi reader on a
Real Time Map has little value, as those readers
When you open Map Maker, map icons repre- do not provide real time information to the P2000
senting Panels, Terminals, Inputs, Outputs, and system.
other system elements are listed on the right
windowpane. 2. Use the left mouse button to drag the new
icon to the desired position on the map. For
example, an input point could be dragged
near the door representing where the input
point is actually installed. When you
release the mouse button, a Properties dia-
log box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
351
3. In the Label field, enter a descriptive name 13. To assign events to the item, enter a
that can easily identify the icon in the Real descriptive event name and select a previ-
Time Map. This name displays under the ously configured event from the associated
icon on your layout. drop-down list. You can define up to four
4. The Font box displays the default font or events for each map icon.
the font selected for the icon name. 14. Click OK to close the Properties dialog
5. In the Font Size box enter the font size for box. The icon is inserted in the map.
the name appearing under the icon. 15. Repeat the same steps for each device or
6. To make all font changes at once, click event you wish to add to the map.
Choose Font and select a font type, style, 16. When all elements have been added, click
and size for the name appearing under the OK to close the Map Editor window. The
icon. map is now available to choose from the
7. If you wish to change the Font Style, Real Time Map drop-down list.
select from the drop-down list whether the 17. Click Done to close the Map Maker dialog
text should be Bold, Bold Italic, Italic, or box.
Normal.
8. To display the text in a different color, click Handling Alarms from the Real Time
the Text Color browse button [...] and Map
select a color from the Color dialog box.
You can place an Alarm Category icon on a
9. Click the Background Color browse but-
Real Time Map and issue commands for all
ton [...] to open the Color dialog box and
P2000 items that generate alarms, (such as
select the background color for the icon
input points or cameras) and that use the
name.
Alarm Category selected.
10. Click Transparent Background if you
wish the background of the text to be trans- When an alarm is reported in the system, the
parent. Alarm Category icon flashes on the map. You
can right-click the icon to issue from a shortcut
11. From the Text Position drop-down list,
menu one of the alarm commands (acknowl-
select whether you want to place the text at
edge, respond, or complete). If you select
the Bottom, Left, Right, or Top of the icon.
Acknowledge or Complete, all alarms that use
12. Select from the drop-down list the name of the Alarm Category selected are acknowl-
the item you wish to place in the map. If edged or completed at once. However, if you
you are placing an input point, all available select Respond, the Alarm Monitor window
input points (or all input points in the parti- displays so you can respond to each alarm by
tion selected) display in the drop-down entering specific instructions for each particu-
list. If you are placing a panel, the lar alarm.
drop-down list includes all panels (or all
panels in the partition). In addition, the shortcut menu allows you to
open the Alarm Monitor window or display
the alarm details associated with the Alarm
Note: You can also place static text objects in Category selected.
the map to indicate for example, the name of an
entire area, or a number to dial in case of emer-
gency.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
352 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
Add Map Attachments 2. Select the map you wish to duplicate and
click the Duplicate button. The Duplicate
You can add map attachments to Real Time Map dialog box opens.
Maps that, when right-clicked, can open
another map. For example, you can place a
map attachment on the Office map that can
open the Warehouse map. Or you can place
several area map attachments on the System
Map.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
353
24-10832-194 Rev. E
354 CHAPTER 3
Operating the System
24-10832-194 Rev. E
355
T
his chapter describes several advanced DVR/VMS – Provide controls to search,
features that, when properly config- retrieve, and download real-time or
ured and utilized, allow for a more archived audio and video recording from
secure and efficient way to operate and surveillance cameras.
monitor your access control system. Some of Redundancy – Run the P2000 software in a
these features are bundled separately from the recovery configuration to ensure uninter-
P2000 software, and some of them are shipped rupted operations.
with their own manuals. Refer to your pur-
FDA Part 11 – Define parameters to assure
chase contract to see what is available in your
FDA Title 21, Code of Federal Regulation
system. This chapter presents the information
(CFR) Part 11 compliance.
you need to set up and configure each of the
following features: Intercom – Define and control intercom
calls from P2000 Workstations.
Partitions – Divide your P2000 system data-
bases into sections that can be managed P2000 Enterprise – Allow multiple P2000
individually. sites to communicate with each other to
share cardholder and badge data.
Video Imaging – Improve your security by
creating badges to provide a visual identifi- Web Access – Perform various P2000 tasks
cation of every cardholder. from any Web-ready computer.
MIS Interface – Add, update, delete, or query
the P2000 cardholder database from an Partitions
external database system.
pivCLASS Integration – Support of Federal
Identity, Credential, and Access Manage- You can divide the P2000 database into smaller
ment (FICAM) compliant smart cards and sections that can be individually managed. Par-
readers. titions structure what data is accessible by an
Metasys System Integration – Allow several individual operator, or by a group of operators.
P2000 security tasks to be handled via the You can create as many partitions as you need,
Metasys system user interface. depending on your system requirements. For
example, if you manage a building with sev-
Guard Tour – Define a sequence of transac- eral tenants, you could use partitions to segre-
tions that must occur at specific intervals to gate the databases and system functions, so
ensure security personnel properly monitors that Tenant A cannot see, access, or change
your facility. Tenant B’s records.
CCTV – Provides controls to operate cam-
eras, monitors, and other CCTV elements. Operators select the partition to which they are
assigned, from the Partition selection box on
the right side of the P2000 toolbar.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
356 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
357
Create partitions to divide the P2000 database 1. In the left pane of the System Configura-
into smaller sections. The newly created parti- tion window, expand Partitions. All the
tions are added under the root partition icon, partitions currently configured in the sys-
and display in drop-down list boxes through- tem are listed.
out the system. Once partitions have been 2. Select the partition you wish to delete, and
defined, operators can be assigned to a specific click Delete.
partition or to multiple partitions by using the
3. The Partition Selection dialog box opens.
Edit Operator dialog box.
Select the New Partition to which all items
from the deleted partition will be moved.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
358 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
359
Badge Design
Once you have configured the capture devices,
and you have become familiar with navigating
through the Video Imaging user interface, you
are ready to design badges that meet your spe-
cific requirements.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
360 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
361
24-10832-194 Rev. E
362 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
363
7. Click OK to accept the changes and close Capturing the Portrait and Signature
the Badge Setup dialog box. Images
Printing a Badge
Note: Capturing or importing a portrait image
Printing a badge requires the following steps: that is too large (at a high resolution) may result
in a degraded image when printed to a badge.
Creating a cardholder record. (See Enter- Generally, the ideal size of a portrait image
ing Cardholder Information on page 244.) should be 290 pixels wide x 330 pixels tall.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
364 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
After capturing all the images, you can now Note: Once an image has been placed in the
view and print your badge design. Since the cardholder record, you cannot delete it; you must
captured images are usually large files, it takes import a new image to replace it. Also, if the
a few seconds to save them into the database. imported image displays cropped on the screen,
Always wait a few seconds after capturing you may need to contact Technical Support if you
images before printing a badge. wish to change the image aspect ratio.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
365
24-10832-194 Rev. E
366 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
3. Enter the name of the Image Folder or MIS and Partitioned Systems
click [...] to find the folder for storing the
badge images. On P2000 systems that use the Partitioning
feature, a set of input and output tables is cre-
4. Click OK to save the settings and return to
ated for each partition. The table names are
the System Configuration window.
prefixed by the partition name. These tables
are in addition to the normal input and output
Understanding the Input and tables, which are used for the Super User parti-
Output Tables tion.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
367
24-10832-194 Rev. E
368 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
369
Site Directors Registered in P2000 In the previous illustration, the P2000 objects
ADS/ADX ADS/ADX
associated with Partition A are only visible
Tower Tower
from ADS/ADX 1; the P2000 objects associ-
ated with Partition B are only visible from
ADS/ADX 2; and the P2000 objects associ-
Wide Area
Network ated with Partition C are only visible from
IP Network
ADS/ADX 2.
P2000 Server
24-10832-194 Rev. E
370 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
3. Enter the Site Director Name where the Defining SNMP Traps
Site Director is installed (the server name
of the ADS/ADX). The P2000 system can receive Simple Net-
work Management Protocol (SNMP) Traps
4. Enter the Site Director IP Address of the from the Metasys system (Version 6.5 and
server where the Site Director is installed later). Through the use of SNMP Traps, the
(the IP address of the ADS/ADX). P2000 system can receive Metasys alarms and
5. Enter the Device ID. Enter 377 or contact associate them with P2000 alarm options, such
Johnson Controls Technical Support for the as instruction texts and escalation rules.
Device ID used on the version of Metasys Alarms generated in the Metasys system can be
currently running. processed like regular P2000 alarms and can
6. Enter the ADS Repository Name (com- be used with all P2000 alarm-related applica-
puter name) of the Metasys ADS Reposi- tions and features.
tory.
The integration with the Metasys system
7. Enter the P2000 Server IP Address. enables P2000 operators to:
8. In the Available Partitions box, select the
Browse and import selected Metasys
partition you wish to register with the
objects.
Metasys Site Director. To assign partitions,
simply select one or more partitions and Receive Metasys alarm messages associated
click the left arrow button to move them to with the selected Metasys objects.
the Selected Partitions box. Define P2000 alarm options for the
imported Metasys objects, translating Meta-
9. Click OK to save the MSEA Registration.
sys alarms into P2000 alarms, where they
10. Repeat the previous steps for each Site become subject to the standard P2000 rules
Director with which you wish to register and are processed like any other P2000
the P2000 Server. alarm.
11. To complete the P2000 MSEA Registra-
tion, you must stop and restart the P2000
XmlRpc Interface Service. For details, Note: Alarm actions for SNMP are not synchro-
see Starting and Stopping Service Control nized between the P2000 and the Metasys sys-
on page 432. tem. For example, when you acknowledge an
alarm in the P2000 system, the alarm is not auto-
The P2000 Server should now appear as a matically acknowledged in the Metasys system.
device in the Metasys system user interface
for the associated Site Director. Refer to
the Metasys System Integration manual for Limitations
information on starting and logging into
the Metasys system user interface. The P2000 system does not monitor the sta-
tus of the integration device itself (ADX,
ADS, or NAE). Therefore, alarms and mes-
sages associated with the integration device
being up or down are not supported.
The Metasys integration generates alarm
messages only. It does not generate transac-
tion history messages.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
371
24-10832-194 Rev. E
372 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
373
SNMP Object Properties and Alarm 8. By default, the SNMP object name is
Options assigned to the Query String, but you can
enter any query string value for the object.
After you import the Metasys objects into the
P2000 system, you need to configure proper- 9. Click the Alarm Options tab. SNMP
ties and alarm options for each imported objects must belong to at least one alarm
SNMP object. category, and must provide their own set of
alarm options and parameters to define
how the alarms behave when activated,
To Edit SNMP Object Properties whether or not they need to be acknowl-
edged, at what time an alarm can be acti-
1. In the System Configuration window,
vated, and other alarm settings.
expand SNMP Registration to display all
the defined SNMP registrations in the sys-
tem.
2. Expand the SNMP registration that con-
tains the SNMP object you want to edit.
3. Select the SNMP object and click Edit.
The SNMPObjectEdit dialog box opens at
the General tab.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
374 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Tour Stations
Basic Principles and Definitions
1 2 3 4 5
Guard Tour – A defined set of check-in stations
and minimum and maximum times for check- Starting Station
ing in at each station.
Tour Stations
Check-in Station – Also called simply station.
A reader or input point defined as part of a
Guard Tour.
1 2 3 4 5
Starting Station
24-10832-194 Rev. E
375
24-10832-194 Rev. E
376 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
377
24-10832-194 Rev. E
378 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Only tour badges with equal to or greater In the following example, a Time Zone was
than this priority can perform the tour. defined to be assigned to a tour, the start
6. Select one of the following Tour Types (active) time for the tour is 8:00 p.m. Monday
from the drop-down list: through Friday.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
379
Assign the Tour to a Specific Guard Reset – Click the Reset button to restore the
pre-stored preference values.
1. In the Guard Tour Definition dialog box,
click the Tour Guard 1 drop-down list and Any Guard – Click to allow any guard with the
select a name. Only cardholders with the proper priority to perform the tour. When you
Guard option enabled in the Cardholder click this box, the Tour Guard 1 to 3 and corre-
Edit dialog box display in the list. sponding Badge ID fields become disabled.
2. Once a Tour Guard is selected, the corre- Manual Reset – If selected, the user has to click
sponding Badge ID field is enabled. Select the Complete button in the Guard Tour Control
a badge from the drop-down list. Only dialog box to remove the tour from the tour list.
badge numbers with priority greater than This is to indicate that the tour has completed.
or equal to the Tour Priority display in the
list. Auto Duress Alarm – If selected, an auto duress
3. If you wish to select additional guards, alarm is generated when a guard registers three
select Tour Guard 2 and Tour Guard 3, consecutive times at a station within one min-
and their corresponding Badge ID num- ute, for example by swiping the badge three
bers. times, or by activating a tour input three times.
If Manual Reset is not selected and Auto Duress
4. To allow any guard with the proper priority Alarm is enabled, the tour status changes to Idle
to perform the tour, click the Any Guard after one minute when it completes.
box. See Additional Guard Tour Options
for more information. Alarm Late – If selected, an alarm is generated
when a guard checks in later than expected at a
station. If the check box is not selected and a
Note: One guard can run only one tour at the guard is late, this is simply considered as a tour
same time. In addition, one tour can be run only
operation event.
by one guard, even if two guards were to walk the
same tour; it is the guard that badged at the initial
station who must complete the tour using the
same badge at the remaining stations.
Note: Operation events include, for example,
Tour Alarmed, Tour Started, Station Checked in
On Time, Station Checked in Early, Station
Checked in Late, Station Checked in Out of
Additional Guard Tour Options Order, Tour Stopped, Tour Restarted, Tour
Aborted, Tour Completed, Tour Terminated, Sta-
The remaining options in the Guard Tour Defi- tion Late Timer Reached.
nition dialog box are described in the follow-
ing paragraphs.
Alarm Skip – If selected, an alarm is generated
Alarm Priority – Select from the drop-down list when a guard skips a tour station. If the check
an alarm priority from 0 to 255, in which the box is not selected and a guard skips a station,
Guard Tour alarm message is placed in the this is simply considered as a tour operation
queue. event.
Set Default – Click the Set Default button to Grant Only – If selected, the system registers
store the default preference values, which only access grant transaction messages when
include Tour Priority, Tour Type, Alarm Prior- the guard swipes the badge at the station. If not
ity, and all check boxes. selected, either access grant or deny messages
are registered.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
380 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Log Tour Operation – If selected, all tour opera- 2. Enable any of the following Popup when
tion events are logged to the system as events, set or Popup when secure check boxes,
and therefore are available for history, event and select the Instruction Text Name
processing, and so forth. from the associated drop-down lists that
displays in the Alarm Response window
Log Operator Action – If selected, all operator whenever any of the following alarm con-
actions, such as starting or aborting a tour are ditions occur:
logged as events.
Late Alarm – An alarm message is gener-
ated when a guard checks in later than
Tour Alarms Setting expected at a station. This option is avail-
able if you select Alarm Late in the Guard
Tour Alarms Settings enable the Alarm Moni-
Tour Definition dialog box.
tor window to automatically pop up in front of
all other windows on the screen whenever a Out Of Order Alarm – An alarm message is
Guard Tour alarm condition occurs. Be aware generated if a guard skips a tour station.
that Guard Tour alarms in secure state must This option is available if you select Alarm
first be acknowledged or responded, before Skip in the Guard Tour Definition dialog
they can be completed. box.
Duress Alarm – An alarm message is gener-
You can also specify instruction text that dis- ated if a guard registers three consecutive
plays when an operator responds to a Guard times at a station within one minute or by
Tour alarm going into a Set or Secure state. activating a tour input three times. This
Enabling the Popup feature and selecting option is available if you select Auto
Instruction Text are independent tasks, and can Duress Alarm in the Guard Tour Definition
be used in any combination. dialog box.
Before you assign instruction text to the vari- 3. Click OK to return to the Guard Tour Defi-
ous pop ups, you must first create instruction nition dialog box.
text. See To Create Instruction Text on
page 90.
Add Stations to the Guard Tour
1. In the Guard Tour Definition dialog box,
click Tour Alarms Setting. The Guard Tour Station information, such as Station
Tour Alarm Settings dialog box opens. Name, Sequence Number, Type, Device, and
Description displays in the list box at the bot-
tom of the Guard Tour Definition dialog box,
for all the stations assigned to that Guard Tour.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
381
2. Enter the required information. See Tour Station Type – Select either Input or Reader
Station Definition Fields for detailed infor- as the station type.
mation.
Server Type – This field is not currently used in
this version of the P2000 software.
Tour Station Definition Fields
Device Name – Select a previously defined
input point or reader (terminal) that has not
Tour Stations Information Box been assigned to another station. The list only
Station Name – Enter a descriptive name for displays the devices associated with the Station
the station. Type. If the input point selected is already
assigned to a cabinet door, the Report Alarm
Sequence Number – This field displays the option in the Cabinet Configuration dialog box
number that is automatically assigned when should be selected to be able to report guard
you define a new station. The Tour Stations tour messages.
Information list at the bottom of the Guard
Tour Definition dialog box shows the stations
assigned to this tour in sequence. You can IMPORTANT: Do not use Assa Abloy Wi-Fi
readers to monitor Guard Tour activities, since
change the sequence of the stations by clicking
those readers do not report transactions in real
the Up or Down arrows in the Tour Stations time and the system cannot verify if a guard
Information list box, to change the sequence of checks in at a station on time.
the selected station.
Description – Enter a description of this sta- Server ID – This field is not currently used in
tion, if desired. this version of the P2000 software.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
382 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Assume the tour has: Assume Station 1 is defined as: 0 - 8 are minute increments
Start Time: 5:30:35 PM Forward Traverse Time Min: 2
Abort Time: 5 minutes Forward Traverse Time Max: 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Time allowed for the Time frame in which Time allowed for the Time frame in which
guard to reach the guard is expected to guard to reach the guard is expected to
first station (Fwd reach first station second station (Fwd reach second station
Traverse Time Min) (difference between Traverse Time Min) (difference between
Min and Max Traverse Min and Max Traverse
Guard will be shown Times) Guard will be shown Times)
Early at first Early at second
station check-in Guard will be shown station check-in Guard will be shown
On Time at first On Time at second
station check-in station check-in
24-10832-194 Rev. E
383
Shunt Device Box Value – This field is not currently used in this
version of the P2000 software.
During the course of the Guard Tour, you may
need to suppress alarms (shunt input points) as If you wish to activate more than one device,
part of the tour. you can define them in the Device 2 box, then
click the Activated Devices 3 & 4 tab and fol-
This operation is similar to disabling an input low the same steps.
point or input group as part of an Event, except
that an input point or input group remain dis-
abled until the next station in the tour is Note: The system does not shunt input points
reached, a tour alarm is set, or the tour is or activate output points assigned to the last sta-
aborted. tion defined in the tour.
Name – Select a previously defined input point After defining a station, click OK to return to
or input group. The list only displays the the Guard Tour Definition dialog box, the sta-
devices associated with the Shunt Device tion displays in the Tour Stations Information
Type. box.
Attribute – This field is not currently used in Continue to add stations as necessary. When
this version of the P2000 software. finished, click OK to return to the Guard Tour
Configuration window. The Guard Tour is
written to the database.
Activated Devices Box
During the course of the Guard Tour, you may Control Guard Tours
need to activate devices (set or reset output
points) as part of the tour. Use the Guard Tour Control window to start
and stop tours and monitor their progress.
This operation is similar to setting or resetting
an output point or output group in the main To Control Guard Tours
Control menu, except that an output point or
output group remain set until the next station 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select
in the tour is reached, a tour alarm is set, or the Options>Guard Tour>Tour Control.
tour is aborted. Enter your password if prompted. The
Guard Tour Control dialog box opens.
Type – Select either Output Point or Output
2. Select the Partition that contains the
Group as the Activated Device Type.
Guard Tours you wish to control.
Name – Select a previously defined output 3. Select Active Tours if you wish to display
point or output group. The list only displays all tours currently in the status database,
the devices associated with the Activated for the partition selected, and that are in
Device Type. non-idle state.
Attribute – This field is not currently used in 4. Select All Tours if you wish to display all
this version of the P2000 software. tours currently in the database, for the par-
tition selected, regardless of their state.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
384 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
5. Click Set Alarm Color if you wish to dis- Viewing the Tour Control List Box
play all Alarmed records in a different
The following information is shown for each
color. A Color dialog box opens where you
tour in the list.
select the desired color, then click OK to
return to the Guard Tour Control dialog Name – The tour name, as configured in the
box. Guard Tour Definition dialog box.
6. If you wish to display a specific Guard
Start Time – This column displays either a
Tour, use the Filter box to enter a filter cri-
defined start time, a Timezone name, or if it
teria, such as w*, then click the Show but-
was defined as a Manual tour type.
ton. The list displays all Guard Tours that
start with the letter W. Guard(Badge) – If a tour is assigned to a spe-
cific guard, the name displays here with the
corresponding Badge ID.
Note: You can also select a previously typed
filter from the drop-down list. This list is cleared Last Station – Displays the name of the last sta-
when your close the Guard Tour Control dialog tion that the guard registered at.
box.
Station Time – Displays the time that the guard
registered at the last station.
7. To display all Guard Tours again (Active or
All), select <none> from the Filter Remain Time – Displays the time remaining for
drop-down list. the guard to reach the next station, without
8. If you wish to sort the list of tours shown being late. The time displayed decreases by
on the list box, click the specific column 30-second increments if more than one minute
header. The current sort order can be set as remains. If less than one minute remains, the
default by clicking Set Current Sort time displayed decreases every one second.
Order Default. The default sort before Status – Displays one of the following:
clicking this button is by Start Time.
Alarm – An alarm has occurred within the
guard tour, such as guard late or duress.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
385
Started – The tour has been started, either To Start a Manual Tour
manually or automatically, but the first sta-
tion has not been reached. 1. Select a tour from the Guard Tour Control
list that has a Manual tour type in the Start
Running – Status given to an active tour
Time column.
after the first station has been reached.
2. Click Start at the bottom of the Guard
Early – When a tour station check-in is
Tour Control dialog box. The Start Tour
sooner than expected.
dialog box opens.
Late – When a tour station check-in is later
than expected.
Out of Order – When a tour station check-in
occurs out of sequence.
Stopped – The tour has been manually
stopped.
Aborted – The tour has been cancelled
either manually or because of an expired
Abort Time (stations not reached in time). 3. Select the Guard assigned to run the
selected tour. If only one guard was
Completed – The tour has completed suc-
defined to run this tour, the name of the
cessfully without any alarms.
guard automatically displays on this field.
Idle – The tour is not running.
4. Select the guard’s Badge number. If only
Partition – Displays the partition as configured one badge was assigned to this guard, that
in the Guard Tour Definition dialog box. number automatically displays on this
field.
Public – Displays whether or not this guard
tour is made public, as configured in the Guard
Tour Definition dialog box.
Note: If Any Guard was selected in the Guard
Description – Displays the description of the Tour Definition dialog box, the previous fields are
disabled.
tour, as configured in the Guard Tour Defini-
tion dialog box.
5. From the Starting Station drop-down list,
select any station in the tour to be station 1.
Note: The Message Routing Status indicator at 6. Select whether this tour starts in Forward
the bottom of the window displays in green to or Reverse order.
indicate that all communications between the
workstation and the Server are up. If communica-
7. Click OK to start the tour.
tions go down, the Message Routing Status indi-
cator turns red.
Guard Tour Handling
The Guard Tour Service Status indicator displays The Guard Tour Service communication
in green to indicate that the Guard Tour Service is
checks the Start Time or Timezone definitions
up and running. If Guard Tour Service goes
down, the indicator turns red. every one minute to determine whether to start
automatic tours.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
386 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
As an operator or guard, you may be required Refreshing the Tour Control window – The
to handle tour conditions. The tour control typ- Guard Tour Control list is updated every one
ically includes steps similar to the following: minute, or when Refresh is selected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
387
The tour Note dialog box provides a place to 3. Enter the note you want to display in the
enter instructions for a particular tour. The Detail dialog box.
amount of time after which all notes are
4. Click Add. The list box displays the Date
purged is set up in Site Parameters.
and Time the note was added, with the
1. From the System Configuration window User Name, and the actual note text.
select Site Parameters and click Edit. 5. Click Done to return to the Guard Tour
The Edit Site Parameters dialog box opens Control dialog box.
at the General tab.
2. Click the Retention Policy tab and enter
the amount of time and select Minutes,
View and Print Transactions in
Hours, or Days from the Tour Note Real Time
drop-down list, after which all notes are Tour transactions are sent through real time
deleted from the system. messages to the Real Time List. You can mon-
itor real time messages, such as tour alarm
messages and see the status of a tour. Once the
status changes or the tour proceeds, corre-
sponding real time messages are generated.
Select the Guard Tour box in the Real Time
List window, to display all guard tour transac-
tions as they occur. See Using the Real Time
List on page 342 for more information.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
388 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
If you wish to print tour transactions as they When you select Tour Transaction History
occur, you can either print them from the Real from the Run Report window, the Tour Trans-
Time List window, or select Guard Tour in the action History dialog box opens. Select either
Printing tab of Site Parameters. See Printing your local Site or enter the name of the remote
Tab on page 34 for more information. site that you want to report on. The default (*)
reports all tours in the system, or you can
select a specific Partition, Tour Name, and
Generate Guard Tour Reports Transaction Type from the drop-down lists.
Guard Tour reports are provided as a subset of After you select a Begin and End Date and
the standard P2000 report set. For detailed Time for the transactions you wish to see, the
information on running reports, see Chapter 6: Tour Transaction History report displays in the
System Reports. Crystal preview window. The top of the report
shows the Tour Name, Transaction Type and
Three types of Guard Tour reports are pro- Site, and the date and time settings selected.
vided: Tour Configuration Report, Tour Trans- Each transaction is listed as a separate date and
action History Report, and Tour Notes Report. time stamped record.
The following sections describe each of these
reports.
Tour Notes Report
Tour Configuration Report This report lists all the tour notes assigned to a
specific tour name, as set up in the Guard Tour
The Tour Configuration report lists by tour Control window, or can be filtered to list by
name, all tour definition configuration, and specific Tour Name, specific Dates and Times,
associated stations, as set up in the Guard Tour and any combination of these. When you select
Definition window. When you select Tour Tour Notes from the Run Report window, the
Configuration from the Run Report window, Tour Notes dialog box opens. The default (*)
the Tour Configuration dialog box opens. You reports all tours in the system, or you can
can select a Tour Name from the drop-down select a specific Tour Name from the
list to limit the report to a specific tour or leave drop-down list. After you select a Begin and
the default (*) to report on all tours configured End Date and Time for the notes you wish to
in the system. see, the Tour Notes report displays in the Crys-
tal preview window. The top of the report
shows the date and time settings for the report
Tour Transaction History Report
and the Tour Name selected. Each note is listed
This report lists every guard tour transaction in as a separate date and time stamped record.
the system, or can be filtered to list by specific
Partition, Tour Name, Transaction Type, spe-
cific Dates and Times, and any combination of
these. In addition, you can select to run the
report on transactions at your local site or you
can enter the name of the remote site that you
want to report on.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
389
24-10832-194 Rev. E
390 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
DVR/VMS Redundancy
The P2000 software provides seamless integra- Johnson Controls provides a Fault Tolerance
tion with approved Digital Video Recorders (FT) or High Availability (HA) solution (with
(DVRs) or Video Management Systems Stratus® everRun 7.x Enterprise™) to their
(VMS). The integration allows authorized P2000 Security Management System.
users to manage camera functions from a sin-
gle P2000 workstation, and to tie an event gen- Stratus Technologies everRun Enterprise soft-
erated on the P2000 system to a live ware runs on CentOS® integrated with their
audio-visual (AV) recording. Depending on the software to create, manage, and deploy a vir-
digital video equipment used at the site, the tual Windows Server® that provides a fault
P2000 software also enables users to search, tolerant solution for the P2000 Security Man-
retrieve, and download real-time or archived agement System.
AV recordings from any transaction or surveil- The Stratus everRun Enterprise 7.x software is
lance camera, from any place and at any time. layered on to CentOS Linux® operating sys-
You can recall audio-visual files by a variety of tem. It creates the Stratus fault tolerant virtual
query options, including date and time, alarm server, ensures FT (Fault Tolerant) everRun,
events, camera ID, or DVR ID. Live video and and maintains full data integrity between two
audio playback options are available from the redundant physical servers, eliminating trans-
Alarm Monitor, Real Time List, and Real Time action loss, data loss, and application down-
Map. time.
The digital video system communicates with The everRun software transparently protects
the P2000 Server through a TCP/IP connection. an application by creating a redundant environ-
The P2000 CCTV Server, a software compo- ment for a virtual machine running across two
nent installed automatically with the Digital physical servers.
Video option, provides communication. The following illustration shows the two parts
Additionally, you can configure the digital of a protected virtual machine that are located
video integration feature with a CCTV Switch on separate physical servers, but everRun
for added control of the CCTV cameras and treats them as a single Windows environment.
monitors. For detailed configuration instruc-
tions, refer to the DVR/VMS Integration docu-
mentation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
391
The everRun management software easily cre- The following illustration shows a basic ever-
ates a virtual machine into an everRun-pro- Run configuration that contains two Physical
tected virtual machine. By creating an identi- Machines in the same server rack and eAC
cal instance of the P2000 virtual machine on a (everRun Activity Console).
second host, it provides FT-class protection of
the virtual machine. The system administrator
manages this single entity from a separate,
browser-based management console, as indi-
cated in the previous illustration.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
392 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
393
The P2000 system supports two intercom inte- The Intercom Server is defined using the
grations: Zenitel AlphaCom M (AMC 07.60) Commend system software, including con-
and Commend™ (GE300, GE800, and any nection settings and other system parame-
Commend intercom model compatible with the ters. Refer to the manufacturer’s
ICX Protocol Version 1.1/0910) systems. Com- documentation for assistance.
plete intercom hardware installation and opera- If your intercom system supports output
tion instructions are provided with the intercom setting, use the Commend system software
system that was shipped with your option. to configure these outputs, and then add
them to the intercom exchange and station
definition.
Hardware Requirements
The Commend Intercom Server is licensed
Before configuring the P2000 software com- and configured to use a TCP/IP channel.
ponents to control the intercom equipment, You have configured at least two stations
you must ensure that at least basic intercom that can communicate with each other.
hardware components are up and running.
Installation of the intercom equipment must be
made in accordance with the manufacturer’s Intercom System Hardware Verification
instructions.
1. From the Master Station, dial a Sub-Sta-
For Zenitel AlphaCom systems ensure that: tion.
2. Verify that the call is received and that the
The AlphaCom intercom system is opera- Sub-Station name displays on the Master
tional. Refer to the manufacturer’s docu- Station control screen.
mentation for assistance.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
394 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Intercom Configuration
The following sections describe the procedures
to define the parameters used by the P2000
system to communicate with the intercom sys-
tem:
Intercom Exchange
Intercom Stations
Note: For any intercom configuration changes 3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
or deletions to take effect, you must stop and Partition in which this intercom exchange
restart the P2000 Intercom Interface Service is active.
using Service Control; see Starting and Stopping
Service Control on page 432. 4. Select Public if you wish this intercom
exchange to be visible to all partitions.
5. Enter a descriptive Interface Name to
identify the intercom exchange to which
the stations are connected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
395
24-10832-194 Rev. E
396 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
397
24-10832-194 Rev. E
398 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
10. If you are defining a Master Station, select 12. The default Type is Output. In the Address
from the Workstation drop-down list, the field enter the Output address and click
workstation name that controls the Master Add. You may add as many outputs as
Station. needed. If you wish to remove an output
from the list, select the output item and
click Delete.
Note: You can only associate a P2000 work- 13. Click Close to save your settings and
station with one Master Station within an intercom return to the Intercom Station configura-
switch. tion.
14. Click OK. The station name displays under
11. If this is a Commend intercom station, and the Intercom Station root icon.
your intercom system supports output set-
ting, click Outputs. The Commend Out-
puts dialog box opens. Intercom Control
The P2000 Intercom Control window allows
operators to monitor incoming call requests
and to connect with stations or station groups
that are part of the workstation’s exchange. In
facilities that use Commend Intercom systems,
operators can control outputs associated with
the Commend intercom equipment. The Inter-
com Control dialog box allows operators to
sort the list of call requests by request time,
priority, status, or name.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
399
To Control Intercom Stations Time/Date – The date and time when the
call was placed.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Con-
trol>Intercom. The Intercom Exchange Priority – The priority that was set in the
Selection dialog box opens. Intercom Station dialog box.
Status – The status of the selected station,
such as Call Request, On Hold, Idle, Busy,
and so on.
Name – The name of the Sub-Station or
Station Group that is placing the call.
Address – The address assigned to the
Sub-Station or Station that is placing the
call.
3. Select any call in the queue and click Con-
2. Select the intercom exchange you wish to nect. This connects your master intercom
control and click OK. This selection list station to the calling intercom station
only displays in facilities that have more selected.
than one Intercom Exchange defined. The 4. Once connected, you may communicate
Intercom Control dialog box opens at the (talk and listen) with the person at the
Call Queue tab. Sub-Station. You can also perform the fol-
lowing actions:
Push to Talk – Click and hold to talk (not
listen) to the person at the selected calling
station. Release the button to only listen
(not talk) to the person at the Sub-Station.
To return to duplex communication (the
ability to talk and listen without holding
and releasing the button), click the Push to
Talk button without holding it down.
Hold – Disconnects from the calling station
and leaves the call in the queue.
The top right section of the dialog box dis- Disconnect – Disconnects from the calling
plays general information related to the station and removes the entry from the
Master Station. The list box displays the queue.
calls currently in the queue, either from Connect – Selecting another entry in the
Sub-Stations or Station Groups. The fol- queue and clicking Connect performs a
lowing information is shown for each call Hold on the currently connected call.
in the list:
5. Click Exit to close the Intercom Control
dialog box.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
400 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
1. In the Intercom Control dialog box, click 1. In the Intercom Control dialog box, click
the Station tab. the Station Group tab.
The list box displays the Name, Address, The list box displays the Name, Address,
and Priority of the Sub-Station, as well as and Priority of the Station Group.
the current status of the call request and the 2. In the list box, select a station group to
time and date when the change of status which you wish to connect.
took place.
3. Click Connect.
2. In the list box, select a station to which you
wish to connect. 4. You may now communicate with the per-
son at the stations of the Station Group
3. Click Connect. selected. You may also perform the actions
4. You may now communicate with the per- described earlier (Push to Talk, Hold, and
son at the selected station. You may also so on).
perform the actions described earlier (Push 5. Click Exit to close the Intercom Control
to Talk, Hold, and so on). dialog box.
5. If the selected intercom station is associ-
ated with outputs (Commend systems
Controlling Intercom Stations using the
only), select the output from the Output list
Real Time Map
box and click Set Output to activate the
output, or Reset Output to reset the out- The Real Time Map displays the status of
put. intercom stations on a map layout of your
6. Click Exit to close the Intercom Control facility. If an intercom status changes, the Real
dialog box. Time Map shows the state change and the loca-
tion of the intercom device. See Using the Real
Time Map on page 346.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
401
24-10832-194 Rev. E
402 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
In the P2000 Enterprise Configuration, one Once you complete Enterprise Configuration,
P2000 site becomes the P2000 Central Site and you are ready to set up Enterprise parameters
all other P2000 systems within the enterprise within the P2000 software. Follow these basic
become P2000 Regional Sites. procedures:
Each regional site synchronizes its data with Define Enterprise Parameters
the central site. Database replication is imple- Assign Cardholders Enterprise Access
mented using Microsoft SQL Server database Define Global Badge Access Rights
technologies.
“CENTRAL”
Central Site
WAN
“ORANGE” “GREEN”
P2000 P2000
Regional Site 1 Regional Site 3
“BLUE”
P2000
Regional Site 2
24-10832-194 Rev. E
403
Define Enterprise Parameters 7. If you wish to select all sites, click All.
This option allows you to unselect site
Before assigning cardholders access to multi- names individually.
ple sites, you should Define Enterprise Sites,
8. If you wish to clear your selections, click
Define Enterprise Parameters, Define Enter-
None.
prise Time Zones, and Define Enterprise
Access Groups. 9. If you wish to select all sites, click All
sites. This option does not allow editing.
Define Enterprise Sites 10. Click OK to save your settings.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
404 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
405
6. Once the sites are assigned, click OK to 3. Enter the badge number and optional de-
return to the Cardholder window. The scription. For detailed information, see En-
information also displays in the Enterprise tering Badge Information on page 251.
Sites tab located in the center of the win- The Badge dialog box displays the site
dow. name tabs of the sites assigned to this card-
holder. The first tab is always the local site
tab and is used to assign local access privi-
leges. The second tab is the Enterprise tab
and is used to assign global access privi-
leges. Additional tabs show other site
names assigned to the cardholder.
Define Global Badge Access Assigning access privileges is determined
Rights by the following conditions:
Once the cardholder has been assigned to the When you define access to the local site,
selected sites, you may define the security and click Apply Security Options
privileges and access rights using the Badge ‘Enterprise’, the security options
application. defined in the Enterprise tab are applied.
When you define access at a different
To Define Badge Access Rights site, and click Apply Security Options
‘Enterprise’, the security options
1. In the Cardholder window, select a card- defined in the Enterprise tab are applied
holder from the Cardholder list that has to that site.
Enterprise access.
Access Groups and Time Zones can be
2. In the Badge Information box at the bot- accessed for your own site, the Enter-
tom of the Cardholder window, click Add. prise site or for any site within the
The Badge dialog box opens. Enterprise system.
On each site, a maximum of 64 Access
Groups and Time Zones are applicable
(32 local and 32 Enterprise).
The P2000 system only downloads the
maximum number of Access Groups
and Time Zones for each panel type,
giving priority to the local settings.
4. Once the badge access parameters are
defined, click OK to return to the Card-
holder window. This initiates all required
downloads.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
406 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
407
24-10832-194 Rev. E
408 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
3. In the Web Access box, select from the 2. Click the Web Access tab and see the fol-
Menu Permission Group drop-down list lowing Web Access Options Field Defini-
the group that can be assigned to this card- tions for detailed information.
holder. The cardholder may be allowed to 3. Click OK to save the settings and return to
perform any function defined in this per- the System Configuration window.
mission group.
4. In the Password box, enter the password
Web Access Options Field Definitions
that the cardholder can use to log on to the
P2000 Web Access site. Send Email to Request Approvers – If you
5. Click OK to save your settings. select this option, when a cardholder submits a
Web Access request that requires approval, an
email notification is sent to the approvers
Defining Web Access Options defined in the Request Approvers dialog box;
see Defining Request Approvers on page 410.
The P2000 system allows you to set up system
The email message contains a hyperlink to the
wide settings to define how web access
request, which takes the approver directly to
requests are managed. Use the Web Access tab
the Request Approval application, assuming
in Site Parameters to define the default Web
the approver has been assigned with the proper
Access options, approval levels, and process-
Web Access menu permissions. The
ing method for Web Access requests. You can
approver’s email address is defined in the card-
also configure User Authentication parameters
holder record.
to set up directory services for Web Access.
Super User rules override partition rules – If
To Edit Web Access Parameters this option is selected, any approvers defined
in the Super User partition override any
1. From the System Configuration window, approvers defined in specific partitions. If this
select Site Parameters and click Edit. The option is not selected, approvers from the spe-
Edit Site Parameters dialog box opens at cific partition are used.
the General tab.
Expiration Period for Requests – Enter the
number of days after which all Web Access
requests expire. The expiration date is calcu-
lated by adding the number of days entered
here to the initial date when the request is sub-
mitted.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
409
24-10832-194 Rev. E
410 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Depending on settings previously defined in 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select
Site Parameters, each Web Access request may Access>Cardholder. The Cardholder win-
require up to three active approvers. The dow opens.
approver is a cardholder who has been 2. Create a new cardholder record or edit an
assigned Web Request Approval menu permis- existing cardholder record. For detailed
sions. Approvers are ordered in a sequence and instructions, see Entering Cardholder
approve requests in the same order. Information on page 244. The Cardholder
For example, an application requires three Edit dialog box opens.
approvers: John (Level 1), Mary (Level 2), and
Bob (Level 3). When a request is submitted, an
email notification is sent to John, who
approves the request first. After John approves
the request, an email notification is sent to
Mary; then after Mary approves the request, an
email notification is sent to Bob. After Bob
approves the request, the approval process is
complete. Bob never sees requests that are not 3. Enter the Email address that has been
approved by Mary, and Mary never sees assigned to this cardholder and where noti-
requests that are not approved by John. fications are sent to approve Web Access
requests.
Approvers only see requests that are waiting
for their approval and each request waits for a
single approver at any time. When a request
becomes ready for the next approver an email Note: To configure your Email Server, see
EMail Tab on page 44, and also check with your
notification is sent to the approver.
IT department for the required email settings in
If an application requires a single approver, your facility.
after the approver approves the request, the
approval process is complete. 4. Click OK to save your settings.
The approver’s email address for sending noti- 1. In the left pane of the System Configura-
fications is entered in the cardholder record. tion window, expand Site Parameters.
2. Select Request Approvers and click Edit.
The Request Approvers dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
411
24-10832-194 Rev. E
412 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Rule 3 requires one approver for any type of Rule 4 requires one approver for any request
request submitted for the DEFG company submitted, except that new cardholders (rule
(any department), except that new cardhold- 1), new visitors (rule 2), and DEFG company
ers (rule 1) and new visitors (rule 2) will be (rule 3) requests will be approved by the ap-
approved by the approval filters above. proval filters above.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
413
Submitting Requests using Web Note: When using the P2000 operator
Access account/profile user name, make sure the Use
Operator Account / Profile Authentication
The Web Access interface can be accessed option in the Web Access tab of Site Parameters
from any web-ready computer. This section is selected, see page 409.
provides a description of the features available
from Web Access. For detailed information on For systems that use multiple interface
how use this web-friendly interface, refer to styles, the User Name may include the
the Web Access Manual. style name (firstname.lastname@stylename).
Refer to the Web Access Manual for details.
To Log on to Web Access 3. Click Log In. The Welcome page displays.
1. From a web browser, enter the following in
the Address bar, replacing ServerName or
IP Address of the Web Access server:
http://ServerName or IP Address/P2000
or enter the following if the P2000 Server
is configured as a secure server:
https://ServerName or IP Address/P2000
Contact your system administrator for the
correct settings. The P2000 Web Access
Log In page displays.
4. To log out and return to the Log In screen,
click the Log Out link at the upper-right
corner of any Web Access page.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
414 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Allows searching for cardholder records in the Allows users to locate cardholder records
P2000 database. Users may search by card- using various search filters. After performing a
holder name, badge number, ID number, search, Web Access lists the badge ID number,
department, and company. cardholder name, personal identification num-
ber, company, and department of each card-
holder record located in the search; then users
Area Search
can preview, print, and encode a cardholder’s
Allows users to view which cardholders cur- badge by clicking the badge ID number.
rently occupy a specific controlled area in a
facility. A controlled area is a designated sec- Guard Services
tion of a facility, with one or more readers or
input points assigned, with the purpose of These services allow authorized users to per-
reporting on the current whereabouts of card- form several guard-related actions, such as
holders. view, acknowledge, and remove alarms; and
manually control doors and output devices.
In Out Displays
Alarm Monitor
Allows users to see which cardholders are In
or Out of the facility, or specific areas of the P2000 alarms can be monitored, acknowl-
facility, based on their badge activity. If a card- edged, and removed using the Web Access
holder has badged to enter the facility the sta- interface. This feature is useful to monitor
tus is In. If a cardholder has not badged to alarms at unattended sites, allowing authorized
enter the facility, the status is Out. users to acknowledge alarm conditions as soon
as they are reported. Once an alarm is in a
secure state, the user can remove the alarm
Badge Resync
from the queue.
Allows users to manually adjust the status of
their badge if it has been placed in an Command Outputs
out-of-sync state. A badge is out-of sync when
cardholders (that are required to enter and exit Output devices can be manually activated or
an area in sequence using entry and exit termi- deactivated by authorized users to control
nals), badge In at an entry terminal and don’t devices connected to them such as lights,
badge Out at the next badging if, for example, warning indicators or sirens.
they follow another cardholder out without
swiping their badge. In that case, the badge
Door Command
remains in the In state (out-of-sync) and is
denied access the next time they attempt to This feature allows an authorized user to man-
badge back into the area. ually lock or unlock a door (override system
controls) for a specific time. The user is able to
unlock all doors at once or return all doors to
their previous state.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
415
WebBadging Setup
Request Approval
Allows you to download and run the Web-
The approval process provides additional BadgingSetup.exe file, which installs the
security measures by confirming the validity WebUSB application to enable the use of
of a request before the request is presented for USB-compatible badging devices via the
processing. Depending on the settings previ- P2000 Web Access interface. This service
ously defined in Site Parameters (see Defining must be running on the client computer run-
Web Access Options on page 408), up to three ning Web Access or the badging devices can-
authorized users may be required to approve not be controlled.
Web Access requests.
Visitor Management
Add Cardholder
Allows authorized users to request a visitor
This feature allows authorized users to submit badge or request to extend the validation
requests to enter cardholder information into period of a cardholder badge. In addition,
the system. Depending on the permissions users can also view the status of their requests.
assigned, users can enter cardholder related
information such as user-defined fields, jour-
nals, badge information, sponsor information
(if the cardholder is a visitor), or attach a por-
trait to the cardholder record.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
416 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
417
24-10832-194 Rev. E
418 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
7. Select an entry from the queue to pre-fill Middle – Displays the middle name of the visi-
the Visitor and Sponsor fields. Other infor- tor. You may also enter a value to search the
mation related to the selected Visitor, such cardholder database by middle name.
as Request Notes, also display.
Last – Displays the last name of the visitor.
You may also enter a value to search the card-
holder database by last name.
Note: The Found in DB fields indicate whether
or not the P2000 system has identified a match- ID – Displays the ID of the visitor. You may
ing Visitor or Sponsor record in the cardholder also enter a value to search the cardholder
database. A picture also displays, if there is one database by this field.
previously saved for the selected visitor.
Company – Displays the visitor’s Company
8. See the following Visitor Request Manage- name. You may also enter a value to search the
ment Field Definitions for more detailed cardholder database by company name.
information. If the company name does not already exist in
9. When all the information is entered, click the database for the visitor’s assigned partition,
Save to complete the request and save the you are notified upon selecting the visitor
visitor and badge information. The new request in the queue. To add the company
visitor data is also reflected in the Card- name to the P2000 database, click the browse
holder window. button to open the Company window. See
Define Companies and Departments on
10. If you wish to save and print the badge,
page 234 for information on adding a company
click Save and Print (requires the Video
name to the P2000 database.
Imaging application).
11. To process additional visitor requests, click Partition – Displays the partition assigned to
Clear to clear the information on the the visitor. To change the assigned partition,
screen, then select another visitor name select a new one from the drop-down list. If
from the queue or enter the information you change the partition, you may also have to
according to the Visitor Request Manage- reassign the visitor’s company to a company
ment Field Definitions. that belongs to the same partition.
12. If a visitor request is to be rejected, select Notes – Displays the visitor request notes
the name from the queue and click Deny. entered by the requestor.
13. Click Exit to close the Visitor Request Found in DB – Indicates whether or not the
Management dialog box. P2000 system has identified a matching Visitor
record in the cardholder database. If no match
Visitor Request Management Field is identified, click Search to manually search
Definitions for a matching record.
If Found in DB shows Yes, then the existing
Visitor Box visitor record in the P2000 database is updated.
If it shows No, the new visitor is added when
First – Displays the first name of the visitor you click Save.
selected in the queue. You may also enter a
Approved Visits – Displays the number of
value to search the cardholder database by first
approved visits. This field is only valid if the
name.
Found in DB field displays Yes.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
419
Sponsor Box
Note: The Visitor Request Management appli-
cation creates four UDFs: Approved Visits, First – Displays the first name of the person
Most Recent Visit, Second Most Recent Visit, who sponsors this visitor.
and Third Most Recent Visit. These UDFs are
automatically updated and allow you to monitor Middle – Displays the middle name of the per-
the visits associated with the selected visitor. son who sponsors this visitor.
Last – Displays the last name of the person
Search – If the P2000 system did not identify a who sponsors this visitor.
matching Visitor record in the database, you ID – Displays the unique ID assigned to the
may search the database by entering a value in sponsor.
any of the Visitor fields and then clicking
Company – Displays the sponsor’s Company
Search. The Find Visitor dialog box opens dis-
name.
playing the visitor records that match the
entered values. You may also click Search Partition – Displays the partition assigned to
without entering any values to display all visi- the sponsor.
tors in the database. To search for specific Found in DB – Indicates whether or not the
names in the Find Visitor dialog box, enter the P2000 system has identified a matching Spon-
data in any of the fields. You can use wildcards sor record in the cardholder database. If no
such as “?” to replace one character (including match is identified, click Search to manually
a space), or “*” to replace more than one char- search for a matching record.
acter.
Search – If the P2000 system did not identify a
matching Sponsor record in the database, you
may search the database by clicking Search.
The Find Sponsor dialog box opens displaying
the sponsor records that match the entered val-
ues. If no value was entered, all cardholders in
the database are displayed. To search for spe-
cific names, enter the data in any of the fields.
You can use wildcards such as “?” to replace
one character (including a space), or “*” to
replace more than one character.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
420 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
Void Time – Enter the time this badge is auto- Once the Web Access interface styles have
matically voided by the system. Click the spin been created using the instructions provided in
box buttons to select a time. the Web Access Manual, they are available for
assignment via the UIstyle user-defined field
(UDF).
24-10832-194 Rev. E
421
24-10832-194 Rev. E
422 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
423
7. Select from the Sector drop-down list, a 11. If you wish to customize the encoding
sector number from 0 to 15 for the card. details, click Use Data Value, and enter
Each sector can store its own pair of keys the desired data in the Data Value field. If
(A and B). the Data Type is Data, the Data Value must
8. Select from the Data Type drop-down list, be a decimal number string. If the Data
whether the type is Data or Keys. See Type is Keys, the Data Value must be a
page 424 for more details. Hex string.
9. Select from the Block drop-down list, the 12. Click OK to save the encoding details and
block that is assigned to the sector. return to the WebAccess Config dialog box.
Depending on the Data Type selected, each 13. The P2000 system does not allow encod-
sector can contain up to 4 blocks. By ing badges from a Web Access computer
default, block 3 is assigned to any sector unless you click Enable Mifare Encod-
whose Data Type is Keys. See the follow- ing. If you wish to disable badge encoding
ing table for memory organization details. from a Web Access computer, click the
10. If you wish to include a P2000 database check box again to disable it.
field as part of the encoding information, 14. Click OK to save the encoding parameters.
select from the Data Field drop-down list
the desired field.
: :
: :
: :
24-10832-194 Rev. E
424 CHAPTER 4
Advanced Features
24-10832-194 Rev. E
425
T
he P2000 software provides several For example, if a panel or group of panels has
functions to help you maintain your se- been offline for maintenance, you can use
curity management system once it is up Download to update panels with system
and running. These functions are con- changes that occurred while they were down.
sidered non-routine and are typically performed Or, you may need to download data to all pan-
by a system administrator. Some of these func- els after a complete power failure or system
tions can be performed only from the Server. upgrade.
This section includes the following topics: You can download individual items such as a
change in holiday schedule or added card
Downloading Data to Panels events, or you can download all items at once.
Monitoring Downloads
Controlling Smart Download
Controlling P2000 Services TIP: Open the Download Status dialog box to
monitor the records in the download queue as the
Viewing Workstation Status
download takes place.
Viewing System Status
Writing Panel Database to Flash Memory
Updating CK721-A Panels To Download Data to Panels
Updating Mercury Panels 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys-
Performing Database Maintenance tem>Download.
Viewing Request Queue 2. Enter your password if prompted. The
Download dialog box opens.
Downloading Data to Panels
24-10832-194 Rev. E
426 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
3. From the Download To Panels box, select 7. If you wish to reset a Mercury panel before
the panel or panels to which you wish to download, select Panel from the Item To
download data, or click Select All to select Download box (make sure a Mercury panel
all panels in the list. Click None to clear type is selected in the Download To Panels
your selections and reselect the panels box), then click Reset Panel Before
individually. Download option.
4. From the Items To Download box, select the
items you wish to download to the panel or Note: Since the Reset Panel Before Down-
panels, or click Select All to select all items load option is provided to delete all data from the
in the list. Click None to clear your selec- selected panel, you are required to perform a full
tions and reselect the items individually. download to restore the panel’s database. Click
Select All in the Items To Download box to
restore the selected panel’s database.
Note: HID panels go temporarily offline when
a panel download is initiated. Also, when an HID 8. After you make your selections, click
terminal or input configuration is downloaded, Download. The records queued during the
there is a 7 to 8 second window when a card-
download display in the Download Status
holder may gain access, even if the enabled time
zone does not allow it. message box. In large downloads, the num-
ber of items queued may fluctuate if data is
transferred faster than the panels can
Note: On P2000 systems that use HID panels, receive it. This is normal. The download is
the download speed per badge decreases as the complete when the Records Queued
number of badges downloaded increases. returns to 0.
Monitoring Downloads
Note: OSI readers are temporarily disabled
during the download operation and deny access
until the download is completed.
Download Status displays the status of any
items that the system automatically downloads.
5. If you wish to download all badges to a Use this application in conjunction with the
panel and still allow access through a door Download function.
of the panel while being updated, select
Badges from the Items To Download box, To Monitor Download Status
and click to clear Delete Badges From
Panel Before Download. 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys-
tem>Download Status. The Download
Status message box opens.
Note: If the panel being updated contains
badges that should not be there, the system does
not remove them from the panel, unless you
delete those badges before the download.
6. To download elevator data without deleting 2. Drag the Download Status message box to
all elevators from the panel, select Eleva- where it is visible during the download
tors/Cabinets from the Item To Download process. The number of records queued
box, and click to clear Delete Elevators during the download displays as the down-
From Panel Before Download. load progresses.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
427
24-10832-194 Rev. E
428 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
429
24-10832-194 Rev. E
430 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
P2000 Cisco Interface Service – Performs com- P2000 IFC Interface Service – Provides the
munications between the P2000 Server and the communication between the P2000 Server and
Cisco® VMS. It handles host event actions and IFC panels using the BACnet protocol. This
processes alarms from the Cisco system. This service allows the P2000 system to monitor
service is not involved in video playback, and alarms generated by devices connected to IFC
is not supported in this release. panels.
P2000 CK721-A Download Service – Performs P2000 Intercom Interface Service – Provides the
Server downloads going to all CK721-A pan- communication with the Intercom hardware.
els in the system. See Intercom on page 393.
P2000 CK721-A Priority Service – Performs P2000 Intrusion Interface Service – Provides the
CK721-A panel online and offline notifica- communication between the P2000 system and
tions. intrusion panels. This service allows the P2000
system to obtain status information whenever
P2000 CK721-A Upload Service – Performs an intrusion component changes and issues
CK721-A panel uploads to the Server. commands to control the intrusion zones,
P2000 Endura Interface Service – Performs areas, and annunciators that are part of the
communications between the P2000 Server intrusion system.
and the Pelco® Endura™ VMS. It handles P2000 Mercury Interface Service – Provides the
host event actions and processes alarms from interface between the P2000 Server and Mer-
the Pelco Endura system. This interface service cury panels.
uses Pelco API that supports H.264 cameras.
This service is not involved in video playback, P2000 Milestone MIP Interface Service – Per-
and is not supported in this release. forms communications between the P2000
Server and Milestone Interface Protocol (MIP)
P2000 Escalation Service – Performs the alarm XProtect® Corporate and XProtect Enterprise
escalation function to monitor alarms that have VMSes. It handles host event actions and pro-
the escalation option enabled. cesses alarms from the Milestone system. This
P2000 External Trigger Service – Receives mes- service is not involved in video playback.
sages from external systems to be used as P2000 MIS Interface Service – Imports and
P2000 host event triggers. exports data for the MIS Interface. See MIS
P2000 Genetec Security Center Interface Service Interface on page 365.
– Performs communications between the P2000 Muster Control Service – Monitors the
P2000 Server and the Genetec™ Security Cen- status of all muster zones, and when a muster
ter (GSC) VMS. It handles host event actions is initiated, controls all the activities of the
and processes alarms from the GSC system. muster.
P2000 Guard Tour Service – Starts Guard Tour P2000 Nice Interface Service – Performs com-
Service and receives real-time event messages munications between the P2000 Server and the
from RTLRoute services. See Guard Tour on Nice™ VMS. It handles host event actions and
page 374. processes alarms from the Nice system. This
P2000 HID Interface Service – Provides the service is not involved in video playback, and
communication between the P2000 Server and is not supported in this release.
HID panels.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
431
P2000 OnSSI Interface Service – Performs com- P2000 Request Queue Service – Processes
munications between the P2000 Server and the request queue entries into the P2000 database.
OnSSI® VMS. It handles host event actions
and processes alarms from the OnSSI system. P2000 RTL Route Service – Routes all real-time
This service is not involved in video playback, messages to workstations and services. Also
and is not supported in this release. processes host events.
P2000 OPC Proxy Service – Provides the com- P2000 S321-IP Interface Service – Provides the
munication between P2000 applications and communication between the P2000 Server and
certain servers, such as the CCTV Server or S321-IP panels.
the OPC Server.
P2000 SIA Interface Service – Provides the
P2000 OSI Interface Service – Provides the communication with configured SIA devices.
interface between the P2000 system and the
OSI system. P2000 Smart Download Service – Downloads
badges to panels when changes are made to
P2000 Otis Interface Service – Provides the access groups and terminal groups. It also
interface between the P2000 system and the downloads cardholder and badge changes. In
Otis Compass Destination Entry elevator sys- addition, controls badges with temporary
tem. The P2000 Server acts as a message
access.
router for the messages going between the Otis
system and CK721-A panels. P2000 SNMP Trap Receiver Service – Receives
P2000 Periodic Service – Performs periodic SNMP traps from the Metasys system, trans-
tasks such as deleting old history, synchroniz- lates them to the P2000 alarm structure, and
ing time of panels with server, and enabling or sends them to RTL Route Service.
disabling badges based upon badge start and P2000 System Adapter Service – Provides the
void dates. communication between the P2000 Server and
P2000 pivCLASS Interface Service – Provides the P2000 Web UI software to allow access
the communication between the P2000 Server and use of certain P2000 applications via a
and the pivCLASS system with respect to web browser. The System Adapter Service
events generated at the pivCLASS system. transmits system configuration data; as well as
audit, alarm, and transaction messages to be
P2000 Rapid Eye Interface Service – Performs
accessed from the Web UI; and in turn, the
communications between the P2000 Server
P2000 Server receives item actions and alarm
and Honeywell® Rapid Eye® DVRs. It han-
actions performed using the Web UI.
dles host event actions and processes alarms
from the Rapid Eye DVR. This service is not P2000 Watchdog Service – Monitors other
involved in video playback, and is not sup- P2000 services to verify that they are operat-
ported in this release. ing and generates an alarm when a P2000 ser-
P2000 Remote Message Service – Receives vice fails.
messages from the local RTL Route Service
P2000 XmlRpc Interface Service – Provides
and transmits these messages to the remote
communication over the network, using the
P2000 Remote Message Service. When receiv-
XML-RPC interface to communicate with
ing a remote message, the local Remote Mes-
remote devices such as building management
sage Service processes the message and passes
components designed for Metasys system inte-
it on to the local RTL Route Service for distri-
gration, or with Web Access servers.
bution to the local workstations.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
432 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
433
Red – Indicates that all services are Stopped. 3. The list box displays the following infor-
mation for each workstation:
Green – Indicates that all services are Running.
Workstation – Indicates the name given to
Yellow – Indicates that at least one service is the workstation (and the Server).
Running or one service is Stopped.
Logged In – Indicates whether or not the
When you right-click the traffic signal icon, a workstation is currently logged on.
dialog box opens where you can start, stop, User Name – Displays the name of the user
and refresh P2000 services; or open the Ser- logged on at the workstation, if the work-
vice Control dialog box. station is logged on.
Login Date Time – Displays the date and
Note: The procedure to control services at time when the user logged on at the work-
redundancy systems might be different from the station.
steps described here. Refer to your redundancy
documentation for details.
Session Type – Indicates whether this is a
P2000 Thick Client (workstations running
P2000 applications), a P2000 Thin Client
(workstations running Web Access appli-
Viewing Workstation Status cations), a P2000 Web UI (workstations
running P2000 applications using a Web
user interface), a P2000 Web API (work-
An operator can see workstation status infor-
stations running Web API services), or
mation, including the workstation’s P2000
Integration (this option is not used in this
software version installed. This is a dis-
release).
play-only feature, and is helpful to determine
who is in the system, at what workstation, at
what time they logged on, and other parame-
ters associated with the workstation. Note: Limited status information displays for
Web API workstations.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
434 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
435
IMPORTANT: The P2000 Server and its work- Viewing System Status
stations must run the same software version and
service pack. If operators deny an update to their
workstation, the P2000 software may not function The System Status window is a dynamic dis-
correctly. play of the status of panels, associated devices,
and other integration components configured
Required – Force updates all P2000 in the system. This useful troubleshooting tool
workstations in the system. When allows you to quickly determine if panels and
selected, workstations are unable to log connected devices are communicating. If com-
on if they deny a software update. munications go down between the Server and
the panels, the System Status window reports
the last known status of the devices.
Note: After you update the P2000 Server soft- The System Status window is view only. You
ware, the system does not automatically update can manually change the status of a compo-
P2000 workstations (or prompt the operator to nent using features accessed from the Control
install the update) if the workstation operator is
menu. See Perform Operator Controls on
currently logged into the P2000 software. The
operator must log out and log back into the page 290.
P2000 system before the software can be auto-
matically updated (some platforms may require
To Access the System Status Window
users to use the Run as Administrator option
when logging on to the P2000 system for the
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys-
automatic software update to work). To help
avoid mismatched software versions between the
tem>System Status. The System Status
P2000 Server and its workstations, you may per- window opens.
form a Force Logoff command, if needed, to
force the user to log off of a selected workstation;
see page 433 for details.
5. In the Status drop-down list, change the 2. Select a component from the drop-down
update control setting, if necessary. list at the top left of the window. Informa-
6. Click OK. tion for each component is presented start-
ing on page 438.
3. If this is a partitioned system, select the
Partition to which the component belongs.
4. Click Refresh to update the system status
display.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
436 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
437
Reset Time – Click to immediately try a Name – Displays the name of the intrusion
new download connection to this panel. panel.
Counters last cleared – Displays the last Connected – Displays whether the panel is
time you clicked Reset Counters. connected.
Panel avg. clock drift (seconds) – Displays Invalid Vendor Address – Displays whether
the average time difference between the the vendor address of the intrusion panel is
Server and the panel. invalid.
Panel max clock drift (seconds) – Displays Port Opened – Displays whether the intru-
the largest time difference between the sion panel port is open.
Server and the panel.
MainsFailure – Displays whether the main-
Reset Counters – Click to reset the values tenance of the intrusion panel has failed.
to 0.
Battery Low – Displays whether the battery
8. Click Done to close the Panel Details dia- of the intrusion panel is low.
log box and return to the System Status
Battery Test – Displays whether the battery
window. of the intrusion panel is in test.
9. Click Done to close the System Status
Battery Test Fail – Displays whether the
window.
battery of the intrusion panel has failed its
test.
To Display the Status of Aritech
Battery Missing – Displays whether the bat-
Intrusion Panels
tery of the intrusion panel is missing.
1. In the System Status window, select one of Tamper – Displays whether the intrusion
the intrusion components (Intrusion Areas, panel has been tampered.
Intrusion Zones, or Intrusion Annuncia-
3. Click Done to close the Intrusion Panel
tors) from the drop-down list at the top left
Status dialog box.
of the window, the associated intrusion
panel displays.
2. Select the intrusion panel from the list box, To Display the Status of Fire Alarm
then click Panel Details. The Intrusion Panels
Panel Status dialog box opens. 1. In the System Status window, select one of
the fire alarm components (Fire Zone, Fire
Detector, or Fire IO Module) from the
drop-down list at the top left of the win-
dow, the associated fire alarm panel dis-
plays.
2. Select the fire alarm panel from the list
box, then click Panel Details. The Fire
Panel Status dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
438 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
System Status – Reader Terminals When you select Output Terminals, all panels
in the system are listed by name in the Panels
When you select Reader Terminals, all panels column. An icon next to the panel name indi-
in the system are listed by name in the Panels cates the status of the panel.
column. An icon next to the panel name indi-
cates the status of the panel. The output terminals connected to the panels
are displayed in the same row as their panel,
The reader terminals connected to the panels and are listed under the corresponding terminal
are displayed in the same row as their panel, number assigned during configuration. The
and are listed under the corresponding terminal displayed icon indicates the status of the termi-
number assigned during configuration. The nal. When you place the cursor over the termi-
displayed icon indicates the status of the termi- nal icon, a tooltip displays showing the termi-
nal. When you place the cursor over the termi- nal name assigned.
nal icon, a tooltip displays showing the termi-
nal name assigned.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
439
24-10832-194 Rev. E
440 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
Arm – (Aritech) Arms the selected area if at the All intrusion zones associated with the intru-
time that you issue the command the area’s sion panel are displayed in the same row as
state permits it. their panel, and are listed under the corre-
sponding intrusion zone number assigned
Arm – (Bosch) Arms the selected area after a during configuration. The displayed icon indi-
delay, and if the area’s state permits it. cates the status of the intrusion zone. When
you place the cursor over the intrusion zone
Arm – (Mercury) Arms the selected area with a
icon, a tooltip displays showing the intrusion
pre-configured delay.
zone name assigned.You can issue commands
Forced Arm – (Aritech) Arms the selected area for the zones by right-clicking the associated
regardless of the area’s state at the time when status icon. The following commands may be
you issue the command. available, depending on the current state of the
zone:
Forced Arm – (Bosch) Arms the selected area
immediately. Bypass On – Commands the selected zone to
be bypassed.
Disarm – (Aritech and Mercury) Disarms the
selected area. Bypass Off – Turns off bypassing of the
selected zone.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
441
All intrusion annunciators associated with the System Status – Fire Detector
intrusion panel are displayed in the same row
When you select Fire Detector, all fire panels
as their panel, and are listed under the corre-
in the system are listed by name under the Fire
sponding intrusion annunciator number Panel column. An icon next to the fire panel
assigned during configuration. The displayed name indicates the status of the panel.
icon indicates the status of the intrusion
annunciator. When you place the cursor over All fire detectors associated with the fire panel
the intrusion annunciator icon, a tooltip dis- are displayed in the same row as their panel,
plays showing the intrusion annunciator name and are listed under the corresponding fire
assigned.You can issue commands for the detector number assigned during configura-
annunciators by right-clicking the associated tion. You can display the status of up to 20 fire
status icon. The following commands may be detectors per row. If more than 20 fire detec-
available, depending on the current state of the tors are defined, they display in the following
annunciator: rows. The displayed icon indicates the status
of the fire detector. When you place the cursor
Activate – Activates the selected annunciator.
over the fire detector icon, a tooltip displays
Deactivate – Deactivates the selected annunci- showing the fire detector name assigned.
ator.
System Status – Fire IO Module
24-10832-194 Rev. E
442 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
All fire input/output modules associated with The Wireless Parameters display can be sorted
the fire panel are displayed in the same row as by any column by clicking the desired column
their panel, and are listed under the corre- header.
sponding fire input/output module number
assigned during configuration. You can display Green bars indicate that the OSI devices are
the status of up to 20 fire input/output modules operating within acceptable parameters. Yel-
per row. low bars indicate a weakness in the devices
(you may want to investigate further to deter-
If more than 20 fire input/output modules are mine the cause and if corrective action is
defined, they display in the following rows. required). Red bars indicate a fatal breakdown
The displayed icon indicates the status of the in the OSI devices.
fire input/output module.
The display indicates the following status val-
When you place the cursor over the fire ues for each OSI reader:
input/output module icon, a tooltip displays
showing the fire input/output module name Portal Signal Strength and Reader Signal
assigned. Strength – These values indicate the Radio
Frequency (RF) signal level being received by
the portal and reader respectively as measured
System Status – Wireless Parameters in decibel milliwatts (dBm). The signal level is
affected by the distance between the portal and
In addition to the normal Up, Down, or Over-
reader and the type number of obstructions
ride status of OSI devices, you can also verify
between the portal and reader. Walls and doors
status values of OSI devices that are related to
between the portal and reader reduce the signal
the wireless signal they receive. When you
level especially if they contain metal. A signal
select Wireless Parameters, the list box dis-
level of -50 dBm or higher is considered good.
plays the signal strength, packet ratio, and bat-
A signal level of -70 to -50 dBm is considered
tery voltage values that are reported by the OSI
marginal. A signal level of below -70 dBm is
devices.
considered unacceptable and needs to be cor-
These parameters are only updated by the rected to ensure proper operation. Improving
reader about every 30 minutes (to conserve signal strength is a physical installation issue
battery power). The System Status window and is different for every installation. Tech-
automatically refreshes itself approximately niques for improving signal strength include
every 30 seconds. reducing the distance from portal to reader,
moving the portal to a location with fewer
obstructions between it and the reader, install-
ing additional portals, and changing the portal
antenna to a high-gain directional antenna.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
443
Battery Voltage – This value indicates the cur- Unknown – The status of the component has
rent voltage from the reader’s batteries. As the not yet been determined.
batteries are depleted, the reported voltage
drops. Weak batteries can affect the wireless Up – The P2000 system is able to communi-
communication if the reader is seeing low sig- cate with the component.
nal strength or if there is large amounts of Down – The P2000 system is unable to com-
interference. If the voltage drops too low, the municate with the component.
reader shuts down. A voltage of 5.0 volts or
higher is considered good. A voltage of 4.5 to Disabled – The P2000 system has been
5.0 volts is considered marginal and the batter- instructed not to communicate with the com-
ies should be replaced soon. A voltage of ponent.
below 4.5 volts is considered unacceptable and
the batteries must be replaced as soon as possi- Unavailable – The status of the component is
ble or the reader may shutdown. not available.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
444 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
445
24-10832-194 Rev. E
446 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
447
10. After the update process is complete and if If you scheduled functions such as Database
you wish to update another terminal, click Backup or Empty Audit History to occur auto-
Reset to clear the information, select matically, you can use the tasks in Database
another terminal, and then click Update. Maintenance to override the system and per-
11. After the update process is complete, click form manual maintenance.
Done to close the dialog box.
To Perform Database Maintenance
Functions
Note: After a panel version upgrade, open the
Panel Details dialog box in the System Status 1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys-
window to verify the correct panel firmware ver- tem>Database Maintenance. Enter your
sion. password if prompted. The Database
Maintenance dialog box opens.
12. Follow the procedure on page 425 to
download data items to the recently
updated panel.
Performing Database
Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
448 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
449
Empty Download Queue – Purges the actions Item Synchronization – Synchronizes data
from the Download Queue. This queue down- stored and consumed by the Web UI with
loads P2000 data to selected panels. This func- P2000 configuration data, including associated
tion is typically performed when a panel is no status and alarms. See Item Synchronization
longer in use, but the queue still lists down- on page 464.
loads for that panel.
Kill All Reports – Attempts to stop all database
Empty Fire Data – Purges all fire alarm panel queries issued by a P2000 report. This is help-
data from the database. ful if an operator accidentally tries to run an
extreme report, such as all transaction history
Empty Guard Tour Note – Purges all guard tour for the last two years. This action is not guar-
notes from the P2000 database. You can con- anteed to work in all cases.
figure the P2000 system to remove these notes
after a predetermined amount of time; see Load Archive Database from Backup – Loads
Guard Tour Notes on page 387. the data from the Archive Database. This data-
base is used for running P2000 reports.
Empty Saved Muster Data – Purges all muster
data from the database. This data is normally Mark Secondary Tables – Marks the starting
saved to the database for evaluation once a point of FDA data for later analysis.
muster is terminated.
Remove Access Groups from Disabled Badges
Empty Smart Download Queue – Purges the – Removes access groups from disabled
actions from the Smart Download Queue. For badges. This in turn allows the Delete Unused
more information, see Controlling Smart Access Groups command to be used more effi-
Download on page 427. ciently.
Empty Transaction History – Purges the Trans- Remove Expired Access Groups from Badges –
action History data from the database. Trans- Removes from badges any access group
actions indicate some form of system activity. assignment that is past the void day defined in
They can include items like access requests its Temporary Access Period. The void time
and general system messages, such as when a defined in the Temporary Access Period does
panel loses communication with a reader. Typ- not apply.
ically, transactions represent communication
initiated at field panels and sent to the P2000 Reset Counters to Zero – Resets all values in
Server. the Event Counters list to zero. For informa-
tion, see Counting Events on page 340.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
450 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
451
The P2000 system should be backed up on a 1. From the System Configuration window,
regular basis. Backups can be performed using select Site Parameters and click Edit.
several supplied methods, and can be made to The Edit Site Parameters dialog box opens.
any backup device supported by Microsoft 2. Click the Retention Policy tab.
SQL Server.
The following databases are automatically cre- Note: You must use the P2000 server to config-
ated at the P2000 server: ure a backup device where automatic backup files
are saved. Automatic backups (see page 453) are
Pegasys – P2000 configuration data such as performed using host event actions. If your P2000
cardholders and hardware devices. system is deployed on a distributed environment
(the P2000 server is hosted on two separate com-
BadgeImages – Cardholder images. puters), you must use Microsoft SQL Server tools
to define the backup device to use for P2000
JCISecurityConfig – Configuration data and backup functions.
alarms stored and consumed by the Web UI.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
452 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
453
1. From your Windows desktop, select 7. Click Create Backup to start backup. The
Start>Programs>Johnson Controls> progress of the backup process is indicated
P2000>Database Backup. The P2000 and whether there are Success or Failed
Database Backup & Restore dialog box items.
opens. 8. Click View Details to open the Log file.
Automatic Backups
IMPORTANT: Restoring backup files from the You can configure backups as P2000 event
Windows desktop folder is not supported. We
recommend saving your backup files to your local
actions to allow automatic backups, based on a
drive. time setting or any other P2000 event trigger.
See Create Events on page 335 for more infor-
mation. For example, you can program an
5. Click Initialize media on backup if an
event to back up the database (the action)
existing backup should be overwritten or
every Friday at 5:00 P.M. (the trigger).
appended.
6. Click Format the backup files before
creating new if you wish to reformat the Note: You must configure a backup device
(see page 451) to define the location where auto-
existing backup media. matic backup files are saved.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
454 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
455
4. A message displays to confirm that you You must also shut down the P2000 Service
have just completed a backup, which will Monitor application at the Server. Do this by
be archived according to your company right clicking the traffic signal icon located in
policies to meet FDA Part 11 record reten- the system tray (right side of the Windows
tion requirements. Click OK to confirm. taskbar), if it exists, and selecting Quit from
The system updates the Last FDA Backup the menu. You can restart all P2000 communi-
field in the Retention Policy tab of Site cation services and applications after the
Parameters (see page 39), to match the cur- restore process finishes. We recommend that
rent system date. Any FDA Retention Pol- all panels in the system be downloaded imme-
icy alarms will change their alarm status to diately after a database restore; see Download-
Secure. ing Data to Panels on page 425.
5. Click Exit to close the Database Mainte-
nance dialog box.
IMPORTANT: After restoring the P2000 data-
base from a previous version, we recommend
Database Restore using the Load Language Reports function to
load the current reporting format into the data-
Under normal operating conditions, you do not base tables. Be aware that some legacy hardware
need to restore the P2000 databases, but if the configuration items may not be properly reported.
databases are lost, you can restore them from a
recent backup, using the P2000 Database
Backup & Restore application. You can also To Restore the Database
restore an older P2000 database to an archive
1. From your Windows desktop, select
database for the purpose of printing reports or
Start>Programs>Johnson Controls>
examining old settings, without affecting the
P2000>Database Backup. The P2000
currently active P2000 system.
Database Backup & Restore dialog box
opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
456 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
2. Make sure the Restore tab is selected. 12. Click Restore to start the restore process.
3. From the Select Database drop-down list, The progress of the restore process is indi-
select the database you wish to restore. cated and whether there are Success or
Failed items.
4. Click [...] to select the Backup Location
path and backup file name you wish to 13. Click View Details to open the Log file.
restore.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
457
System Validation
As a system administrator, you should sched-
ule validation of your system on a regular
basis to minimize the possibility of record
tampering. The Validate Digital Signature fea-
ture ensures the integrity of all records and
provides evidence when records have been
altered. This function is available if your facil-
ity uses the FDA Part 11 feature. See FDA Part
11 on page 392.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
458 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
459
To be
used
Item Name Value Type during
import to
P2000
1 DOOR LOCATION per Plans & Specs Text No
(Read Only Column) Make changes in
Sales View
2 READER LOCATION per Plans & Specs Text No
(Read Only Column) Make changes in
Sales View
3 Entry Method Selection from a list of: No
Card In
Free Entry
NA
4 Exit Method Selection from a list of: No
NA
Free Egress
Free Egress-Local Alarm
Card Out
REX Motion
REX Motion with Backup Egress Button
REX Motion with Backup Panic Bar
Delayed Egress
Panic Bar
5 Reader Entry_Exit Designation Selection from a list of: Yes
Access
Entry
Exit
6 Logical Terminal # Numeric value between 1 - 64 or Unused (for Yes
CK721A)
Numeric value between 1 - 2 or Unused (for
S321IP)
Note: When “Unused” is entered as a value for
the Logical Terminal #, the data on that row is not
be imported.
7 Hardware Module # (Physical Address) Numeric value between 0 - 31 Yes
8 Reader Terminal Index Numeric value between 1 - 8 Yes
9 Supervisory Controller Part # Selection: Yes
CK721A
S321IP
10 Supervisory Controller RS485 Trunk # Selection: No
(CK722 Only) A
B
NA
11 Supervisory Controller Program Tag Text – Up to 32 characters taken from text pro- Yes
(Panel Name) vided on the import file and must be within the
P2000 system.
12 Supervisory Controller Physical Location Text Yes
13 Supervisory Controller IP Address (Also IP Address format (###.###.###.###) Yes
for S321_IP)
14 Supervisory Controller MAC Address MAC Address format (hh.hh.hh.hh.hh.hh) Yes
15 Door Controller Physical Location Text – Up to 64 characters taken from text pro- Yes
vided on the import file.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
460 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
To be
used
Item Name Value Type during
import to
P2000
16 Door Controller Program Tag Text – Up to 32 characters taken from text pro- Yes
vided on the import file and must be within the
P2000 system.
17 Door Controller Part # Selection: Yes
RDR2SA
RDR8S
S321IP
18 Access Group Text – List of access group names separated by Yes
semicolon (;). Each name can be up to 32 char-
acters.
19 Time Schedule Text – Up to 32 characters taken from text pro- Yes
vided on the import file.
20 Card Type Text – Selection of the following card types, sepa- Yes
rated by semicolons (;), S321-IP supports one
card type and CK721-A supports multiple card
types.
CK721-A: Standard Wiegand, Encrypted Wie-
gand, Binary BaFe, Mag Stripe, Invert Data, PIN
Only, Card ID, HID Corporate 1000, BCD BaFe,
26-bit Wiegand Inverted, Eyecam-Prox-Indala,
PIN + Card ID, 26 bit Sensor Forward, 26 bit Sen-
sor Reverse, 32 bit Motorola, <Custom> name of
the first 8 CK721-A card formats defined in the
database. FASC-N and UUID card types are not
supported with the Data Import and Export fea-
ture.
S321-IP: HID Corporate 1000, Cardkey Stan-
dard, Cardkey Magstripe, Sensor 26 Bit, Raw 128
Bit (requires number of bits to use), <Custom>
card formats defined in the database.
21 Metasys Interlock Text No
22 P2000 Map Reference Text No
23 Door Template Packages Text No
24 Comments Text No
25 Facility Code 1 Numeric Text for CK721-A. Ignored for S321IP. Yes
26 Facility Code Type 1 Selection for CK721-A: Wiegand, N-Crypt, Mag Yes
Stripe, Custom. Ignored for S321IP.
Note: Item 10 to be used in future release.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
461
24-10832-194 Rev. E
462 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
Each item is associated with one of the fol- 3. Click Commit to save the evaluated data
lowing icons to indicate the validity of the into the P2000 database. At the verification
imported data. message, click Yes if you wish to perform
the import operation. You cannot reverse
this action. Only the records without errors
or warnings are saved. Verify that:
the Real Time List displays audit mes-
sages associated with this operation
The right frame displays error or warning the System Configuration displays the
messages associated with a selected item. new panels and terminal names
The Status box displays the following the System Status shows the status of
information: the panels and terminals
Record Count – Indicates the number of
records read from the import file or P2000 Note: When importing S321-IP panels, the
database. P2000 S321-IP Interface Service automatically
restarts after you click Commit.
Error Count – Indicates the number of
errors found in the import file.
4. Click Save if you wish to save all mes-
Warning Count – Indicates the number of sages into a log file. See Saving the Log
warnings found in the import file. File on page 463 for details.
5. The Cancel button stops the processing of
Note: These counts display the total number of the specific task. For example, if you click
errors and warnings associated with the evalu- Cancel while evaluating, this action causes
ated data displayed in the in the left frame. You all evaluated data to be lost. Cancelling the
may have to expand each parent item to identify Save Log operation simply stops writing to
each error or warning. the log file. Cancelling the Commit opera-
tion stops saving the records, but does not
roll back any of the saved data and requires
re-evaluation of the import file.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
463
24-10832-194 Rev. E
464 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
Evaluating Exported Data You can run this tool from the P2000 server or
workstation to add P2000 data that does not
The Results window provides additional secu- exist in the Web UI, update P2000 data that
rity by letting you verify all records before already exists in the Web UI, or remove data
they can be exported to an external system. from the Web UI that no longer exists in the
You can review identified problems and decide P2000 database. This ensures data shared by
whether you wish to proceed with the opera- both systems is simultaneously updated with
tion or address any of the identified issues. current changes initiated by the P2000 system.
1. After you click Run in the CK721-A/
S321-IP Import and Export dialog box, the Note: To run Item Synchronization on a work-
Results window opens. station, you must install SSL Certificate of Server
on the workstation.
2. Click Evaluate to retrieve CK721-A or
S321-IP panel related records from the
We recommend you run the Item Synchroniza-
P2000 database.
tion tool under special circumstances, such as:
The export process starts by validating the
after upgrading your P2000 system to use
data before it is exported to an external
the P2000 Web UI for the first time
system. Once the evaluation is completed,
the Results window opens displaying infor- if the P2000 database has been restored, or
mation associated with the exported data. if the Web UI configuration database has
3. Click Commit to save the evaluated data been restored
into the selected export file (if the export Make sure the P2000 System Adapter Ser-
file name exists, it is overwritten). At the vice is up and running, see Starting and Stop-
verification message, click Yes if you wish ping Service Control on page 432.
to perform the export operation. You can-
not reverse this action. The P2000 software provides two synchroniza-
tion methods:
4. Click Exit to close the window.
Fast – All items in the following list, and that
are affected by audit messages are synchro-
Item Synchronization nized starting on the date selected.
The Item Synchronization tool allows you to CK721-A panels, terminals, input and
synchronize data stored and consumed by the output points
Web UI with P2000 configuration data, includ- Mercury panels, terminals, input and
ing associated status and alarms. Only opera- output points
tors that belong to the Super User partition can
S321-IP panels, terminals, input and
run this tool.
output points
AV switches and cameras
Fire servers, detectors, IO modules,
Note: The P2000 Web UI is a web-based soft-
ware from Johnson Controls that allows autho-
zones, and devices
rized users to access and use certain P2000 SNMP objects
applications via a web browser. Host events
Event counters
Intrusion components
24-10832-194 Rev. E
465
Fast synchronization also updates status 4. If not already selected, click the Fast tab.
changes associated with panels, terminals, 5. Click the SyncConfig From Date Time
inputs, outputs, intrusion, and fire alarms. down arrow and select a specific date after
Detailed – Only selected items are synchro- which data stored and consumed by the
nized. You can select specific items, such as Web UI is synchronized with P2000 data.
panels, terminals, inputs, outputs and so on, to
synchronize only those items selected.
Note: Select a day or time before you enter a
P2000 item. For example if you enter an item on
Note: The synchronization is supported only 09/23/2015, select 09/22/2015.
one way – only the database used by the Web UI
is synchronized and not the P2000 database, 6. Click Synchronize, then click OK when
which is the master database. prompted. The process may take several
minutes. The progress bar shows the prog-
ress of the synchronization process. If you
To Perform a Fast Item Synchronization
wish to cancel the process, click Cancel.
1. From the P2000 Main menu, select Sys-
tem>Database Maintenance. Enter your
password if prompted. The Database Note: The Cancel button is available after you
Maintenance dialog box opens. click the Synchronize button, and is only used to
cancel the process, and not to close the window.
2. Select Item Synchronization from the
Maintenance Action list.
7. When the synchronization process is com-
3. Click Perform. At the verification mes- plete, click OK and close the Item Syn-
sage, click Yes if you wish to perform the chronization dialog box. Data stored by the
synchronization operation. You cannot Web UI is now updated with P2000 con-
reverse this action. The Item Synchroniza- figuration data.
tion dialog box opens.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
466 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
467
Status – Displays one of the following: First Name – Displays the first name of the
cardholder specified in the request.
Cancelled – The request was cancelled
before being processed. 2. To display the details of a specific request,
select the line item in the list box and click
Committed – The request has been com-
View. See Viewing Request Details on
pleted.
page 469.
Error – There is an error in the request.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
468 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
3. To cancel a specific request, select the line 2. Enter a Sender name to view only requests
item in the list box and click Cancel; then that were originated from that source.
click Yes to confirm. 3. Select from the Status drop-down list the
4. To update the Request Queue View list box specific request status you wish to view.
with new data, click Refresh. For example, you may want to review only
5. To search for specific requests, click Filter requests that have been rejected or requests
and follow the instructions provided at the that require manual processing.
end of this section. 4. To view requests submitted for a specific
6. Click Done to close the Request Queue cardholder, enter the First Name or Last
View dialog box. Name of that cardholder.
5. To view requests that were submitted
during a specific period, select a Begin
Searching Specific Requests Date and End Date. You may also enter a
The Request Queue View application allows specific time if needed.
you to define filters to help you locate specific 6. In the Type drop-down list, select whether
requests quickly and easily, and in that way you wish to view requests that are cur-
reduce the number of requests displayed on rently on Queue or requests that are
screen. You can define, for instance, a filter to archived in the History table.
show only requests that were submitted on a 7. In the Max Count field, enter the number
specific date and that are waiting for manual of records you wish to display in the list.
processing.
8. Click OK to begin the search. The Request
1. In the Request Queue View dialog box, Queue View dialog box opens showing the
click Filter. The Filter dialog box opens. If requests that meet the filter criteria and the
you leave an asterisk (*) in a field, the filter number of requests found.
criteria includes all records for that field.
9. To display the details of a specific request,
select the line item in the list box and click
View. See the next section Viewing
Request Details.
10. To restore the list to display all requests,
you can either close and then open the
Request Queue View dialog box, or click
Filter and select to display all requests.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
469
Filter Criteria
Requests
matching the
Filter Criteria
24-10832-194 Rev. E
470 CHAPTER 5
System Maintenance
24-10832-194 Rev. E
471
T
he P2000 Report feature gives you Using P2000 Standard
access to system data. Whether you
want a printout of cardholder informa-
Reports
tion or a list of specific system transac-
tions, there is most likely a P2000 standard P2000 standard reports provide the fields you
report that can meet your needs. P2000 stan- need to generate reports on system databases
dard reports are created using SAP® Crystal and activities. When you run a report, the
Reports® and can be sorted to produce the data report displays on a SAP Crystal Reports pre-
you need. See page 474 for a complete list of view window. You can use the options in the
these reports, a brief description of each, and toolbar at the top of the window to scroll
how to use them. Also, later in this chapter you through pages of the report, resize the window,
can find some commonly used reports, includ- or search for a specific record.
ing samples of each.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
472 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
24-10832-194 Rev. E
473
Go to
Export Report
next page
Go to
last page
Print
Report Go to
previous page Stop
Loading
24-10832-194 Rev. E
474 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
P2000 Standard Report To get the fullest benefit of this powerful fea-
ture, we recommend you read through the
Definitions entire list to get a complete understanding of
what is available.
Following is a list of all P2000 standard reports
Access Group – Lists all terminals, terminal
along with a brief description of each default
groups, floor groups, and door groups by
configuration. Any time you select an asterisk
access group.
(*) in a field, the report includes all records for
that field. Some reports provide options to fil- Access Template – Lists the details of all
ter and limit the search, and some present access templates created in the system.
check boxes listing all available values for a
field, allowing you to select multiple items. Alarm Activity - Simple – Lists alarm activities
in a simpler format than the Alarm Activity
If you use the Partition feature, report data is Log report. You can list all alarm activities or
restricted to the partition selected from the Run select specific alarm category, type, descrip-
Report window. However, some reports ignore tion, associated alarm item; as well as date and
the partition selected and may report data time beginning and ending periods.
across all partitions, unless you select a spe-
cific partition name within the specific report Alarm Activity Log – Lists all alarm activities,
to limit the data. or you can select specific alarm category, type,
description, associated alarm item; as well as
In addition, when running any of the audit, date and time beginning and ending periods.
alarm, or transaction history reports, you have
the option of selecting to report transactions at Alarm History – Lists all alarm history in the
your local site or you can enter the name of the system or you can select specific alarm cate-
remote site that you want to report on. gory, type, description, associated alarm item;
as well as date and time beginning and ending
Preprocessed reports display current data. Any periods. See an example of this report in the
changes made to database items in a Prepro- Selected Sample Reports section.
cessed report are not reflected until the follow-
ing day, unless you manually update the report Alarm History - Input Point – Similar to the
table using the Update Preprocessed Report Alarm History report, except that it only dis-
tables task in Database Maintenance; see plays panel input point alarms, and groups
page 447. them together by their associated terminal, fol-
lowed by input point. The alarms are listed for
Also, report names that start with RAW are each input point chronologically. This report
duplicates of existing reports, with the differ- allows users to see a list of alarms and state
ence that these RAW reports have been format- changes for the input points that are configured
ted to be exported into an Excel spreadsheet. in the system.
The preview window for these reports may not
display correctly, but the resulting Excel Alarm Instruction – Lists all alarm instructions
spreadsheet contains valid data. and associated text created in the system.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
475
Alarm Response Text – Lists all response text All Cardholders to Floor/Door - Preprocessed –
created in the system. Lists all cardholders and the floors or doors
assigned to each.
All Access Groups to Door – Lists all access
groups and the door terminals assigned to All Cardholders to Floor/Door Group - Prepro-
each. cessed – Lists all cardholders and the floor or
door groups assigned to each.
All Access Groups to Elevator/Cabinet – Lists
all access groups and the elevators or cabinets All Cardholders to Terminal Group - Prepro-
assigned to each. cessed – Lists by terminal group all cardhold-
ers that have access to that terminal group.
All Access Groups to Floor/Door – Lists all
access groups and the floors or doors assigned All Cardholders to Timezone – Lists by time
to each. zone all cardholders assigned to that time
zone.
All Access Groups to Floor/Door Group – Lists
all access groups and the floor or door groups All Cardholders with Executive – Lists the
assigned to each. names of all cardholders with executive privi-
leges.
All Access Groups to Terminal Group – Lists all
access groups and the terminal groups All Doors to Cardholder - Preprocessed – Lists
assigned. by cardholder name all doors and access
groups assigned to the cardholder.
All Areas to Cardholder - Preprocessed – Lists
by cardholder name, all areas the cardholder All Elevator/Cabinet to Cardholder - Prepro-
can access, and the terminal doors defined for cessed – Lists by cardholder name the eleva-
the area. tors or cabinets assigned to the cardholder.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
476 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
All Terminal Groups to Door – Lists by terminal Cardholder Last Badge – Locates a cardholder
group the terminals (doors) assigned to each by last badging at a terminal (door).
group.
Cardholder Transaction History – Lists transac-
Area Configuration – Lists by area name, all tion history by cardholder, including issue
configuration information entered in the Area level and timed override parameters. You can
Configuration dialog box. select specific cardholder, badge number, ter-
minal, history type, elevator or cabinet transac-
Area Control – Lists the cardholders currently tions, begin and end dates and times.
in the area, including the total number of card-
holders for each count mode. Cardholder Transaction History - Simple – This
report is similar to the Cardholder Transaction
Area Transaction – Lists all transactions per- History report, except that it is presented in a
formed in the system for the specific area. simpler format.
Audit – Lists by operator name the menu items Cardholders - Preprocessed – Lists by card-
selected by that operator during the date and holder all personal and system information,
time period selected. including badge numbers, access groups, card
Auto-badge Number – Lists the number and sta- options, time zones, and so on. See an example
tus of the badges that were created using the of this report in the Selected Sample Reports
AutoBadge Management feature. section.
AV Camera – Lists all audio visual cameras and Cardholders - Preprocessed - with UDF – This
their associated configuration. report is similar to the Cardholders - Prepro-
cessed report, except that it lists any User
AV Dry Contact – Lists all audio visual dry con- Defined Fields (UDFs) entered for that card-
tact relays and their configuration. holder.
AV Input Point to Camera – Lists all audio Cardholders - Simple - Preprocessed – This is a
visual input to camera mappings and their con- simplified version of the Cardholders - Prepro-
figuration. cessed report that displays basic cardholder
information.
AV Monitor – Lists all audio visual monitors
and their associated configuration. Cardholders - Simple - Preprocessed - with UDF
– This report is similar to the Cardholders -
AV Summary – Lists by name all audio visual Simple report plus any UDFs entered for the
items defined in the CCTV/AV Configuration cardholder.
window.
Cardholders with Web Access - Preprocessed –
AV Switch – Lists all audio visual switches and Lists the cardholders that have been assigned
their associated configuration. with menu permissions to perform Web Access
Cardholder Entry–Exit Status – Lists cardholder functions.
information, the entry/exit times, and status of Cardholders without Badges – Finds all card-
the badge. This is useful to review cardholder holders in the system without badges assigned.
movement throughout the facility. See an example of this report in the Selected
Sample Reports section.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
477
CCTV Camera – Lists all CCTV cameras and Holiday – List all holidays configured in the
their associated configuration. system.
CCTV Monitor – Lists all CCTV monitors and Hours on Site – Lists a detailed report of a
their associated configuration. cardholder’s accumulated number of hours
present at a site.
CCTV Summary – Lists by name all CCTV
items defined in the CCTV/AV Configuration Hours on Site - Simple – Lists a summary
window. report of a cardholder’s accumulated number
of hours present at a site.
CCTV Switch – Lists all CCTV switches and
their associated configuration. Input Group – Lists by input group the associ-
ated input points and panels.
Disabled Cardholders and Badges – Lists all
cardholders that have been disabled or have Input Point – Lists by input point all configura-
disabled/inactive badges. tion information entered in the Input Point dia-
log box for all input points.
Elevator/Cabinet Configuration – Lists by ele-
vator or cabinet name all configuration infor- Input Point Disable/Suppressible – Lists all
mation entered in the Elevator or Cabinet Con- input points in the system that are disabled or
figuration dialog box for all elevators or suppressed.
cabinets.
Message Filter – Lists by message filter name
Elevator/Cabinet Transaction – Lists all trans- all the filtering information entered in the
actions performed in the system for the speci- Message Filter Configuration dialog box for
fied elevator or cabinet name. all message filters.
Events – Lists by event name all configuration Message Filter Group – Lists by message filter
information entered in the Configure Events group the message filters associated with the
dialog box, including event trigger and action message filter group.
information.
Message Forwarding – Lists the workstation
Floor/Door Group – Lists all elevator floor or names from where and to where all current
cabinet door groups and the floor or door messages are forwarded.
masks assigned to each group.
Muster Analysis – Displays by group type the
Floor/Door Mask – Lists all elevator floor or list of personnel who are within a muster zone
cabinet door masks and the floors or doors in the specified time frame, and whether it was
assigned to each. a drill or real emergency.
Floor/Door Name – Lists all elevator floors or Mustering Configuration – Lists by muster zone
cabinet doors and the floor or door numbers name, all the zone definition configuration, as
and names assigned to each. set up in the Muster Zone Definition dialog
box.
Hardware Up/Down Status – Lists the name and
status of all operating hardware. Operator – Lists all operator information
entered in the Edit Operator dialog box.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
478 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
Operator Permissions – Lists the permissions Terminal – Lists by terminal name all terminal
assigned to each operator. configuration as set up in the Terminal dialog
box.
Output Group – Lists by output group the asso-
ciated output points and panels. Terminal Groups – Lists by terminal group the
terminals associated with the terminal group.
Output Point – Lists by output point all config-
uration information entered in the Output Point Terminal Unshunted – Lists all terminals with a
dialog box for all output points. shunt time of zero.
Panel – Lists all panels in the system with their Time Zone – Lists all time zones configured for
associated configuration as set up in the Panel the system.
dialog box. See an example of this report in the
Selected Sample Reports section. Tour Configuration – Lists by tour name, all
tour definition configuration, as set up in the
Panel Card Event – Lists by panel card event Guard Tour Definition window.
name all panel card event details configured
for the system. Tour Notes – Lists all the tour notes assigned to
a specific tour name, as set up in the Guard
Remote Server – Lists all remote servers in the Tour Control window.
system with their associated configuration, as
set up in the P2000 Remote Server dialog box. Tour Transaction History – Lists all tour trans-
actions performed in the system.
Security Level Ranges – Lists the security lev-
els defined in the Security Level Range Editor Transaction History – Lists all transactions per-
dialog box. formed in the system. See an example of this
report in the Selected Sample Reports section.
Site Parameters – Lists the details of the cur-
rent site parameters as set up in System Con- Unused Active Badges – Displays a list of
figuration. active badges that have not been used during
the specified period of time.
Station – Lists by workstation all workstation
configuration. Verification – Allows for a verification of the
commissioning process by providing a list of
all hardware to be checked off by the contrac-
tor. This list includes a list of all panels in the
system and their associated terminals, inputs,
and outputs.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
479
24-10832-194 Rev. E
480 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
The report displays the information according The alarm is in the Alarm state and is Pending,
to the options that you selected in the Alarm that is, it has not yet been acknowledged.
History dialog box. The report filter options When the alarm is acknowledged, the report
selected for reporting display just under the shows that as another date and time-stamped
report title. The results of the report query record, with the alarm status as Acknowledged,
begin in the next section. In the example, the and the Operator Name of the person who
first record shows an alarm that came in on acknowledged the alarm. The Operator Site
11/24/2014 at 10:52:01 A.M. displays the site name from where the operator
handled the alarm.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
481
24-10832-194 Rev. E
482 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
24-10832-194 Rev. E
483
Run the Cardholders without Badges 2. Select a First or Last name to limit the
Report report to a specific cardholder, or select (*)
to show all cardholder records.
The Cardholders without Badges report is use-
ful to locate cardholders who have no access 3. Select a Cardholder Type.
badges. A popular use is to locate cardholder 4. Click OK. Select a printer name and any
records that were not deleted when badges other information for the printer to be
were removed. used. See your system administrator if you
need more information, or refer to your
1. In the Run Report list, double-click Card- Microsoft Windows documentation.
holders without Badges. The Cardholders
without Badges dialog box opens. 5. Click OK. The Cardholder without Badges
report displays in the preview window.
You can use the arrows at the top of the
window to scroll forward and back through
the pages; resize the window for the best
display, and print all or single pages of the
report.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
484 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
Run the Panel Report 2. Select a Panel Name to limit the report to
a specific panel, or select (*) to show all
The Panel Report lists by panel name the com- panel records.
plete panel configuration for each panel in the
system. Or you can select a specific panel to 3. Click OK. Select a printer name and any
report only that panel’s configuration. other information for the printer to be used.
See your system administrator if you need
1. In the Run Report list, double-click Panel. more information, or refer to your Micro-
The Panel dialog box opens. soft Windows documentation.
4. Click OK. The Panel report displays in the
preview window. You can use the arrows at
the top of the window to scroll forward and
back through the pages, resize the window
for the best display, and print all or single
pages of the report.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
485
Run the Transaction History Report 2. By default, the system displays the local
Site name. If you wish to run the report on
One of the most commonly used reports in the transactions that were originated at a
system is the Transaction History report. This remote site, select from the drop-down list
report can list every transaction in the system, the name of the remote site.
or be filtered to list by specific Site, Partition,
Terminal, Transaction Type, History Type, 3. If your system is partitioned, select a spe-
specific Dates and Times, and any combina- cific Partition name, or select (*) to gather
tion of these. The options available for selec- data from all partitions.
tion depend on the transaction type selected. 4. Select a specific Transaction Type to
report on only one transaction type in the
1. In the Run Report list, double-click Trans- system, or select <all> to report on all
action History. The Transaction History transaction types.
dialog box opens.
5. Select a History Type. History types avail-
able from the drop-down list depend on the
selection in the Transaction Type field.
6. If available for selection, select a specific
Terminal to limit your search.
7. Select a Begin and End date for the trans-
actions you wish to see.
8. Select a Begin and End time for the trans-
actions you wish to see.
9. Click OK. Select a printer name and any
other information for the printer to be
used. See your system administrator if you
need more information, or refer to your
Microsoft Windows documentation.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
486 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
24-10832-194 Rev. E
487
24-10832-194 Rev. E
488 CHAPTER 6
System Reports
24-10832-194 Rev. E
489
T
his section lists all Trigger Categories, AV Dry Contact Alarm – Triggers when the sys-
Trigger Types, Trigger Conditions, and tem creates or acts upon an Audio Visual Dry
Event Action Types available for Event Contact alarm.
configuration. For more information,
see Create Events on page 335. AV Motion Alarm – Triggers when the system
creates or acts upon an Audio Visual Motion
To ensure that your events work properly, we alarm.
strongly recommend that you verify if the
events you define work as you expected. Some AV System Alarm – Triggers when the system
event triggers and actions that use hardware creates or acts upon an Audio Visual System
values such as panels, terminals, inputs, or out- alarm.
puts, may not be available if your hardware AV Video Loss Alarm – Triggers when the sys-
does not support the associated functions. For tem creates or acts upon an Audio Visual
example, the Badge trigger type Panel Card Video Loss alarm.
Event Activated is only available for CK721-A
panels, whereas a Security Level action cate- Event Alarm – Triggers when the system cre-
gory is only available with panels that support ates or acts upon an Event alarm.
the Security Level feature, such as CK721-A
and S321-IP. Before programming your system FDA – Triggers when the system creates or acts
events, see Appendix C: Panel Comparison upon an FDA alarm.
Matrix for the features supported by each panel Fire Detector – Triggers when the system cre-
type, and also refer to the instructions provided ates or acts upon a fire detector alarm.
with your hardware type to ensure that the trig-
gers and actions are available to you. Fire I/O Module – Triggers when the system cre-
ates or acts upon a fire Input/Output module
alarm.
Trigger Types
Fire Zone – Triggers when the system creates
or acts upon a fire zone alarm.
Category: Alarm
Guard Tour – Triggers when the system creates
Any Alarm – Triggers when the system creates or acts upon a Guard Tour alarm.
or acts upon any alarm.
Inputs – Triggers when the system creates or
Area – Triggers when the system creates or acts acts upon an Input alarm.
upon an Area alarm.
Integration Component – Triggers when the
AV Behavior Alarm – Triggers when the system system creates or acts upon an Integration
creates or acts upon an Audio Visual Behavior Component alarm.
alarm.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
490 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
24-10832-194 Rev. E
491
24-10832-194 Rev. E
492 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
Invalid PIN Code – Triggers when the card- Valid & Unauthorized Access – Triggers when
holder enters an invalid PIN code. the badge presented at the reader is valid, but
the door remains locked because further autho-
Invalid Reader – Triggers when the badge pre- rization (for example, by the guard) is
sented has no access rights assigned to the required.
reader.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
493
File – Triggers when an external input in the Fire IO Module Disabled – Triggers when the
form of an ASCII file has been sent to the fire Input/Output module enters the disabled
P2000 system to trigger a host event. state.
RS232 – Triggers when an external input in the Fire IO Module Enabled – Triggers when the
form of an RS232 serial message has been sent fire Input/Output module enters the enabled
to the P2000 system to trigger a host event. state.
TCPIP – Triggers when an external input in the Fire IO Module Pre Alarmed – Triggers when
form of a TCP/IP message has been sent to the the fire Input/Output module enters the pre
P2000 system to trigger a host event. alarmed state.
Fire Detector Troubled – Triggers when the fire Fire Panel Troubled – Triggers when the fire
detector enters the trouble state. panel is in trouble state.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
494 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
Conditions
Conditions
Date (steady state)
Date (steady state)
Day of the Month
Day of the Month
Day of the Week
Day of the Week
Input Point Name
Fire Zone Name
Input Point Number
Month
Month
Time
Panel Name
Terminal Index
Category: Inputs Terminal Name
Time
Input Goes Open (transition) – Triggers when Timezone Active
the state of an input point has changed to open.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
495
24-10832-194 Rev. E
496 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
24-10832-194 Rev. E
497
Open (steady state) – Triggers when the intru- Operator Logoff – Triggers when an operator
sion zone enters the open state. Use this trigger has logged off from the workstation.
in combination with other triggers.
Operator Logon – Triggers when an operator
Open (transition) – Triggers when the intrusion has logged on to the workstation.
zone enters the open state.
Conditions
Tampered (steady state) – Triggers when the
intrusion zone enters the tampered state. Use Date (steady state)
this trigger in combination with other triggers. Day of the Month
Tampered (transition) – Triggers when the Day of the Week
intrusion zone enters the tampered state. Month
Operator
Time
Conditions
Mustering Stop – Triggers when Mustering Output Is Set (steady state) – Triggers when an
stops at a specified zone. output is in set state. Use this trigger in combi-
nation with other triggers.
Conditions
Conditions
Zone Name
Date (steady state)
Day of the Month
Category: Operator Day of the Week
Invalid Logon – Triggers when there has been Month
an attempt to log on with an invalid user name Output Point Name
or password. Output Point Number
Panel Name
Logon Disabled – Triggers when an operator Terminal Index
has been inactive at the workstation for a spec- Terminal Name
ified period of time and has been automatically Time
logged off. Timezone Active
24-10832-194 Rev. E
498 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
Note: HID panels may trigger multiple times for System Facility Code Error – Triggers when a
a single event. badge presented at the reader has an invalid
facility code.
Input Terminal Goes Down (transition) – Trig- Terminal Auxiliary Access – Triggers when a
gers when an input terminal state has changed Request to Exit input point activation allows a
to down. door to open without generating a forced door
Input Terminal Goes Up (transition) – Triggers alarm.
when an input terminal state has changed to Timed Override Disabled – Triggers when a
up. timed override has been manually disabled.
Input Terminal Is Down (steady state) – Triggers Timed Override Disabled Host – Triggers when
when an input terminal is down. Use this trig- a timed override has been manually disabled
ger in combination with other triggers. from the host.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
499
24-10832-194 Rev. E
500 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
24-10832-194 Rev. E
501
Camera Pattern Stop – Deactivates the cam- Download All Terminals – Downloads all
era’s pattern. defined terminals to the selected panel.
Camera Preset – Activates the camera’s preset Download All Time Zones – Downloads all
action. defined time zones to the selected panel.
Monitor Camera – Displays the image from a Download All to All Panels – Downloads all
particular camera on the monitor. defined access groups, badges, input and out-
put points, terminals, time zones, card events,
Monitor Sequence Play – Displays a sequence holidays, and soft alarms to all panels.
of camera images on the monitor.
Download All to Panel – Downloads all defined
Monitor Sequence Stop – Stops the display of a access groups, badges, input and output points,
sequence of camera images on the monitor. terminals, time zones, card events, holidays,
Switch Alarm Play – Activates the alarm switch. and soft alarms to the selected panel.
Switch Alarm Stop – Deactivates the alarm Download Card Events – Downloads all
switch. defined card events to the selected panel.
Switch Auxiliary Play – Activates the auxiliary Download Holidays – Downloads all defined
switch. holidays to the selected panel.
Switch Auxiliary Stop – Deactivates the auxil- Download Panel – Downloads panel informa-
iary switch. tion to the selected panel.
Switch Macro Play – Activates a set of pro- Download Soft Alarms – Downloads all defined
grammed steps that the switch can perform. soft alarms to the selected panel.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
502 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
Create Alarm Unique – Creates a unique alarm Display Message – Displays a predefined
and sends it to the Alarm Monitor using an instruction text message at the selected work-
alarm instruction text as the description and a station.
specified alarm category. Click the shortcut but-
ton to edit Alarm Options for the selected Execute Application – Starts an application at
Alarm Category. Make sure this action does not the workstation selected.
activate the trigger associated with this event. Execute Server Process – Starts a configured
Decrement Counter – Decrements the value of process. The process is started on the server
the selected counter. and runs in the security context of the RTL
Route service. The process does not have
Delete All Visitor Badges – Deletes all visitor access to the Windows desktop.
badges in the system.
Increment Counter – Increments the value of
Delete All Visitors – Deletes all visitors and the selected counter.
their badges in the system.
Message Filter – Adds or removes a specified
Delete Associated Badge – Deletes the badge Message Filter to (or from) the selected Mes-
associated with the message that triggered the sage Filter Group. This action only deletes fil-
event. ters that have been Auto Added by another
event. It never deletes the original filters con-
Delete Associated Cardholder – Deletes the figured for this group.
cardholder and the badges associated with the
message that triggered the event. Message Filter Group – Adds or removes a
specified Message Filter Group to (or from)
Delete Associated Visitor – Deletes the visitor the selected Message Filter Group. This action
and the badges associated with the message only deletes filters that have been Auto Added
that triggered the event. by another event. It never deletes the original
Delete Associated Visitor Badge – Deletes the filters configured for this group.
visitor badge associated with the message that Message Forwarding – Enables or disables
triggered the event. message forwarding from/to the selected work-
Delete Expired Visitor Badges – Deletes visitor station.
badges that have been expired for the selected Net Send Message – This feature is not
number of days. supported in this release.
Delete Unused Access Groups – Deletes all Open Document – Opens a document at the
unused access groups in the system. workstation selected.
Delete Visitors Without Badges – Deletes visi- Print Message – Sends a predefined instruction
tors without badges. text message to a selected printer.
Disable Badge – Disables the selected badge Real Time Printing – Enables or disables
number. real-time printing.
Display Map – Displays a specified map at the Real Time Printing Access Deny – Enables or
selected workstation. disables real-time printing of Access Deny
transactions.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
503
Real Time Printing Access Grant – Enables or Remote Server Receive – Enables or disables
disables real-time printing of Access Grant receiving remote messages at the selected
transactions. remote server.
Real Time Printing Alarm – Enables or disables Remote Server Transmit – Enables or disables
real-time printing of Alarm transactions. transmitting remote messages at the selected
remote server.
Real Time Printing Area – Enables or disables
real-time printing of Area transactions. Resync Badges – Adjusts the state of the
selected badges to In, Out, or Undefined and
Real Time Printing Audit – Enables or disables gives you the option to download the change.
real-time printing of Audit transactions.
Resync Badges - Last Terminal – Adjusts the
Real Time Printing AV – Enables or disables state of all badges presented at the selected ter-
real-time printing of Audio-Visual transac- minal to In, Out, or Undefined and gives you
tions. the option to download the change.
Real Time Printing Cabinet – Enables or dis- Resync Badges - Last Terminal Group – Adjusts
ables real-time printing of Cabinet transac- the state of all badges presented at the termi-
tions. nals in the selected terminal group to In, Out,
Real Time Printing Elevator – Enables or dis- or Undefined and gives you the option to
ables real-time printing of Elevator transac- download the change.
tions. Send Email – Sends a predefined instruction
Real Time Printing Fire – Enables or disables text message as email to the specified address.
real-time printing of Fire transactions. Serial Port Message – Sends a predefined
Real Time Printing Guard Tour – Enables or dis- instruction text message as a serial port mes-
ables real-time printing of Guard Tour transac- sage using the COM port selected.
tions. Set Counter – Sets the counter to a selected
Real Time Printing Host – Enables or disables value.
real-time printing of Host transactions. TCP/IP Port Message – Sends the configured
Real Time Printing Intrusion – Enables or dis- instruction text to the specified TCP/IP port on
ables real-time printing of Intrusion transac- the specified computer. The port closes after
tions. the text is sent.
Real Time Printing Mustering – Enables or dis- Text to Speech – Sends the selected instruction
ables real-time printing of Mustering transac- text to a workstation using the Windows Text
tions. to Speech feature. If the computer has a sound
card, the text can be spoken using a synthe-
Real Time Printing Panel – Enables or disables sized voice. The voice characteristics can be
real-time printing of Panel transactions. adjusted from the Speech icon in Windows
Control Panel.
Real Time Printing Trace – Enables or disables
real-time printing of Trace transactions. Trigger Event – Triggers the selected event.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
504 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
UDF Decrement – Decrements the specified Input Point Enable Alarm – Enables or disables
numeric UDF field by one for the Cardholder the alarm of the selected input point.
displayed in the message that triggered the
event. Input Point Suppress – Suppresses the selected
Input Point for the specified time (0 seconds
UDF Increment – Increments the specified means forever).
numeric UDF field by one for the Cardholder
displayed in the message that triggered the Input Point Suppression Time Zone – Sup-
event. presses the selected Input Point during the
specified Time Zone.
UDF Set – Sets the specified numeric UDF
field to the specified value for the Cardholder Input Point Unsuppress – Unsuppresses the
displayed in the message that triggered the selected Input Point.
event.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
505
Reset Ack – Resets and acknowledges the Reset Output Group – Resets the selected out-
selected intrusion zone. put group.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
506 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
Set Time Offset – Sets the time offset of the Anti-Passback Enable – Enables the anti-pass-
selected panel by the specified number of min- back feature at the specified reader for the
utes. period of time selected.
Time Zone Check No – Disables time zone Door Access – Unlocks the door (it is not mon-
checking. itored whether the door is actually accessed or
not).
Time Zone Check Yes – Enables time zone
checking. Door Relock – Locks the door.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
507
Set Reader Mode – Sets the reader mode of Soft In-X-It Processing Enable – Enables the
operation at the specified reader, to the option soft entry/exit processing feature at the speci-
selected in the Set Reader Mode field. fied reader.
Soft In-X-It Processing Disable – Disables the Unsuppress Forced/Propped Inputs – Unsup-
soft entry/exit processing feature at the speci- presses forced/propped inputs at the selected
fied reader. reader.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
508 APPENDIX A
Event Triggers/Actions
24-10832-194 Rev. E
509
T
his appendix lists all message types and
Message Sub-Types (Continued)
sub-types available for configuring
Message Filters. For more information, 3 – Alarm (continued)
15 – AV Dry Contact Alarm
see Message Filtering on page 222. 17 – Intrusion Alarm
18 – Fire Alarm
19 – Integration Component
20 – Intercom Station
21 – Intrusion Area Alarm
Message Types 22 – Fire Detector Alarm
23 – Fire IO Module Alarm
1– Notify
24 – Fire Device Alarm
3– Alarm
25 – SNMP Alarm
5– System Action
258 – Muster Status 5 – System Action
259 – Muster Event Trigger 2 – Error or Log
305 – Routing Session 4 – Counter Changed
403 – Intrusion Status 5 – Muster Control Started
404 – Fire Status 258 – Muster Status
28673 – RTL Data
28675 – Audit
259 – Muster Event Trigger
Message Sub-Types
403 – Intrusion Status
1 – Notify
204 – Alarm Filter 404 – Fire Status
207 – Comms Up
208 – Comms Down
210 – Guard Tour Up 28673 – RTL Data
1 – Panel: Reader Up/Normal
3 – Alarm 3 – Panel: System Restart
1 – Generic 5 – Panel: Reader Down
2 – Panel Input Point 10 – Panel: System Facility Code Error
3 – Area 11 – Panel: System Event Activated
4 – Guard Tour 12 – Panel: System Event De-activated
5 – Muster Running 15 – Panel: Unlock All Doors
6 – Muster Zone Status 16 – Panel: Lock All Doors
7 – Muster Disabled 17 – Panel: Output Set
8 – Muster Aborted 18 – Panel: Output Reset
10 – Event Alarm 19 – Panel: Terminal Reader Strike Locked
12 – AV Motion Alarm 20 – Panel: Terminal Reader Strike Unlocked
13 – AV Behavior Alarm 21 – Panel: Terminal Door Held Open
14 – AV Video Loss Alarm 22 – Panel: Terminal Door Forced Open
24-10832-194 Rev. E
510 APPENDIX B
Message Types and Sub-Types
24-10832-194 Rev. E
511
24-10832-194 Rev. E
512 APPENDIX B
Message Types and Sub-Types
24-10832-194 Rev. E
513
Mercury EP1501
Mercury EP1502
Mercury EP2500
Assa Abloy
S321-IP
HID
OSI
Feature
24-10832-194 Rev. E
514 APPENDIX C
Panel Comparison Matrix
Mercury EP1501
Mercury EP1502
Mercury EP2500
Assa Abloy
S321-IP
OSI
HID
Feature
Encrypted Communications 10 – –
Encryption (FIPS 140-2 Compliant) 10 – – – – – – –
Entry/Exit Enforce – – – –
Executive Privilege –
Exempt from Archive to Flash – – – – – – –
Extended Shunt Time – – – – – – –
Extended Time Override – – – – – – –
Facility Codes 12 12 12 U6 U6 U6 U6 16 16 16
FICAM Certification – – – – – – – –
(pivCLASS Integration)
HI-O Bus (partially supported on HID EVO only) – – – – – – – – –
HID Corp. 1000 Card Format
High Level Elevator – – – – – – –
High Performance Entry/Exit Status – – – – – – –
Synchronization
High Speed RS485 – – – –
History Upload With Seconds
Holidays 40 40 40 40 – 64 32 40 40 40
Input Groups – – – – – – –
Input Suppression – – –
Inputs (max. per panel) 326 326 326 12 – 16 11 – 64 12 256 12 512 12
5 3
Intrusion * – – – – – – –
Issue Level per Badge –
Keyless Override Feature – – – – – – –
KONE HLI Elevator Support – – – – – – –
KONE IP Elevator Support 10 – – – – – – –
Multi Card Types –
Multiple Facility Codes per Badge Type –
N-Man Rule – – – – 13 13 13
Network
OSDP (Mercury devices) – – – – – – –
OSDP Version 1 Reader Support (RDR2S-A and – – – – – – – –
RDR8S)
Otis Compass Elevator Support 14 14 14 – – – – – – –
Otis EMS Serial Elevator Support – – – – – – – –
Otis EMS - Security / BMS Elevator Support – – – – – – – – –
Output Control (manual) – –
Output Groups – – – – – – –
Output Groups associated with Time Zones – – – – – – –
24-10832-194 Rev. E
515
Mercury EP1501
Mercury EP1502
Mercury EP2500
Assa Abloy
S321-IP
OSI
HID
Feature
24-10832-194 Rev. E
516 APPENDIX C
Panel Comparison Matrix
1 When the number of badges exceeds 120,000 (100,000 for 128-bit badges), the number of access groups should be
limited to 50,000.
2 Available for HID EVO if not using card ID; otherwise, the badge capacity is 125,000.3
3 For HID Edge.
4 Using the standard feature set EP2500 supports 111,000 badges. EP1501, EP1502, and Schlage PIM400-1501
support 31,000. With a reduced feature set, EP2500 supports 500,000. EP1501, EP1502, and Schlage PIM400-1501
support 250,000. To exceed the lower numbers, contact Technical Support for details on changing the badge configuration.
5 One of five built-in card formats plus one custom card format. Card ID entry can also be configured.
6 Unlimited.
7 Up to 15 digits.
8 Supported by hard-wired (PoE) version only.
9 Supported by using Lantronix® Micro 125 Embedded Serial to Ethernet Module.
10 Supported by CK721-A Version 3.1.
11 For HID EVO.
12 For panels with no reader modules.
13 Mercury panels support the N-Man rule through the Two Badge Access feature defined at the terminal (for a maximum of
two people).
14 The Otis Compass integration with this version of P2000 requires CK721-A firmware version 3.5 or higher.
15 Provided via Mercury Triggers and Procedures.
16 Uses Access Group Details to associate Readers with Time Zones, on an access group basis, not on a badge basis.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
517
T
he following sections describe how to To invoke access with PIN Only:
invoke access requests, Air Crew
access requests, Timed Overrides, and 1. Select the terminal PIN Only option in the
Panel Card Events using a keypad Card Type tab. PIN Only works exclu-
reader on CK721-A panels. sively with 5-digit algorithmic PINs.
2. Set the panel PIN Code Type to Algorith-
mic.
Note: For information on using keypad readers 3. Set the panel PIN Code Digits to 5.
that connect to other panel types, refer to the
instructions provided with those panels. 4. At the keypad reader, enter the PIN, and
press the # key.
There is a 15 second time-out on all keypads.
Whenever the keypad is idle for more than 15 To invoke access with Card ID:
seconds, all keys entered so far are ignored,
1. To invoke access with Card ID at any time,
and the entire key sequence needs to be
set the terminal PIN Suppression in the
re-entered.
Timezone tab to <none>. Otherwise,
access is granted only during active time
zones.
Note: Card ID (the badge number) can have up
to 19 digits. However, the total number of keys 2. Select the terminal Card ID option in the
pressed for PIN and Card ID combined must not Card Type tab.
exceed 21. 3. Verify that the terminal PIN Only option
in the Card Type tab is not selected.
4. Verify that the terminal PIN + Card ID
Invoking Access Requests option in the Card Type tab is not selected.
from a Keypad 5. At the keypad reader, enter the Card ID
number and press the # key.
To invoke access with a Badge: To invoke access with PIN and Card ID:
1. To invoke access using a badge at any 1. Select the terminal PIN + Card ID option
time, set the terminal PIN Suppression in in the Card Type tab.
the Timezone tab to <none>. Otherwise,
access is granted only during active time 2. Verify that the terminal PIN Only option
zones. in the Card Type tab is not selected.
2. At the keypad reader, present the badge. 3. At the keypad reader, enter the PIN, then
enter the Card ID number, and press the #
key.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
518 APPENDIX D
Using a Keypad Reader on CK721-A Panels
24-10832-194 Rev. E
519
4. Set the panel PIN Code Type to Algorith- 7. To start Timed Override:
mic. Without the Star Feature, enter the Card ID
5. Set the panel PIN Code Digits to 5. number, press the star (*) key, enter the
6. To start Timed Override: number of minutes, and press the # key.
Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN, With the Star Feature, enter the Card ID
press the star (*) key, enter the number of number, press the star (*) key followed by
minutes, and press the # key. number 0, enter the number of minutes,
and press the # key.
With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press
the star (*) key followed by number 0, 8. To stop Timed Override:
enter the number of minutes, and press the Without the Star Feature, enter the Card ID
# key. number, press the star (*) key, enter 0 (for
7. To stop Timed Override: minutes), and press the # key.
With the Star Feature, enter the Card ID
Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN, number, press the star (*) key followed by
press the star (*) key, enter 0 (for minutes), number 0, and press the # key.
and press the # key.
With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press
To invoke Timed Override with PIN and
the star (*) key followed by number 0, and
Card ID:
press the # key.
1. Select the terminal Cardholder Over-
To invoke Timed Override with Card ID: ride/Shunt option in the Access tab.
2. Set the badge Override option in the Secu-
1. Select the terminal Cardholder Over- rity Options tab.
ride/Shunt option in the Access tab.
3. Select the terminal PIN + Card ID option
2. Set the badge Override option in the Secu- in the Card Type tab.
rity Options tab.
4. Verify that the terminal PIN Only option
3. To invoke Timed Override using badge at in the Card Type tab is not selected.
any time, set the terminal PIN Suppres-
sion in the Timezone tab to <none>. Oth- 5. To start Timed Override:
erwise, Timed Override is invoked only Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN,
during active time zones. enter the Card ID number, press the star (*)
4. Select the terminal Card ID option in the key, enter the number of minutes, and press
Card Type tab. the # key.
5. Verify that the terminal PIN Only option With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, enter
in the Card Type tab is not selected. the Card ID number, press the star (*) key
followed by number 0, enter the number of
6. Verify that the terminal PIN + Card ID
minutes, and press the # key.
option in the Card Type tab is not selected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
520 APPENDIX D
Using a Keypad Reader on CK721-A Panels
24-10832-194 Rev. E
521
Invoking Panel Card Events 3. Select the terminal PIN Only option in the
Card Type tab. PIN Only works exclu-
from a Keypad sively with 5-digit algorithmic PINs.
4. Set the panel PIN Code Type to Algorith-
mic.
To invoke Panel Card Events with
Badge: 5. Set the panel PIN Code Digits to 5.
6. To activate the event:
1. Set the panel card event Trigger Type to
Card/Keypad Code. Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN,
press A, enter the keypad code, and press
2. To invoke a Panel Card Event using a the # key.
badge at any time, set the terminal PIN
Suppression in the Timezone tab to With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press
<none>. Otherwise, the Panel Card Event the star (*) key followed by number 1,
is invoked only during active time zones. enter the keypad code, and press the # key.
3. To activate the event: 7. To deactivate the event:
Without the Star Feature, press A, enter the Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN,
keypad code, and present the badge. press D, enter the keypad code, and press
the # key.
With the Star Feature, press the star (*) key
followed by number 1, enter the keypad With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press
code, and present the badge. the star (*) key followed by number 4,
enter the keypad code, and press the # key.
4. To deactivate the event:
Without the Star Feature, press D, enter the
To invoke Panel Card Events with Card
keypad code, and present the badge.
ID:
With the Star Feature, press the star (*) key
followed by number 4, enter the keypad 1. Set the panel card event Trigger Type to
code, and present the badge. Card/Keypad Code.
2. To invoke a Panel Card Event using Card
To invoke Panel Card Events with PIN ID at any time, set the terminal PIN Sup-
Only: pression in the Timezone tab to <none>.
Otherwise, the Panel Card Event is
1. Set the panel card event Trigger Type to invoked only during active time zones.
Card/Keypad Code or Card/PIN/Key- 3. Set the terminal Card ID option in the
pad Code. Card Type tab.
2. If set to Card/PIN/Keypad Code, set the 4. Verify that the terminal PIN Only option
terminal PIN Suppression in the Time- in the Card Type tab is not selected.
zone tab to an inactive time zone.
5. Verify that the terminal PIN + Card ID
option in the Card Type tab is not selected.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
522 APPENDIX D
Using a Keypad Reader on CK721-A Panels
24-10832-194 Rev. E
523
To invoke Panel Card Events with PIN With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press
and Badge, allowing PIN after badge: the star (*) key followed by number 4,
enter the keypad code, present the badge1,
1. Set the panel card event Trigger Type to and press the # key.
Card/Keypad Code or Card/PIN/Key-
1)You may present the badge at any time
pad Code.
before pressing the # key.
2. Set the terminal PIN Suppression in the
Timezone tab to an inactive time zone.
3. Select the terminal Allow PIN After Quick Guide to Using
Badge option in the Flags tab. Keypad Readers
4. To activate the event:
Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN, Use the following quick guide to determine the
press A, enter the keypad code, present the key sequence at a keypad reader required for a
badge1, and press the # key. particular action. This section assumes that
With the Star Feature, enter the PIN, press you have configured all terminal and panel set-
the star (*) key followed by number 1, tings for this action.
enter the keypad code, present the badge1,
and press the # key.
5. To deactivate the event: Note: Use the terminal Star Feature if you want
to invoke Panel Card Events on a keypad that
Without the Star Feature, enter the PIN, does not have the A and D keys.
press D, enter the keypad code, present the
badge1, and press the # key.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
524 APPENDIX D
Using a Keypad Reader on CK721-A Panels
Legend
Keypad Code Enter the Keypad Code. badge Present the badge.
PIN Enter the PIN number.
* 0 1
Press the specified key.
Card ID Enter the Card ID number. # A D
Minutes Enter the number of minutes.
With Badge
To request access: badge
With Card ID
To request access: Card ID #
24-10832-194 Rev. E
525
With Card ID
To start override without Star Feature: Card ID * Minutes #
To stop override without Star Feature: Card ID * 0 #
To start override with Star Feature: Card ID * 0 Minutes #
To stop override with Star Feature: Card ID * 0 #
1
) You may present the badge at any time before pressing the # key, that is, before, during or
after you enter the PIN and the Timed Override sequence.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
526 APPENDIX D
Using a Keypad Reader on CK721-A Panels
1
) You may present the badge at any time before pressing the # key, that is, before, during or
after you enter the PIN and the Panel Card Event sequence.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
527
Appendix E: Troubleshooting
T
his section explains the authentication The P2000 installation creates the following
process for a P2000 user. This helps user groups:
you understand what goes on behind
the scenes, the reason for each step, and User Group Properties
how to troubleshoot when problems arise. PEGASYS Connects to the Server and data-
Users base over the network.
PEGASYS Connects to the Server and data-
Authentication Process Administrators base over the network, and also
have database administrative
rights (needed to drop and create
database tables, and to restore
the database).
Windows Authentication PEGASYS MIS Connects to the Server and MIS
Users Interface portions of the data-
The first level of authentication for a P2000 base.
Workstation is the connection to the P2000
Server. The Workstation must connect to the
Server over the network to gain access to the SQL Server Authentication
database. Your Windows operating system per-
forms this authentication. The Workstation The second level of authentication for a P2000
sends to the Server the username and password Workstation is the SQL Server database. The
that the user used when logging on to Win- Workstation connects to the SQL Server with
dows. The Server then compares this username an ODBC connection. The ODBC connection
and password with the users configured in passes a username and password to the SQL
Windows. To connect the Workstation to the Server to be authenticated. The default config-
Server, this username and password must be a uration of a P2000 ODBC connection is to pass
valid account on the Server. the Windows username and password. The
username and password that the ODBC con-
The P2000 Server installation creates three nection sends must be a valid account in SQL
Windows user groups, which you can assign to Server for the Workstation to connect to the
a user account to allow connection to the database. The P2000 Server installation creates
Server. SQL Server accounts for each of the three
Windows user groups. Since SQL Server has
accounts for the user groups that the P2000
Server installation created, assigning a Win-
dows user account to one of those groups auto-
matically grants access to the SQL Server data-
base.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
528 APPENDIX E
Troubleshooting
24-10832-194 Rev. E
529
No
No
No
Go to P2000
Network
Troubleshooting
(page 530)
24-10832-194 Rev. E
530 APPENDIX E
Troubleshooting
Yes Yes
There is a name
Can you resolution problem at
ping the server No the workstation. Check
from the workstation TCP/IP DNS and
by name? WINS settings on
workstation.
Yes
Yes Yes
There is a name
Can you resolution problem at the
ping the workstation No server. Check TCP/IP
from the server DNS and WINS settings
by name? on server.
Yes
Contact Technical
P2000 Network Troubleshooting
Support
24-10832-194 Rev. E
531
Yes
Check Windows
application log on CCTV
Server and main P2000
Server for more detailed
information
Yes
No
Follow information
in error log
No
Send file to
Technical Support
24-10832-194 Rev. E
532 APPENDIX E
Troubleshooting
24-10832-194 Rev. E
533
T
he steps in this section are specific for Panel Configuration
panels that support the Panel Card
1. The panel must contain at least one input
Event feature, and are necessary to
and one output terminal, in addition to a
ensure UL 1076 compliance when you
reader terminal. An acceptable alternative
use a panel card event to unsuppress (arm) pro-
is a terminal that includes input, output, and
tected premise alarm signals. reader capabilities, such as the
According to UL 1076 requirements, if you S300-DIN-RDR2S-A module.
unsuppress alarms at the protected premises See Configure Hardware Components on
(for example, through a panel card event), page 53.
when this event is invoked, you must receive
an indication, either audible or visible, that the Input Point Configuration
P2000 Server received the message that the
panel generated after the event was processed. 1. Set the protected premise input point Sta-
If you do not receive the expected indication, tus to Enable.
then either the panel is offline from the Server 2. Set the Disabled During Time Zone
or the panel did not process the panel card option to <none>.
event request. 3. From the Alarm Priority drop-down list,
select 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0, depending on individ-
Before you define the Host event configuration
ual company policy for protected premise
(see page 534), you should verify the follow-
alarms.
ing settings. Use your discretion to program
any parameters not specified. See Create Input Points on page 82.
24-10832-194 Rev. E
534 APPENDIX F
Secured Premises Notification Settings
24-10832-194 Rev. E
535
T
he following steps are specific for pan- Mercury Hardware Configuration
els that support the intrusion feature,
and are necessary to ensure UL 1076 1. Create a Mercury panel that contains at
compliance when you use a Mercury least one terminal with an available output,
intrusion keypad terminal DM-21 (MRDT) to in addition to the DM-21 intrusion keypad
unsuppress (arm) protected premise alarm sig- terminal, and the defined protected premise
nals. input points.
See Configure Mercury Panels and Compo-
nents on page 151.
Note: Throughout this section, the terms
DM-21 and MRDT are used interchangeably and
refer to the Mercury intrusion keypad terminal. Input Point Configuration
24-10832-194 Rev. E
536 APPENDIX G
Secured Premises Notification Settings for Mercury Panels with Keypad DM-21 (MRDT)
24-10832-194 Rev. E
537
Index
24-10832-194 Rev. E
538 INDEX
Auto Forward 378 Bosch Intrusion Alarms 327 Chime Flag 324
Auto Process 409 Bosch SIA 279 CIM Override 256
Auto Reverse 378 Broadcast Port Number 58 CK721-A and S321-IP Data Import
Auto Start 429 Bulk Badge Change 259 and Export 458
Automatic Employee IDs 241 Bypass 440 CK721-A Download Service 430
Automatic Software Updates 434 Bypass Off 329 CK721-A Priority Service 430
Auxiliary Access 7 Bypass On 329 CK721-A Upload Service 430
AV Service 429 bypassed 318 CK721-A/S321-IP Data Import and
Avigilon Interface Service 429 Bypassed on startup 324 Export 448
Clear DSR 141
Clear Lock 144
B C Clear Text 46
B426 Configuration Rules 321 Cabinet Access Control 216 Commend Intercom 395
Backup and Restore 448 Cabinet Configuration 218 Commend Outputs 396, 398
Backup Controller Name 209 Calculate Digital Signature 448, Comms Server 34
Backup DB to Flash Interval 55 458 Communication
Backup Device 40 Calibrate 75 downloads 6
Backup IP Address 209 Calibrate with Resistor 116, 119 operating modes 6
Backups 451 Calibration 87 central 6
automatic 453 Card Data Formatting 169 local 6
backup device 451 Card Events 9 shared 6
manual 452 Card Format 154, 155 transactions 6
restoring database 455 Card Format Types with Offline Communication Modes 6
Badge Data Support 170 Company 246
badge field definitions 252 Card Format Types without Offline Company definition 234
entering badge information 251 Support 170 Concealed UDFs 27
Facility Code 252 Card Only 92 Connect Interval 147
issue level 252 Card Track 100 Connection String 158
viewing 258 Card Type 74 Contractor Request 416
Badge Design 359 Card Use Limit 254 Control all Doors 291
Badge Device Setup 362 Card/Keypad Code 92 Control Point Number 176
Badge Format 123, 193, 237 Card/PIN Code 92 Control Station Groups 400
Badge ID Allowed 114 Card/PIN/Keypad Code 92 Control Sub-Stations 400
Badge Information 258 Cardholder Data 245 Convert to Current Version After
Badge Layout 362 cardholder email address 410 Restore 456
Badge Layout Fields 359 Cardholder Information 345 COP Destination When
Badge Override 114 Cardholder Override 130 Connected 209
Badge Purpose 238, 253 Cardholder Override/Shunt 71 Count All 298
Badge Reason 238, 253 Cardholders Count Inputs 298
Badge Resync 265 cardholder field definitions 245 Count Terminals 298
Badge Station 20, 359 cardholder image 247 Create NT user account on
Badge Trace Alarm for Denied cardholder information 244 server 25
Access 34 cardholder types Cross Site Access Group Editing 34
Badge Trace Alarm for Granted regular 245 Current Count 302
Access 34 visitor 245 Current Firmware Version 446
Badge Transaction History 258 edit cardholder information 250 Custom Card Formats 64
Base Name 77 Journals 248 Custom Configuration Number 55
Base64 46 searching 250 Custom Reports 486
Basic Configuration 5 user defined fields 249 create custom reports 486
Basic System Components 2 visitor sponsor 247 edit reports in Crystal 487
external device 4 Cart Service 256 export existing reports 487
field panels 4 CCTV 389 import custom reports 486
Server 2 CCTV Server 429
system printer 3 Central 70
central Enterprise site 403 D
terminals 4
workstations 3 Central In-X-It 168 Data Style 253
Baud Rate 59 Central Response Timeout 158 Database External Trigger 45
Begin Suppression 295 Chain Rules 184 Database Maintenance 447
Bind Server 41 Change Password 28 advanced backups 452
Blanking Time 268, 269 change password at next logon 25 automatic backups 453
Bosch Intrusion 320 Check Use Limit 169 backup device 451
24-10832-194 Rev. E
539
database backup 451 Door Service Router 140 Access Groups 404
database restore 455 Door Tracking 219 Global Access Rights 405
manual backups 452 DOP Destination When Parameters 403
Database Server 403 Connected 210 Sites 247, 403
Database Table Definitions 486 DOP Source When Connected 210 Time Zones 404
Daylight Savings 101 Download Access Groups of Entry Delay 176
Daylight Savings Used 112 badge 42 Entry Exit Delay 83
DB Server 34 Download badges with Undefined Escalation 85
Debounce Scan Count 170, 171, entry/exit status 42 Escalation based upon visibility 86
175 Download Function 425 Escalation Increment 86
Debounce Time 133 Download options 41 Escalation Repeat 86
Decoding Rules 194 Download Status 426 Escalation Service 430
Decrement Use Limit 169 by panel 427 Escalation Timeout 86
Default Alarm Colors 277 Download to disabled panels 42 Evaluate Exported Data 464
Default Reader Mode 166 Downstream Connections 159 Evaluating Imported Data 461
Default Status 325 Drill 315 Event Action Types 499
Default Timezone 233 Drive Mode 171, 177 Event Actions 337
Degraded 314 DSR 136 Event Counters 340
Delay Downloads Until 436 DSR Downloading 143 add event counters 340
Delay Trigger 324 DSR Status 149 reset event counters 341
Delayed download for badges and Duplicate Maps 352 view event counters 340
access groups 42 Duress 94 Event Privilege 254
Delete all badges from OSI Duress Alarm 380 Events 9
database 448 DVR/VMS 390 card events 9
Delete all hardware from OSI DX4020 Configuration Rules 321 create events 335
database 448 event configuration 335
Delete Badge Layout Fields 360 system events 9
delete badges from panel before E timed events 9
download 426 Edit Button Image 353 Exact Match 251, 259, 266, 301
delete elevators from panel before Elevator 59 Executive Privilege 254
download 426 Elevator Access Grant 197 Exit Delay 176
Delete Expired Visitor Badges 448 Elevator with feedback 166 Expand Zone 316
Delete history older than 56 Elevator without feedback 166 Expiration Period for Requests 408
Delete Selected Alarm 448 Elevators 196 Export 350
Delete Unique Badge Entries 448 EMail 44 Export CK721-A and S321-IP
Delete Unused Access Groups 448 Email 246 Data 463
Delete Visitors Without Badges 448 Emergency Access Disable 416 Extended Access 7
De-Muster 309, 315 Emergency Override 219 Extended Access Flag 98, 123
Deny If Door Open 68 Empty Alarms 448 Extended Access Time 98
Department 246 Empty Alarms History 448 Extended Shunt Time 99
Department definition 235 Empty Archive Database 448 External Event Trigger 44
Destination Entry Computer 207 Empty Audit History 448 External IPs 46
Device ID 370 Empty Download Queue 449 External Trigger Service 430
Dial Number Length 396 Empty Fire Data 449
digital video 390 Empty Guard Tour Note 449
Direct Output Control 197 Empty Saved Muster Data 449 F
Directory Services Password Empty Smart Download Queue 449 Facility Code Only when Offline 67
Validation 27, 41, 409 Empty Transaction History 449 Facility Codes 74
Directory Services Path 28, 41 Enable Input Suppression Failed Attempts Lockout 131
Disable Alarm 84 Messages 59 failed download connections 436
Disabled During Time Zone 83 Enable Mifare Encoding 423 failed download transfers 436
Disarmed 318 Enable Panel Relay Group Fast Flash 81, 292
Display All alarm options 272 Outputs 59 FDA Backup 40
Display asterisks instead of pin Enable Printing 346 FDA Backup Performed 449
code 34 Enable Secondary Interfaces 111 FDA Backups 454
Door controls 290 Encoder Configuration 421 FDA Retention Policy 40
Door Groups 220 Encoding Rules 194 FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 392
Door Masks 218 Encryption 60, 110, 125 File External Trigger 45
Door Names 217 Enforce Entry/Exit 57 Fire Alarm 282
Door Open Warning 71 Enforce Limitations 36 Fire Devices Configuration 286
Door Sensors 106 Enterprise 3, 402 Fire Panel Status Details 437
24-10832-194 Rev. E
540 INDEX
First Person Through 148 HID Output Points 134 Intrusion Interface Service 430
Fixed IP Address 110 HID Panels 122 Intrusion Panel Status Details 437
flash memory 444 HID Terminals 128 Intrusion Status 330
Floor Groups 216 Hide from MIS 240 Intrusion Transactions 330
Floor Masks 198 Hide reports 487 Inverted 177
Floor Names 197 High Level Interface 59 IP Address 56
Floor Tracking 185 High Priority 427 IPL version 436
Force Logoff 433 HI-O hardware module 127 Item Name Filters 226
Forced Arm 329, 440 History Retention Period 111 Item Synchronization 449
Forced Door 88 Hold Time 170, 175
Forced Door/Propped Door 94 Holiday 51
Found in DB 262, 418 Holiday Calendar 52 J
Four-Digit PINs 80 Holiday Types 51, 52 Journal 248
FS (Full Screen) 268 Host No Reception Timeout 111,
Fully Qualified Name 368 126
Host Poll Timeout 56 K
Hours On Site 332 Keyless Override/Shunt Time 72
G Reporting 333 Keypad 517
Genetec Security Center Interface Zones 332 Keypad Code 92
Service 430 HTTP Disconnect Delay 111 Keypad Credential Length 98
Global Badge Entry/Exit Status Keypad Mode 166
Synchronization 33 Kill All Reports 449
Global In-X-It Tracking 33 I KONE HLI/KONE ELINK High
Global Sub-Station 397 I/O Linking 86 Level Interface 202
Grant Only 379 IFC Interface Service 430 Kone IP Controller Id 208
Group Controller Address 59 Image Recall 267 Kone IP Group 209
Guard 375 activate 268 KONE IP High Level Interface 208
Guard Tour 374 filters 267 KONE IP Portal 212
adding stations 380 Image Recall FS 268
assigning to a specific guard 379 Import Standard Values 133
assigning tour badges 375 importing an image 364
L
configuring guard tours 376 Importing CK721-A and S321-IP LAN (local area network) 3
control all tours 383 Data 458 Language selection 48
controlling guard tours 383 Index 66 Last Badging Terminal 266
Details 386 Inoperable 314 Last Badging Terminal Group 266
forward and reverse 374 Input Count 302 Last poll communication 436
guard tour priority 376 Input Groups 89 Latch Output 58
principles and definitions 374 Input Point Calibration 153 Latching 176
scheduled times 378 Input Point Suppression 295 Late Alarm 380
system hardware 375 Input Points 82 Launch Automatically 21
tour abort 375 non-alarms 8 LED Mode 166
traversal time 382 Input/Output Mode 113 Load Archive Database from
Guard Tour Control 383 Insert Macro 91 Backup 449
Guard Tour Priority 254 Instruction Conventions 13 Load Language Reports 471
Guard Tour Reports 388 menu shortcuts 13 Local 70
Guard Tour Service 374, 430 Intercom 393 Local Alarms 43, 273
Control 398 Local Configuration 48
Events 401 Local Site 47
H Exchange 394 Lockout 290
Handicap Access Time, KONE Real Time Map Control 400 Lockout Mode 150
IP 212 Stations 397 Log Operator Action 380
Hardware Components 53 Intercom Interface Service 430 Log Output Status Message 69,
Hardware Module 76 Intercom Transaction History 121, 439
Heartbeat Transmit Interval 110, Reports 401 Log Reader Strike Message 67
126 Interior Zone 324 Log Tour Operation 380
Help 14 Intrusion Alarms 326 Log Type 175
context sensitive 14 Intrusion Area 318 Logging on to P2000 10
online 14 Intrusion Configuration 319 changing the default login
HID Facility Parameters 123 Intrusion Control 328 name 11
HID Input Points 131 Intrusion Detection 317 default login values 11
HID Interface Service 430 Intrusion Events 331 passwords 10
24-10832-194 Rev. E
541
Super User 11 Message Filter Group 21, 24, 43, No Change-of-State 175
User Name 10 273 No Configuration Archive to
Logging Out of P2000 12 Message Filter Groups 229 Flash 55
Low Level Interface 199 Message Filtering 221, 222 No Fault-to-Fault 175
Lowest Floor for Group Message Forwarding 281 No Green Light on Aux Access 68
Controller 60 Message Routing 230 None.wav 275
Message Routing Status 275 Non-latching 175
Message Types 224, 509 Normal Popup 85
M Message Void Period 232 Normal Priority 427
Machine Room Enclosure 207 Metasys system 368 Number of Doors 34
Mag Track Formulas 360 Mifare Encoder 421 Number of Floors 34
Magnetic Formula Track 360 Migrate 241
Magnetic Stripe 100 Milestone Interface Service 430
Main Menu 4 Mimic 87 O
Manager Flag 98 Min Required 297 ODBC Data Source 48
Manual Conventions 2 Min Required Alarmed 300 Offline Mode 171, 177
Manual Process 409 MIS image folder 366 Offline Reader Mode 166
Manual Reset 379 MIS Interface 365 Offset / Append Value 152
Manual Tour 378, 385 input and output tables 366 OPC Aritech 319
map icons 350 partitioned systems 366 OPC Proxy Service 431
Map Maker 346, 348 prerequisites 365 OPC Server 339
create an importable image 349 using the interface 366 OPC Tag 339
image sets 352 MIS Interface Service 430 OPC Tags 320
import an image 349 Momentary Auxiliary Access 68, Open for Access Time 290
map attachments 352 113 Operational Mode 121
normal map 349 Monitor Point Number 175 Operator Access 167
place device icons 350 Monitoring Remote Alarms 272 Operator Controls 290
popup map 349 Mouse Conventions 12 control doors 290
system map 349 MSEA 86 control panel relays 292
Mark Secondary Tables 449 MSEA Graphic 86 Operator Name Filters 228
Master Station 397 MSEA Graphics 368 Operators 21
Max Allowed 297 MSEA Registration 369 Optimize for LAN 48
Max Allowed Alarmed 300 Multi-Card Access Time Out 152 Option Keys 31
Max Badge Number 37 Muster 305 OSI Facility 97
Max Inactive Period 33 Muster Control 307 OSI Interface Service 431
Max Issue Level 37 Muster Control Service 430 OSI Panels 95
Max PIN Code Digits 34 Muster Reports 308 OSI portals 102
Max Security Level 37 Muster Shift Setup 309 OSI Terminals 104
Max. consecutive Invalid Logins 40 Muster Startup Rules 308 OSI wireless readers 442
Maximum Queue Length 232 Muster Terminals 305, 310 Otis Compass 204
Maximum Retries 158 Muster Zone 305 Otis Compass Elevator Modes 205
Mercury Elevator Floors 186 Muster Zone Alarm Settings 309 Otis Compass Elevator Options 255
Mercury Elevator Inputs 187 Mustered 306, 317 Otis EMS - Security / BMS
Mercury Elevator Outputs 187 Mustering 305 Protocol 203
Mercury Elevators 184, 185 control 313 Otis Interface Service 431
Mercury Facility Parameters 151 define Muster Zones 306 Otis PIN 207
Mercury Inputs 172 events 312 Otis Unsecured Elevators 207
Mercury Interface Service 430 reports 316 Out Of Order Alarm 380
Mercury Intrusion 323 Out of Sync 148
Mercury Intrusion Areas 324 Output Control 291
Mercury Intrusion Zones 323 N Output Delay 59
Mercury Legacy Mode 152 Name for DNS Address Output Groups 81
Mercury Outputs 176 Resolution 110 Output Points 80
Mercury Panel Type 157 Naming Conventions 53 Output Relays 9
Mercury Panels 151, 156 Navigating through the System 12 activated by events 9
Mercury Procedures and Network Communication 5 activated manually 9
Triggers 180 New Firmware Version 446 input linking 9
Mercury Terminals 160 N-Man Rule 73 output linking 9
Message Filter Configuration 273, No Access Group Archive to Override 254
342 Flash 55 Override Reset Threat Level 69,
No Badge Archive to Flash 55 294
24-10832-194 Rev. E
542 INDEX
24-10832-194 Rev. E
543
Request Queue View 466 Security level control 293 SNMP 111
details 469 Security Options 253 SNMP Trap Receiver Service 431
filtering 468 Send COP 209 snow emergency 190
Request Status 415, 416 Send DOP 209 Soft Alarms 93
Required Approval Levels 408 Send Email to Request Soft Input Points 54
Required Cardholder Fields 239 Approvers 408 Soft In-X-It 68, 94
Required Fields 245 Sequester 317 Software Updates 434
Required fields 249 Sequester Terminals 305, 311 Source Time Zone 322
Rescuer 306, 317 Sequestered 306 Special Access 7, 34, 73, 254
Resend All Events 322 Server 2 basic access override 7
Resend Attempt Interval 111, 126 Service Controls 432 auxiliary access 7
Reset Counters 437 stop and start services 432 extended access 7
Reset Counters to Zero 449 stop/star a specific service 432 timed override 7
Reset Panel Before Download 163, stop/start all services 432 granting badge privileges 8
426 Service Monitor 432 Special Access Flags 92
Reset Reserved Autobadge Service Override 219 Special Access Privileges, KONE
Numbers 449 Service Pack 434 IP 212
Reset Time 437 Service Startup Configuration 428 Split Group 256
ResetAck 329, 441 Session Type 433 sponsors 247
Response Required before Set Alarm Color 384 SQL Server Authentication 527
Completion 85 Set all Input Status to Unknown 450 Standard Reports 471
Response Text 279 Set all Output Status to run a standard report 472
create 279 Unknown 450 Star Feature 68
Restart on 1st failure then Set all Panel Status to static text objects 351
reboot 429 Unknown 450 Station Group 397
Restart on 2 failures then reboot 429 Set all Terminal Status to Station Type 381
Restart on failure 429 Unknown 450 Statistics Update Interval 106
Restore to archive 456 Set Computer Default Stop Suppression 295
Resume Normal Operation 291 Language 450 Sub-Station 397
Retention Period 40 Set Panel Relay When Active 83 Super User 11, 356
Retention Policy 39 Set Reader Mode 290 Support Regions 396
Return Address 44 Shared 70 Suppress 93
Return to Normal 290 Shared Path 434 Suppress Input Points 295
Reverse Reading 67 Show All 300, 301 Sync cardholder/badge active
Reverse Swipe Duress 68 Show Only 300, 301 flags 450
Reverse Track 87 Show UDF Fields 268 Synchronize OSI Transaction
REX Contact 129 Shrink Database 450 Counter 450
RMS 43 Shunt Alarm on Request to Exit 113 System Components 31
RS232 External Trigger 45 Shunt Only on REX 168 System Configuration 17
RS-485 Baud Rate 55 Shunt Time 71 System Events 9
RTL Route Service 431 Shunt Warning Auto Off 71 System Information URL 34
Run Time 378 Shunt/ADA Relay 172 System Maintenance 425
SIA Device 280 System Override 57
SIA Interface 279 System Overview 5
S SIA Interface Service 431 System Status 435
S321-IP Input Points 116 SIA Message View 280 Fire Detector 441
S321-IP Interface Service 431 Sign On Key 98 Fire IO Module 441
S321-IP Output Points 120 Silence 330 Fire Zone 441
S321-IP Panels 108 SIO 160 Input Terminals 438
S321-IP Terminals 112 SIO Number 164 Inputs 439
Save the Log File 463 Site Director 368, 370 Integration Components 443
SaveXAction 395, 396, 401 Site Name Filters 224 Intrusion Annunciators 441
Scramble Mode 58 Site Parameters 32 Intrusion Areas 440
searching for cardholders 250 Site Parameters Printing 34 Intrusion Zones 440
Secure Authentication 41 Skip Alarm Cancel 325 Legend 436
Secured Premises Notification Slow Flash 81, 292 Mustering Zones 439
Settings 533, 535 Smart Download Control 427 OTIS Elevator Status 439
Secure-off 87 Smart Download Rules 42 Output Terminals 438
Secure-on 87 Smart Download Service 431 Outputs 439
Security Level 254, 293 SMTP Hello Domain 44 Reader Terminals 438
Security Level By Color 294 SMTP Server 44 Security Level Terminals 439
24-10832-194 Rev. E
544 INDEX
Wireless Parameters 442 edit a trigger condition 337 defining a workstation 358
System Validation 457 field definitions 337 printing a badge 363
manual triggers 341 specifications 358
trigger conditions 336 viewing and printing a badge 364
T Troubleshooting Video Imaging station 359
TCP/IP External Trigger 45 CCTV Control 531 View Inoperable Hardware 316
Template Terminal 77 Login 529 Violation Alert Period 40
Temporary Access 257 Network 530 VIP Indicator 153
Terminal Count 302 Workstation Problems 528 Visitor Escort Mode 73
Terminal Down 89 Turnstile 166 Visitor Information 261
Terminal Groups 78 Type Descriptor 256 Visitor Management 415
Terminal Siblings 160 Visitor Request 416
Terminal Status to “Unknown” when Field Definitions 418
Panel Offline 38 U sponsor 419
Terminals 65 UDF Choices 240 Visitor Validity Period 33
Terminals associated with UI Style 409 visitors 245
Timezone 37 UIstyle 421
This Location Only 417 Uncalibrate 75, 87
Time Before Propped Door unique time pairs 38 W
Reported 131 Unlock 290 Wakeup Communication 138
Time Blocks 49 Unlock All Doors 291 WAMS 95
Time Offset 57 unreliable icons 347 Wandering 306, 317
time pairs 38 unsuppress protected premise Warning Auto Off 72
Time Zones 49 alarms 533, 535 Warning Output Group 71, 72
Timed Events 9 Update CK721-A Panels 444 Warning Time 71, 72
Timed Override 7, 71 Update Database Default Watchdog Service 431
Timed Override/Anti-Tailgate 57 Strings 450 Web Access 406
Timed Shunt 71 Update Mercury Panels 446 Alarm Monitor 414
Timed Suppression 295 Update Preprocessed Report Archive Area Search 414
Timed/Pulse 292 tables 450 Audit 415
Timezone Checking 57 Update Preprocessed Report Badge Print 414
Today Only 417 tables 450 Badge Resync 414
Toolbar 15 Upload only when greater than 56 Cardholder Search 414
Tour Activation 375 Use Authorized SMTP 44 Command Outputs 414
Tour Alarms Setting 380 Use Encryption 41 Customizing the interface 420
Tour Badge 375 Use for XmlRpc 47 Door Command 414
Tour Badge priority 376 Use Operator Account / Profile Employee Services 413
Tour Configuration 376 Authentication 409 Guard Services 414
Tour Configuration Report 388 User Accounts 29 In Out Displays 414
Tour Notes 387 User Authentication 409 Logging on 413
Tour Notes Report 388 User Defined Fields 239, 249 Management Services 415
Tour Sequence Number 381 User Name 274 Menu Permissions 246, 407
tour shunt devices 383 User Site 274 Options 408
Tour Station 380 Username Formatting 41 Processing requests 416
Tour Transaction Report 388 Using a Keypad Reader 517 Submitting Requests 413
Tour Types 378 invoking access requests 517 Web Request Queue Status 407
Trace 254 invoking air crew access 518 WebBadging Setup 415
Track 87 invoking panel card events 521 Windows Authentication 527
Track Fields 361 invoking timed overrides 518 Workstation Status 433
Track Movement 311 Quick Guide 523 Workstation Test 528
Transmit Filter 231 Workstations 19
Transmit Queue 231 Alarm Monitor 20
Transmit Session 232
V
location 20
Transmitting Messages (sec) 43 Valid & Unauthorized 68 Workstations and Operators 19
Trapped 306, 317 Validate 415 World Time Zone 112, 126, 160
traverse time 382 Validate Digital Signature 450, 457 Write Panel Database to Flash
Trigger Logic 336 Verify Password for Critical Memory 444
Trigger Manually 341 Functions 25
Trigger Types 489 Version description 436
Triggers 182 Vertigo 256 X
create triggers 336 Video Imaging 358 XmlRpc 46
24-10832-194 Rev. E
545
Z
Zenitel Intercom 394
Zone 313
Zone Hardware Status 314
Zone Name 307
Zone Status 313
Zone Terminals 305, 310
24-10832-194 Rev. E
546 INDEX
24-10832-194 Rev. E
Security Solutions
(805) 522-5555
www.johnsoncontrols.com